2012 C Class Sedan

C-Class
Operator's Manual
Symbols ! These warning notes draw your attention
Registered trademarks: to hazards that could cause damage to your
RBabySmart
vehicle.
is a registered trademark of
the Siemens Automotive Corp. i This symbol indicates useful instructions
RBluetooth is a registered trademark of the or further information that could be helpful
Bluetooth SIG Inc. to you.
RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. X This symbol designates an
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks instruction you must follow.
of Dolby Laboratories. X Several consecutive symbols
RESP and PRE-SAFE are registered indicate an instruction with several
trademarks of Daimler AG. steps.
RHomeLink is a registered trademark of Y Page This symbol tells you where you
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company. can find further information on a
topic.
RiPod and iTunes are registered
YY This symbol indicates a warning or
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
an instruction that is continued on
USA and in other countries.
the next page.
RLogic 7 is a registered trademark of
Display This font indicates a display
Harman International Industries,
message in the multifunction
Incorporated.
display/COMAND display.
RMicrosoft is a registered trademark of the
Parts of the software in the vehicle are
Microsoft Corporation in the USA and in
other countries. subject to copyright according to 2005
RSIRIUS and associated brands are
The FreeType Project
http://www.freetype.org. All rights
registered trademarks of SIRIUS XM Radio
reserved.
Inc.
RHD Radio and associated brands are
registered trademarks of the iBiquity
Digital Corporation.
RWindows Media is a registered trademark
of the Microsoft Corporation in the USA and
in other countries.
RGracenote is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZagatSurvey and associated brands are
registered trademarks of Zagat.
In this Operator's Manual, you will find the
following symbols:
G WARNING
Warning notes draw your attention to hazards
that endanger your health or life, or the health
or life of others.
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before you drive off, please familiarize
yourself with your vehicle and read this
manual, especially the safety and warning
notes. This will help you to obtain the
maximum pleasure from your vehicle and
avoid endangering yourself and others.
The equipment or model designation of your
vehicle may differ according to:
Rmodel
Rorder
Rcountry variant
Ravailability
Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its

vehicles to the state of the art.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right
to introduce changes in the following areas:
Rdesign
Requipment
Rtechnical features
Therefore, you cannot base any claims on the
illustrations or text content in this Operator's
Manual.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
ROperator's Manual
RService Booklet
REquipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all

times. When you sell the vehicle, always pass
the documents on to the new owner.
The technical documentation team at
Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant
motoring.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2045843582 2045843582
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27
Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 35
Opening/closing ................................. 69
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 91
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 105
Climate control ................................. 121
Driving and parking .......................... 135
On-board computer and displays .... 193
Stowing and features ....................... 253
Maintenance and care ...................... 277
Breakdown assistance ..................... 291
Wheels and tires ............................... 309
Technical data ................................... 341

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Important safety notes .................... 38

Knee bag .......................................... 40
115 V socket ...................................... 263 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
12 V socket indicator lamp .................................. 42
see Sockets Pelvis air bag ................................... 41
4ETS Safety guidelines ............................. 37
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Side impact air bag .......................... 40
Traction System) Window curtain air bag .................... 42
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Air-conditioning system
drive) .................................................. 175 see Climate control
4MATIC off-road system ................... 175 AIR FLOW ........................................... 127
Air pressure
A see Tire pressure
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Air vents
Display message ............................ 214 Glove box ....................................... 132
Function/notes ................................ 59 Important safety notes .................. 131
Important safety notes .................... 59 Rear ............................................... 133
Warning lamp ................................. 242 Setting ........................................... 131
Activating/deactivating cooling Setting the center air vents ........... 132
with air dehumidification ................. 126 Setting the side air vents ............... 132
Active Blind Spot Assist Alarm system
Activating/deactivating (on- see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
board computer) ............................ 205 Alertness Assistant
Function/information .................... 187 see ATTENTION ASSIST
Active Driving Assistance package . 187 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 210
Active Lane Keeping Assist Anti-lock Braking System
Activating/deactivating (on- see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
board computer) ............................ 205 Anti-Theft Alarm system
Display message ............................ 229 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Function/information .................... 190 Ashtray ............................................... 262
Active light function ......................... 110 Assistance menu (on-board
Active Light System computer) .......................................... 204
Display message ............................ 224 ASSYST PLUS
Active service system PLUS see ASSYST PLUS service interval
see ASSYST PLUS service interval display
display ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 64 Activating/deactivating ................... 67
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function ........................................... 67
Display message ............................ 225 Switching off the alarm .................... 67
Function/notes ............................. 110 ATTENTION ASSIST
Switching on/off (on-board Activating/deactivating ................. 205
computer) ...................................... 207 Display message ............................ 228
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 349 Function/notes ............................. 182
Air bags Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 201
Display message ............................ 221 Audio system
Front air bag (driver, front see separate operating instructions
passenger) ....................................... 39
Index 5
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Important safety notes .................. 298

see Qualified specialist workshop Jump starting ................................. 301
AUTO lights Belt
Display message ............................ 225 see Seat belts
see Lights Blind Spot Assist
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 108 Activating/deactivating ................. 205
Automatic transmission Notes/function .............................. 183
Automatic drive program ............... 146 see Active Blind Spot Assist
Changing gear ............................... 144 Brake Assist System
Display message ............................ 236 see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Driving tips .................................... 144 Brake fluid
Emergency running mode .............. 149 Display message ............................ 217
Kickdown ....................................... 144 Notes ............................................. 350
Manual drive program .................... 147 Brake fluid level ................................ 282
Problem (malfunction) ................... 149 Brake lamps
Program selector button ................ 144 Changing bulbs .............................. 116
Pulling away ................................... 139 Display message ............................ 223
Releasing the parking lock Brakes
manually ........................................ 149 ABS .................................................. 59
Selector lever ................................ 142 BAS .................................................. 59
Shift ranges ................................... 146 BAS PLUS ........................................ 60
Starting the engine ........................ 139 Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 350
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 145 Display message ............................ 214
Transmission position display ........ 143 Driving tips .................................... 156
Transmission positions .................. 143 High-performance brake system .... 158
Automatic transmission Important safety notes .................. 156
emergency mode ............................... 149 Maintenance .................................. 157
Parking brake ................................ 154
B Warning lamp ................................. 241
Breakdown
Back support
see Flat tire
see Lumbar support
see Towing away/tow-starting
Backup lamp
Bulbs
Changing bulbs .............................. 116
see Changing bulbs
Display message ............................ 224
Bag hook ............................................ 258
C
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 59
Basic settings California
see Settings Important notice for retail
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System customers and lessees .................... 22
PLUS) .................................................... 60 Calling up a malfunction
Battery (SmartKey) see Display messages
Checking .......................................... 74 Capacities
Important safety notes .................... 74 see Technical data
Replacing ......................................... 74 Car
Battery (vehicle) see Vehicle
Charging ........................................ 300
Display message ............................ 227
6 Index
Care Children
Carpets .......................................... 289 In the vehicle ................................... 53
Car wash ........................................ 284 Restraint systems ............................ 53
Display ........................................... 288 Child seat
Exterior lights ................................ 287 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Gear or selector lever .................... 288 anchors ............................................ 55
Matte finish ................................... 285 Special seat belt retractor ............... 55
Notes ............................................. 283 Top Tether ....................................... 56
Paint .............................................. 285 Cigarette lighter ................................ 262
Plastic trim .................................... 288 Climate control
Power washer ................................ 284 Automatic climate control (3-
Rear view camera .......................... 287 zone) .............................................. 125
Roof lining ...................................... 289 Controlling automatically ............... 127
Seat belt ........................................ 289 Cooling with air dehumidification . . 126
Seat cover ..................................... 288 Defrosting the windows ................. 130
Sensors ......................................... 287 Defrosting the windshield .............. 129
Steering wheel ............................... 288 Dual-zone automatic climate
Tail pipes ....................................... 287 control ........................................... 123
Trim pieces .................................... 288 Important safety notes .................. 122
Washing by hand ........................... 284 Indicator lamp ................................ 127
Wheels ........................................... 285 Maximum cooling .......................... 130
Windows ........................................ 286 Notes on using automatic climate
Wiper blades .................................. 286 control ................................... 124, 126
Wooden trim .................................. 288 Overview of systems ...................... 122
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 258 Problems with cooling with air
Car wash (care) ................................. 284 dehumidification ............................ 127
CD player/CD changer (on-board Problem with the rear window
computer) .......................................... 202 defroster ........................................ 130
Cell phone Rear control panel ......................... 125
see Mobile phone Refrigerant ..................................... 350
Center console ..................................... 32 Setting the air distribution ............. 128
Central locking Setting the airflow ......................... 129
Automatic locking (on-board Setting the air vents ...................... 131
computer) ...................................... 208 Setting the climate mode (AIR
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 70 FLOW) ............................................ 127
Changing bulbs Setting the temperature ................ 128
Brake lamps ................................... 116 Switching air-recirculation mode
Cornering light function ................. 115 on/off ............................................ 130
High-beam headlamps ................... 115 Switching on/off ........................... 126
Important safety notes .................. 113 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 131
Low-beam headlamps .................... 114 Switching the rear window
Overview of bulb types .................. 114 heating on/off ............................... 130
Parking lamps ................................ 115 Switching the ZONE function on/
Reversing lamps ............................ 116 off .................................................. 129
Standing lamps (front) ................... 115 Cockpit
Child-proof locks Overview .......................................... 28
Important safety notes .................... 57 see Instrument cluster
Rear doors ....................................... 57
Index 7
COMAND D
see separate operating instructions
Combination switch .......................... 109 Dashboard
Compass see Cockpit
Calibrating ..................................... 276 Data
Calling up ....................................... 275 see Technical data
Setting ........................................... 275 Daytime running lamps
Consumption statistics (on-board Display message ............................ 224
computer) .......................................... 199 Switching on/off (on-board
Convenience closing feature .............. 84 computer) ...................................... 207
Convenience opening feature ............ 84 Switching on/off (switch) .............. 107
Coolant (engine) Delayed switch-off
Checking the level ......................... 280 Exterior lighting (on-board
Display message ............................ 225 computer) ...................................... 207
Notes ............................................. 350 Interior lighting .............................. 208
Temperature (on-board computer) . 210 Digital speedometer ......................... 199
Temperature gauge ........................ 194 Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 288
Warning lamp ................................. 247 Display messages
Cooling Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 213
see Climate control Driving systems ............................. 228
Cornering light function Engine ............................................ 225
Changing bulbs .............................. 115 General notes ................................ 213
Display message ............................ 222 Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 213
Function/notes ............................. 110 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 238
Crash-responsive emergency Lights ............................................. 222
lighting ............................................... 113 Safety systems .............................. 214
Cruise control Service interval display .................. 282
Cruise control lever ....................... 160 SmartKey ....................................... 238
Deactivating ................................... 161 Tires ............................................... 233
Display message ............................ 233 Vehicle ........................................... 236
Driving system ............................... 159 Distance display (on-board
Function/notes ............................. 159 computer) .......................................... 204
Important safety notes .................. 159 Distance recorder ............................. 199
LIM indicator lamp ......................... 160 see Odometer
Setting a speed .............................. 160 see Trip odometer
Storing and maintaining current Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 249
speed ............................................. 160 DISTRONIC PLUS
Cup holder Deactivating ................................... 169
Center console .............................. 260 Display message ............................ 231
Important safety notes .................. 259 Displays in the multifunction
Rear compartment ......................... 260 display ........................................... 168
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 25 Driving tips .................................... 170
Customer Relations Department ....... 25 Function/notes ............................. 161
Important safety notes .................. 161
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 168
Warning lamp ................................. 249
8 Index
Doors Driving systems

Automatic locking (on-board Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 187
computer) ...................................... 208 Active Driving Assistance
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 78 package ......................................... 187
Central locking/unlocking Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 190
(SmartKey) ....................................... 70 ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 182
Control panel ................................... 34 Blind Spot Assist ............................ 183
Display message ............................ 237 Cruise control ................................ 159
Emergency locking ........................... 79 Display message ............................ 228
Emergency unlocking ....................... 79 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 161
Important safety notes .................... 77 Dynamic handling package with
Opening (from inside) ...................... 78 sports mode .................................. 171
Drinking and driving ......................... 155 HOLD function ............................... 172
Drinks holder Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 185
see Cup holder Lane Tracking package .................. 183
Drive program Parking Guidance ........................... 178
Automatic ...................................... 146 PARKTRONIC ................................. 175
Display ........................................... 143 RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 174
Manual ........................................... 147 Rear view camera .......................... 181
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 210 Driving tips
Drive program selector ..................... 145 Automatic transmission ................. 144
Driver's door Brakes ........................................... 156
see Doors Break-in period .............................. 136
Driver's seat DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 170
see Seats Downhill gradient ........................... 156
Driving abroad Drinking and driving ....................... 155
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 283 Driving abroad ............................... 106
Symmetrical low beam .................. 106 Driving in winter ............................. 158
Driving lamps Driving on flooded roads ................ 158
see Daytime running lamps Driving on wet roads ...................... 158
Driving on flooded roads .................. 158 Exhaust check ............................... 156
Driving safety systems Fuel ................................................ 155
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 59 General .......................................... 155
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 64 Hydroplaning ................................. 158
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 59 Icy road surfaces ........................... 159
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Limited braking efficiency on
PLUS) ............................................... 60 salted roads ................................... 157
Electronic brake force distribution ... 64 Pedals ............................................ 155
ESP (Electronic Stability Snow chains .................................. 313
Program) .......................................... 61 Symmetrical low beam .................. 106
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Wet road surface ........................... 156
System) ........................................... 61 DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 202
Important safety information ........... 59 DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 202
Overview .......................................... 58 Dynamic handling package with
PRE-SAFE Brake ............................. 65 sports mode ....................................... 171
Index 9
E Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 279
EASY-ENTRY feature Additives ........................................ 349
Activating/deactivating ................. 209 Checking the oil level ..................... 279
Function/notes ............................. 100 Checking the oil level using the
EASY-EXIT feature dipstick .......................................... 279
Crash-responsive ........................... 101 Display message ............................ 227
Function/notes ............................. 100 Filling capacity ............................... 346
Switching on/off ........................... 209 Notes about oil grades ................... 349
EBD (electronic brake force Notes on oil level/consumption .... 279
distribution) Temperature (on-board computer) . 210
Display message ............................ 216 Viscosity ........................................ 349
Function/notes ................................ 64 ESP (Electronic Stability
Electrical fuses Program)
see Fuses AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 210
Electronic brake force distribution Deactivating/activating (AMG
see EBD (electronic brake force vehicles) .......................................... 62
distribution) Deactivating/activating (except
Electronic Stability Program AMG vehicles) ................................ 204
see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Deactivating/activating (notes;
Electronic Traction System except AMG vehicles) ...................... 62
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Display message ............................ 214
Traction System) ETS/4ETS ........................................ 61
Emergency release Function/notes ................................ 61
Driver's door .................................... 79 Important safety information ........... 61
Fuel filler flap ................................. 151 Warning lamp ................................. 243
Trunk ............................................... 82 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction
Vehicle ............................................. 79 System) ................................................ 61
Emergency spare wheel Exhaust check ................................... 156
Storage location ............................ 293 Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning
Emergency Tensioning Devices instructions) ...................................... 287
Function ........................................... 52 Exterior lighting
Safety guidelines ............................. 37 see Lights
Emissions purification Exterior mirrors
Service and warranty information .... 21 Adjusting ....................................... 101
Engine Dipping (automatic) ....................... 102
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 246 Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 102
Display message ............................ 225 Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 101
Emergency starting ........................ 305 Folding in when locking (on-board
Engine number ............................... 344 computer) ...................................... 209
Irregular running ............................ 141 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 102
Starting problems .......................... 141 Setting ........................................... 102
Starting the engine with the Storing settings (memory
SmartKey ....................................... 139 function) ........................................ 103
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 139 Storing the parking position .......... 102
Switching off .................................. 153 Eyeglasses compartment ................. 255
Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 141
10 Index
F Dashboard fuse box ....................... 305

Fuse box in the engine
Filler cap compartment ................................. 306
see Fuel filler flap Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 306
First-aid kit ......................................... 292 Important safety notes .................. 305
Flat tire
Changing a wheel/mounting the G
spare wheel ................................... 293
MOExtended run-flat system ......... 297 Garage door opener
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 293 Clearing the memory ..................... 274
Raising the vehicle ......................... 295 Frequencies ................................... 275
Floormat ............................................. 276 Notes ............................................. 270
Frequencies Opening/closing the garage door .. 273
Garage door opener ....................... 275 Programming (button in the rear-
Front fog lamps ................................. 108 view mirror) ................................... 271
Display message ............................ 223 Gasoline ............................................. 150
Switching on/off ........................... 108 Gear indicator (on-board
Front windshield computer) .......................................... 210
see Windshield Gear or selector lever (cleaning
Fuel guidelines) ......................................... 288
Additives ........................................ 348 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 342
Consumption statistics .................. 199 Glove box ........................................... 254
Displaying the current
consumption .................................. 199 H
Displaying the range ...................... 199 Handbrake
Driving tips .................................... 155
see Parking brake
Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 347
Hazard warning lamps ...................... 109
Fuel gauge ....................................... 29
Headlamp cleaning system
Notes ............................................. 351
Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 347
Headlamps
Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 281
Refueling ........................................ 150
Cleaning system (function) ............ 109
Specifications ................................ 348
Fogging up ..................................... 112
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 346
see Automatic headlamp mode
Fuel filler flap
Head restraints
Emergency release ........................ 151
Adjusting ......................................... 95
Opening/closing ............................ 151
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 96
Fuel level
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 95
Calling up the range (on-board
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 96
computer) ...................................... 199
Installing/removing (rear) ................ 97
Fuel tank
Luxury .............................................. 96
Capacity ........................................ 346
see NECK-PRO head restraints
see NECK-PRO head restraints/
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
kit) ...................................................... 292
Heating
Fuses
see Climate control
Allocation chart ............................. 305
Before changing ............................. 305
Index 11
High-beam headlamps K
Changing bulbs .............................. 115
Display message ............................ 223 Key
Switching Adaptive Highbeam see SmartKey
Assist on/off ................................. 110 KEYLESS-GO
Switching on/off ........................... 109 Convenience closing feature ............ 85
Hill start assist .................................. 140 Display message ............................ 238
HOLD function Locking ............................................ 71
Display message ............................ 228 Start/Stop button .......................... 137
Function/notes ............................. 172 Starting the engine ........................ 139
Hood Unlocking ......................................... 71
Closing ........................................... 279 Key positions
Display message ............................ 237 KEYLESS-GO .................................. 137
Opening ......................................... 278 SmartKey ....................................... 137
Hydroplaning ..................................... 158 Kickdown
Driving tips .................................... 144
Manual drive program .................... 148
I
Knee bag .............................................. 40
Ignition lock
see Key positions L
Immobilizer .......................................... 66
Indicator lamps Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators Lane-change assistant
see Turn signals see Blind Spot Assist
Instrument cluster Lane detection (automatic)
Overview .......................................... 29 see Lane Keeping Assist
Settings ......................................... 206 Lane Keeping Assist
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 30 Activating/deactivating ................. 205
Instrument cluster lighting ................ 29 Display message ............................ 229
Instrument lighting Function/information .................... 185
see Instrument cluster lighting Lane Tracking package ..................... 183
Interior lighting ................................. 112 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 211
Automatic control .......................... 112 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
Delayed switch-off (on-board anchors ................................................ 55
computer) ...................................... 208 Lighting
Emergency lighting ........................ 113 see Lights
Manual control ............................... 113 Lights
Overview ........................................ 112 Activating/deactivating the
Reading lamp ................................. 112 interior lighting delayed switch-off . 208
Active light function ....................... 110
J Automatic headlamp mode ............ 108
Cornering light function ................. 110
Jack Display message ............................ 222
Storage location ............................ 292 Driving abroad ............................... 106
Using ............................................. 295 Fog lamps ...................................... 108
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 301 Hazard warning lamps ................... 109
High beam flasher .......................... 109
12 Index
High-beam headlamps ................... 109 M

Light switch ................................... 106
Low-beam headlamps .................... 107 M+S tires ............................................ 312
Parking lamps ................................ 106 Maintenance
Rear fog lamp ................................ 108 see ASSYST PLUS service interval
Switching Adaptive Highbeam display
Assist on/off ................................. 207 Malfunction message
Switching the daytime running see Display messages
lamps on/off (on-board Matte finish (cleaning
computer) ...................................... 207 instructions) ...................................... 285
Switching the daytime running mbrace
lamps on/off (switch) .................... 107 Call priority .................................... 268
Switching the exterior lighting Display message ............................ 218
delayed switch-off on/off (on- Downloading destinations
board computer) ............................ 207 (COMAND) ..................................... 269
Switching the surround lighting Emergency call .............................. 266
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 207 Important safety notes .................. 264
Turn signals ................................... 109 Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 270
see Changing bulbs MB info call button ........................ 268
see Interior lighting Remote vehicle locking .................. 270
Light sensor (display message) ....... 225 Roadside Assistance button .......... 267
LIM indicator lamp Search & Send ............................... 269
Cruise control ................................ 160 Self-test ......................................... 265
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 164 System .......................................... 265
Loading guidelines ............................ 254 Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 269
Locking Mechanical key
see Central locking Function/notes ................................ 73
Locking (doors) Locking vehicle ................................ 79
Automatic ........................................ 78 Unlocking the driver's door .............. 79
Emergency locking ........................... 79 Memory card (audio) ......................... 202
From inside (central locking Memory function ............................... 103
button) ............................................. 78 Message memory (on-board
Locking centrally computer) .......................................... 213
see Central locking Messages
Locking verification signal (on- see Display messages
board computer) ............................... 208 Mirrors
Low-beam headlamps see Exterior mirrors
Changing bulbs .............................. 114 see Rear-view mirror
Display message ............................ 222 see Vanity mirror
Setting for driving abroad Mobile phone
(symmetrical) ................................. 106 Menu (on-board computer) ............ 202
Switching on/off ........................... 107 Modifying the programming
Lumbar support (SmartKey) ........................................... 73
Adjusting ......................................... 97 MOExtended run-flat system ........... 297
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar MP3
support ............................................ 97 Operation ....................................... 202
Luxury head restraints ....................... 96 see separate operating instructions
Index 13
Multifunction display Factory settings submenu ............. 210

Function/notes ............................. 196 Important safety notes .................. 194
Permanent display ......................... 206 Instrument cluster submenu .......... 206
Multifunction steering wheel Lighting submenu .......................... 207
Operating the on-board computer . 195 Menu overview .............................. 198
Overview .......................................... 31 Message memory .......................... 213
Multifunction steering wheel (4 Navigation menu ............................ 200
buttons) Operation ....................................... 195
see 4-button multifunction RACETIMER ................................... 211
steering wheel Service menu ................................. 206
Settings menu ............................... 206
N Standard display ............................ 199
Telephone menu ............................ 202
Navigation Trip menu ...................................... 199
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 200 Vehicle submenu ........................... 208
see separate operating instructions Video DVD operation ..................... 202
NECK-PRO head restraints On-board diagnostics interface .......... 24
Operation ......................................... 47 Opening and closing the side trim
Resetting after being triggered ........ 47 panels ................................................. 115
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints Operating safety
Operation ......................................... 47 On-board diagnostics interface ........ 24
Resetting after being triggered ........ 47 Operating system
Notes on breaking-in a new
see On-board computer
vehicle ................................................ 136 Outside temperature display ........... 195
Overhead control panel ...................... 33
O Override feature
Occupant Classification System Rear side windows ........................... 57
(OCS)
Faults ............................................... 46 P
Operation ......................................... 42
Paint code number ............................ 343
System self-test ............................... 45
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 285
Occupant safety
Panic alarm .......................................... 58
Children in the vehicle ..................... 53
Panorama roof with power tilt/
System overview .............................. 36
sliding panel
Octane number (fuel) ........................ 348
Opening/closing .............................. 87
Odometer ........................................... 199
Opening/closing the roller
see Trip odometer
sunblind ........................................... 88
Oil
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89
see Engine oil
Resetting ......................................... 88
On-board computer
Panorama sliding sunroof
AMG menu ..................................... 210
Important safety notes .................... 86
Assistance menu ........................... 204
Parcel net ........................................... 256
Audio menu ................................... 201
Parking ............................................... 153
Convenience submenu .................. 209
Displaying a service message ........ 283
Parking brake ................................ 154
Display messages .......................... 213
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 168
14 Index
Position of exterior mirror, front- Q

passenger side ............................... 102
Rear view camera .......................... 181 Qualified specialist workshop ........... 24
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid R
Parking Guidance ........................... 178 RACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 174
see Exterior mirrors RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 211
see PARKTRONIC Radar sensor system
Parking brake Activating/deactivating ................. 208
Display message ............................ 216 Display message ............................ 229
Notes/function .............................. 154 Radio
Parking Guidance Selecting a station ......................... 201
Display message ............................ 230 see separate operating instructions
Important safety notes .................. 178 Reading lamp ..................................... 112
Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 115 Rear compartment
PARKTRONIC Setting the airflow ......................... 129
Deactivating/activating ................. 177 Setting the air vents ...................... 133
Driving system ............................... 175 Rear fog lamp
Function/notes ............................. 175 Display message ............................ 223
Problem (malfunction) ................... 178 Switching on/off ........................... 108
Range of the sensors ..................... 176 Rear seat
Warning display ............................. 177 Display message ............................ 237
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Folding the backrest forwards/
lamp ...................................................... 42 back ............................................... 257
Pedals ................................................. 155 Rear view camera
Permanent four-wheel drive Cleaning instructions ..................... 287
see 4MATIC (permanent four- Function/notes ............................. 181
wheel drive) Rear-view mirror
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 288 Anti-glare (manual) ........................ 101
Power washers .................................. 284 Dipping (automatic) ....................... 102
Power windows Rear window blind ............................ 261
see Side windows Rear window defroster
PRE-SAFE Brake (vehicles with Problem (malfunction) ................... 130
DISTRONIC PLUS) Rear window heating
Display message ............................ 218 Switching on/off ........................... 130
Function/notes ................................ 65 Rear window wiper
Switching on/off ........................... 205 Replacing the wiper blade .............. 118
Warning lamp ................................. 249 Switching on/off ........................... 117
Preventive occupant safety Refueling
system Fuel gauge ....................................... 29
see PRE-SAFE (Preventive Important safety notes .................. 150
occupant safety system) Refueling process .......................... 151
Product information ............................ 21 see Fuel
Program selector button .................. 144 Releasing the parking lock
Pulling away manually (automatic
Automatic transmission ................. 139 transmission) ..................................... 149
Index 15
Remote control Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 52

Garage door opener ....................... 270 Fastening ......................................... 50
Reporting safety defects .................... 25 Important safety guidelines ............. 48
Reserve (fuel tank) Releasing ......................................... 51
see Fuel Safety guidelines ............................. 37
Reserve fuel Special seat belt retractor ............... 55
Display message ............................ 228 Warning lamp ................................. 239
Warning lamp ................................. 246 Warning lamp (function) ................... 51
see Fuel Seats
Residual heat (climate control) ........ 131 Adaptive seat backrests (AMG
Restraint system vehicles) .......................................... 97
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 94
System) Adjusting (manually and
Reverse gear electrically) ...................................... 94
Engaging (automatic Adjusting lumbar support ................ 97
transmission) ................................. 142 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 22 support ............................................ 97
Roller blind Adjusting the head restraint ............ 95
see Roller sunblind Cleaning the cover ......................... 288
Roller sunblind Correct driver's seat position ........... 92
Panorama roof with power tilt/ Important safety notes .................... 93
sliding panel ..................................... 88 Seat heating problem ...................... 98
Rear side windows ......................... 261 Seat ventilation problem .................. 99
Rear window .................................. 261 Storing settings (memory
Roof carrier ........................................ 259 function) ........................................ 103
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Switching seat heating on/off ......... 98
guidelines) ......................................... 289 Switching seat ventilation on/off .... 98
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 351 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 287
Route Service
see Route guidance (navigation) see ASSYST PLUS service interval
Route guidance (navigation) ............ 200 display
Service interval display
S Displaying service messages ......... 283
Hiding service messages ............... 283
Safety Notes ............................................. 283
Children in the vehicle ..................... 53 Service messages .......................... 282
Child restraint systems .................... 53 Service menu (on-board computer) . 206
Occupant Classification System Service products
(OCS) ............................................... 42 Brake fluid ..................................... 350
Overview of occupant safety Capacities ...................................... 346
systems ........................................... 36 Coolant (engine) ............................ 350
Safety systems Engine oil ....................................... 349
see Driving safety systems Fuel ................................................ 347
Seat belts Important safety notes .................. 344
Adjusting the height ......................... 51 Refrigerant (air-conditioning
Belt force limiters ............................ 52 system) .......................................... 350
Cleaning ......................................... 289 Washer fluid ................................... 351
Correct usage .................................. 49
16 Index
Settings Speedometer
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 210 Digital ............................................ 199
On-board computer ....................... 206 In the Instrument cluster ................. 29
Setting the air distribution ............... 128 Segments ...................................... 195
Setting the airflow ............................ 129 Selecting the unit of
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 210 measurement ................................ 206
Side impact air bag ............................. 40 see Instrument cluster
Side marker lamp (display SPORT handling mode
message) ............................................ 224 Activating/deactivating (AMG
Side windows vehicles) .......................................... 62
Convenience closing feature ............ 84 Warning lamp ................................. 244
Convenience opening feature .......... 84 SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Important safety information ........... 83 System)
Opening/closing .............................. 83 Display message ............................ 219
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 86 Introduction ..................................... 36
Resetting ......................................... 85 Warning lamp ................................. 245
Sliding sunroof Warning lamp (function) ................... 36
Important safety notes .................... 86 Standing lamps
Opening/closing .............................. 87 Changing bulbs .............................. 115
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89 Display message ............................ 224
Resetting ......................................... 87 Switching on/off ........................... 106
see Panorama roof with power Starting (engine) ................................ 138
tilt/sliding panel Station
SmartKey see Radio
Changing the battery ....................... 74 Steering (display message) .............. 237
Changing the programming ............. 73 Steering wheel
Checking the battery ....................... 74 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100
Convenience closing feature ............ 84 Adjusting (manually) ........................ 99
Convenience opening feature .......... 84 Button overview ............................... 31
Display message ............................ 238 Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 195
Door central locking/unlocking ....... 70 Cleaning ......................................... 288
Important safety notes .................... 70 Important safety notes .................... 99
Loss ................................................. 76 Paddle shifters ............................... 145
Mechanical key ................................ 73 Storing settings (memory
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 137 function) ........................................ 103
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 76 Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 145
Starting the engine ........................ 139 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 211
Snow chains ...................................... 313 Stowage compartments
Sockets Armrest (under) ............................. 255
Points to observe before use ......... 263 Cup holders ................................... 259
Rear compartment ......................... 263 Eyeglasses compartment ............... 255
Spare wheel Glove box ....................................... 254
Notes/data .................................... 337 Important safety information ......... 254
Storage location ............................ 293 Parcel net ...................................... 256
see Emergency spare wheel Rear ............................................... 256
Specialist workshop ............................ 24 Under driver's seat/front-
Speed, controlling passenger seat .............................. 256
see Cruise control
Index 17
Stowage well beneath the trunk Redialing ........................................ 203

floor .................................................... 258 Rejecting/ending a call ................. 203
Summer opening Temperature
see Convenience opening feature Coolant .......................................... 194
Summer tires ..................................... 312 Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 210
Sun visor ............................................ 260 Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 210
Supplemental Restraint System Outside temperature ...................... 195
see SRS (Supplemental Restraint Setting (climate control) ................ 128
System) Theft deterrent systems
Surround lighting (on-board ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 67
computer) .......................................... 207 Immobilizer ...................................... 66
Switching air-recirculation mode Through-loading feature ................... 256
on/off ................................................. 130 Tilt/sliding sunroof
Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 67 see Sliding sunroof
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 211
T Tiredness assistant
see ATTENTION ASSIST
Tachometer ........................................ 195 Tire pressure
Tail lamps Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 319
Display message ............................ 223 Checking manually ........................ 317
Tank Display message ............................ 233
see Fuel tank Maximum ....................................... 316
Tank content Notes ............................................. 315
Fuel gauge ....................................... 29 Pressure loss warning .................... 317
Technical data Recommended ............................... 313
Notes ............................................. 342 Tire pressure monitoring system
Tires/wheels ................................. 335 Function/notes ............................. 319
Vehicle data ................................... 351 Restarting ...................................... 321
TELEAID Warning lamp ................................. 250
Call priority .................................... 268 Tires
Display message ............................ 218 Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 333
Downloading destinations Average weight of the vehicle
(COMAND) ..................................... 269 occupants (definition) .................... 331
Emergency call .............................. 266 Bar (definition) ............................... 331
Important safety notes .................. 264 Characteristics .............................. 331
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 270 Checking ........................................ 311
MB info call button ........................ 268 Definition of terms ......................... 331
Remote vehicle locking .................. 270 Direction of rotation ...................... 334
Roadside Assistance button .......... 267 Display message ............................ 233
Search & Send ............................... 269 Distribution of the vehicle
Self-test ......................................... 265 occupants (definition) .................... 334
System .......................................... 265 DOT, Tire Identification Number
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 269 (TIN) ............................................... 330
Telephone DOT (Department of
Accepting a call ............................. 203 Transportation) (definition) ............ 331
Display message ............................ 237 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 202 (definition) ..................................... 332
Number from the phone book ........ 203
18 Index
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Uniform Tire Quality Grading

(definition) ..................................... 332 Standards (definition) .................... 331
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Unladen weight (definition) ............ 332
Rating) (definition) ......................... 332 Wear indicator (definition) ............. 334
Important safety notes .................. 310 Wheel rim (definition) .................... 332
Increased vehicle weight due to see Flat tire
optional equipment (definition) ...... 332 Top Tether ............................................ 56
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 332 Towing
Labeling (overview) ........................ 327 Important safety guidelines ........... 302
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 333 Installing the towing eye ................ 303
Load index ..................................... 330 Removing the towing eye ............... 304
Load index (definition) ................... 332 With the rear axle raised ................ 304
Maximum loaded vehicle weight Towing away
(definition) ..................................... 332 With both axles on the ground ....... 304
Maximum load on a tire Tow-starting
(definition) ..................................... 333 Emergency engine starting ............ 305
Maximum permissible tire Important safety notes .................. 302
pressure (definition) ....................... 333 Transmission
Maximum tire load ......................... 325 see Automatic transmission
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 333 Transporting the vehicle .................. 304
Optional equipment weight Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 288
(definition) ..................................... 333 Trip computer (on-board
PSI (pounds per square inch) computer) .......................................... 199
(definition) ..................................... 333 Trip meter
Replacing ....................................... 334 see Trip odometer
Service life ..................................... 311 Trip odometer
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 333 Calling up ....................................... 199
Speed rating (definition) ................ 332 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 200
Storing ........................................... 335 Trunk
Structure and characteristics Emergency release .......................... 82
(definition) ..................................... 331 Important safety guidelines ............. 80
Temperature .................................. 327 Locking separately ........................... 82
TIN (Tire Identification Number) Opening (automatically from
(definition) ..................................... 333 inside) .............................................. 81
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 333 Opening (automatically from
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 333 outside) ............................................ 81
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 331 Trunk lid
Tire size (data) ............................... 335 Display message ............................ 236
Tire size designation, load-bearing Opening/closing .............................. 80
capacity, speed rating .................... 328 Turn signals
Tire tread ....................................... 311 Display message ............................ 222
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 333 Switching on/off ........................... 109
Total load limit (definition) ............. 334 Type identification plate
Traction ......................................... 326 see Vehicle identification plate
Traction (definition) ....................... 334
Tread wear ..................................... 326
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 326
Index 19
U Check Engine ................................. 246

Coolant .......................................... 247
Unlocking Cruise control ................................ 160
Emergency unlocking ....................... 79 Distance warning ........................... 249
From inside the vehicle (central DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 249
unlocking button) ............................. 78 ESP .............................................. 243
ESP OFF ....................................... 244
V Fuel tank ........................................ 246
Vanity mirror (in sun visor) .............. 260 LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 164
Vehicle Overview .......................................... 30
Correct use ...................................... 24 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Data acquisition ............................... 25 indicator lamp .................................. 42
Display message ............................ 236 Reserve fuel ................................... 246
Equipment ....................................... 21 Seat belt ........................................ 239
Individual settings .......................... 206 SPORT handling mode ................... 244
Limited Warranty ............................. 25 SRS ................................................ 245
Loading .......................................... 322 Tire pressure monitor .................... 250
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 79 Warranty ............................................ 343
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 71 Washer fluid
Lowering ........................................ 297 Display message ............................ 237
Maintenance .................................... 22 see Windshield washer system
Parking for a long period ................ 154 Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 297
Pulling away ................................... 139 Wheel chock ...................................... 294
Raising ........................................... 295 Wheels
Reporting problems ......................... 24 Changing a wheel .......................... 293
Towing away .................................. 302 Checking ........................................ 311
Transporting .................................. 304 Cleaning ......................................... 285
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 79 Important safety notes .................. 310
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 71 Interchanging/changing ................ 334
Vehicle data ................................... 351 Mounting a wheel .......................... 296
Vehicle battery Removing a wheel .......................... 296
see Battery (vehicle) Storing ........................................... 335
Vehicle data ....................................... 351 Tightening torque ........................... 297
see Technical data Wheel size/tire size ....................... 335
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 351 Window curtain air bag
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 79 Display message ............................ 219
Vehicle identification number Operation ......................................... 42
see VIN Windows
Vehicle identification plate .............. 343 Cleaning ......................................... 286
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 292 see Side windows
Video (DVD) ........................................ 202 Windshield
VIN ...................................................... 343 Defrosting ...................................... 129
Windshield washer system .............. 281
W Notes ............................................. 351
Windshield wipers
Warning and indicator lamps Problem (malfunction) ................... 119
ABS ................................................ 242 Rear window wiper ........................ 117
Brakes ........................................... 241
20 Index
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 118

Switching on/off ........................... 116
Winter driving
Slippery road surfaces ................... 159
Snow chains .................................. 313
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 312
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 286
Replacing (rear window) ................ 118
Replacing (windshield) ................... 118
Wooden trim (cleaning
instructions) ...................................... 288
Introduction 21
Product information Vehicle equipment

This Operator's Manual describes all models
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
and all standard and optional equipment of
genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion
your vehicle available at the time of
parts and accessories that have been
publication of the Operator's Manual.
approved for the type of vehicle.
Country-specific differences are possible.
Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well as Please note that your vehicle may not be
conversion parts and accessories which have equipped with all features described. This
been specifically approved for your vehicle for also applies to safety-related systems and
their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite functions. The equipment in your vehicle may
ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is therefore differ from that shown in the
unable to assess other parts. Therefore, descriptions and illustrations. All the systems
Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for found in your vehicle are listed in the original
the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz purchase agreement of your vehicle. Should
vehicles, even if they have been you have any questions concerning
independently or officially approved. The use equipment and operation, please consult an
of non-approved parts could affect your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
vehicle's operating safety. Mercedes-Benz
The Operating Instructions and the
therefore recommends that you use genuine
Maintenance Booklet are important
Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion parts and
documents and should be kept in the vehicle.
accessories that have been approved for the
type of vehicle. Genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts, approved conversion parts and
Service and vehicle operation
accessories are available from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Here, you will receive Service and literature
advice about permissible technical
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
modifications, and the parts will be
warranties printed in the Service and
professionally installed.
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
Operator's Manual
originally installed in the vehicle in
Notes on the Operator's Manual accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
This Operator's Manual contains a great deal
of helpful information. We urge you to read it RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
carefully and familiarize yourself with the REmission Systems Warranty
vehicle before driving. REmission Performance Warranty
For your own safety and longer service life of RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
instructions and warnings contained in this Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Operator's Manual. Ignoring them could Control Systems Warranty
result in damage to the vehicle or personal RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage Laws)
caused by failure to follow instructions is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
22 Introduction
Information for customers in Maintenance

California
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes
Under California law you may be entitled to a all the necessary maintenance work which
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the should be done at regular intervals.
purchase price or lease price, if after a Always have the Service and Warranty
reasonable number of repair attempts Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix service advisor will record every service for
one or more substantial defects or you in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the Roadside Assistance
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a Program offers technical help in the event of
reasonable number of repair attempts is a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or Assistance Hotline are answered by our
more of the following occurs: agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(1) the same substantial defect or
(USA)
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily 1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect For additional information, refer to the
or malfunction has been subject to repair Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
two or more times, and you have directly Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in Assistance" section in the Service and
writing of the need for its repair. Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both
(2) the same substantial defect or in your vehicle literature portfolio.
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly Change of address or change of
notified Mercedes-Benz in writing of the ownership
need for its repair. In the event of a change of address, please
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of send us the "Change of Address Notice"
repair of the same or different substantial found in the Service and Warranty
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative Information Booklet, or simply call the
total of more than 30 calendar days. Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(in the USA) at the hotline number
Please send your written notice to:
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service Center (in Canada) at
Customer Assistance Center 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
One Mercedes Drive contacting you in a timely manner should the
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the
entire literature in the vehicle so that it is
available to the next owner.
Introduction 23
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to Operating safety

send in the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car"
found in the Service and Warranty Safety notes
Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-
G WARNING
Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the
USA) at Work improperly carried out on electronic
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or components and associated software could
Customer Service (in Canada) at cause them to cease functioning. Because the
1-800-387-0100. vehicle's electronic components are
interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other
Vehicle operation outside the USA systems. Electronic malfunctions could
and Canada seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
countries, please be aware that: for repairs or modifications to electronic
Rservice facilities or replacement parts may components.
not be readily available. Other improper work or modifications on the
Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic vehicle could also have a negative impact on
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel the operating safety of the vehicle.
may cause damage to the catalytic Some safety systems only function when the
converter. engine is running. You should therefore never
Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower turn off the engine while driving.
octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause
engine damage. G WARNING
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
for delivery in Europe through our European tires/wheels may cause serious damage and
Delivery Program. For details, consult an impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to Such blows can be caused, for example, by
one of the following addresses. running over an obstacle, road debris or a
pothole.
In the USA If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage
to your vehicle has occurred:
European Delivery Department
Rturn on your hazard warning flashers.
One Mercedes Drive
Rslow down carefully.
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe
In Canada distance from the road.

Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
European Delivery Department appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
98 Vanderhoof Avenue authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 qualified maintenance or repair facility for
further inspection or repairs.
Z
24 Introduction
On-board diagnostics interface Always have the following work carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
G WARNING Rwork relevant to safety
If you connect equipment to the on-board
Rservice and maintenance work
diagnostics interface, it can affect the
Rrepair work
operation of the vehicle systems. This can
impair the operating safety of your vehicle Ralterations, installation work and
while driving. There is a risk of accident. modifications
Do not connect any equipment to the on- Rwork on electronic components
board diagnostics interface.
G WARNING Proper use

Loose equipment or equipment cables which
G WARNING
are connected to the on-board diagnostics
There are various warning stickers affixed to
interface can obstruct the area around the
your vehicle. Their purpose is to alert you and
pedals. The equipment or the cables could get
others to various dangers. Therefore, do not
between the pedals in the event of sudden
remove any warning stickers unless the
braking or acceleration. You may then no
sticker clearly states that you may do so.
longer be able to brake, operate the clutch or
accelerate as intended. There is a risk of If you remove any warning stickers, you or
accident. others could fail to recognize certain dangers
and be injured.
Do not attach any equipment or cables in the
driver footwell. The proper use of the vehicle requires that
you familiarize yourself with the following
Connecting equipment to the on-board
information and rules:
diagnostics interface can lead to emissions
monitoring information being reset. This may Rsafety notes in this Operator's Manual
lead to the vehicle failing to meet the Rtechnical data in this Operator's Manual
requirements at the next special emissions Rtraffic rules and regulations
test or main inspection. Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to
If the engine is switched off and equipment motor vehicles
on the on-board diagnostic interface is used,
the starter battery may discharge.
The on-board diagnostics interface is only Problems with your vehicle
intended for the connection of diagnostic
If you should experience a problem with your
equipment at a qualified specialist workshop.
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Qualified specialist workshop
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to
qualified specialist workshop. It has the your satisfaction, please discuss the problem
necessary specialist knowledge, tools and again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or
qualifications to correctly carry out the work contact us at one of the following addresses.
required on your vehicle. This is especially the
case for work relevant to safety.
Observe the notes in the service booklet.
Introduction 25
In the USA 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,

Washington, DC 20590.
Customer Assistance Center
You can obtain additional information about
vehicle safety from:
One Mercedes Drive
http://www.safercar.gov.
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada Limited Warranty

Customer Relations Department ! Follow the instructions in this manual
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. about the proper operation of your vehicle
98 Vanderhoof Avenue as well as about possible vehicle damage.
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Damage to your vehicle that arises from
culpable contraventions against these
instructions are not covered either by
Reporting malfunctions relevant to Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the
safety New or Used-Vehicle Warranty of
Daimler AG.
USA only:
The following text is reproduced as required
of all manufacturers according to Title 49, Data stored in the vehicle
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the National Traffic and Motor Information about electronic data
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966. acquisition in the vehicle
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
Reporting safety defects 9951)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect Your vehicle records electronic data. If your
which could cause a crash or could cause vehicle is equipped with mbrace1, data is
injury or death, you should immediately transmitted in the event of an accident.
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety This information helps, for example, to test
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to vehicle systems after an accident and to
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. continually improve vehicle safety.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may Daimler AG can access this data and submit
open an investigation, and if it finds that a it:
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
may order a recall and remedy campaign. purposes
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner
individual problems between you, your Ron the instruction of prosecuting
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
authorities
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that
Safety Hotline toll-free at
involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its sales
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
and service organizations
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law.
Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
1 The system is called TELE AID in Canada.
Z
26 Introduction
Please observe the mbrace1 purchase

agreement for further details on the recording
and transfer of data by this system.
1 The system is called TELE AID in Canada.

27
Cockpit ................................................. 28
Instrument cluster .............................. 29
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 31
At a glance
Center console .................................... 32
Overhead control panel ...................... 33
Door control panel .............................. 34
28 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance
Function Page Function Page

: Steering wheel paddle E Adjusts the steering wheel
shifters 145 manually 99
; Cruise control lever 160 F Adjusts the steering wheel
electrically 99
= Instrument cluster 29
G Combination switch 109
? Horn
H Parking brake 154
A PARKTRONIC warning
display (Canada only) 175 I On-board diagnostic
interface 24
B Overhead control panel 33
J Opens the hood 278
C Climate control systems 122
K Releases the parking brake 154
D Ignition lock 137
Start/Stop button 137 L Light switch 106
Instrument cluster 29
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
At a glance
: Fuel gauge A Tachometer 195
; Coolant temperature 194 B Instrument cluster lighting
brightness control: turn
= Speedometer with clockwise or counter-
segments 195 clockwise
? Multifunction display 196
30 Instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps

At a glance

: ESP 243 F Tire pressure monitor 250
M SPORT handling G Seat belt 239
mode in AMG vehicles 244
H ESP on AMG vehicles 243
; Distance warning 249
I Coolant 247
= ESP OFF 243
J Rear fog lamp 108
? Brakes (USA only) 241
K High-beam headlamps 109
A Brakes (Canada only) 241
L Low-beam headlamps 107
B Turn signal 109
M Front fog lamps 108
C ABS 242
N Reserve fuel 246
D SRS 245
E Check engine 246
Multifunction steering wheel 31
Multifunction steering wheel
At a glance
: Multifunction display 196 A =;
; Audio system/COMAND; Selects a menu 198
see the separate operating 9:
instructions Selects the submenu or
scrolls through lists 198
= ?
a
Switches on the Voice
Confirms selections and
Control System; see the
hides display messages
separate operating
instructions B %
? ~ Back or deactivates the
Voice Control System
Rejects or ends a call 202
Exits phone book/redial
memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial
memory
WX
Adjusts the volume
8
Mute
32 Center console
Center console
At a glance

: Audio system/COMAND; D M Dynamic driving
see the separate operating package with sports mode 171
instructions
E Stowage compartment 254
; c Seat heating 98 Ashtray 262
= s Seat ventilation 98 Cigarette lighter 262
Power socket 263
? 5 PARKTRONIC
(Canada only) 175 F Selector lever 142
A Hazard warning G Cup holder 259
lamps 109 H Stowage compartment 254
B 45 Indicator lamp 42 I Audio/COMAND controller
C u Rear window roller J Selects the drive program 144
sunblind 261
Overhead control panel 33
Overhead control panel
At a glance
: u Switches the rear C Rear-view mirror 101
interior lighting on/off 113
D Integrated electronic
; | Switches the compass 275
automatic interior lighting E Buttons for the garage door
control on/off 112
opener 273
= p Switches the right- F Microphone for mbrace
hand reading lamp on/off 112
(emergency call system),
? 3 Opens/closes the telephone and the Voice
sliding sunroof 87 Control System2
3 Opens/closes the G F Roadside Assistance
panorama roof with power button (mbrace system) 267
tilt/sliding panel and roller
sunblinds 87 H p Switches the left-
hand reading lamp on/off 112
A Button for MB Info call
(mbrace system) 268 I c Switches the front
interior lighting on/off 113
B G SOS button (mbrace
system) 266
2 The Voice Control System is only available together with COMAND. Observe the additional operating
instructions.
34 Door control panel
Door control panel

At a glance
Function Page
: Opens the door 78
; %& Unlocks/locks
the vehicle 78
= Adjusts the seat electrically 94
? r45=
Stores settings for the seat,
exterior mirrors and
steering wheel 103
A 7Z\
Adjusts and folds the
exterior mirrors in/out
electrically 101
B W Opens/closes the
side windows 83
C n Activates/
deactivates the override
feature for the side
windows in the rear
compartment 57
D o Opens the trunk lid 81
35
Useful information .............................. 36

Occupant safety .................................. 36
Children in the vehicle ........................ 53
Panic alarm .......................................... 58
Driving safety systems ....................... 58
Safety
Theft deterrent locking systems ....... 66
36 Occupant safety
Useful information to the restraint systems no longer functioning

as intended.
i This Operator's Manual describes all Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
models and all standard and optional (ETDs), for example, could deploy
equipment of your vehicle available at the inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
Safety
time of publication of the Operator's although the deceleration threshold for air
Manual. Country-specific differences are bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
possible. Please note that your vehicle may never modify the restraint systems. Do not
not be equipped with all features tamper with electronic components or their
described. This also applies to safety- software.
related systems and functions.
i See "Children in the vehicle"
i Please read the information on qualified
(Y page 53) for more information on
specialist workshops (Y page 24).
infants and children traveling with you in
the vehicle and restraints for infants and
children.
Occupant safety
Overview of occupant safety
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
In this section, you will learn the most
important facts about the restraint system Introduction
components of the vehicle.
SRS consists of:
The restraint system consists of:
Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp
Rseat belts
Rair bags
Rchild restraint systems
Rair bag control unit (with crash sensors)
RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors
REmergency Tensioning Devices
Additional protection is provided by:
Rbelt force limiters
RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System) SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming
RNECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO into contact with the vehicle's interior in the
luxury head restraints event of an accident. It can also reduce the
RAir bag system components with: effect of the forces to which occupants are
- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp subjected during an accident.
- front-passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS) SRS warning lamp
The different air bag systems work SRS functions are checked regularly when
independently of each other. The protective you switch on the ignition and when the
functions of the system work in conjunction engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions
with each other. Not all air bags are deployed can be detected in good time.
in an accident. The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument
G WARNING cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
Modifications to or work improperly on. It goes out no later than a few seconds
conducted on restraint system components after the engine is started.
or their wiring, as well as tampering with The SRS components are in operational
interconnected electronic systems, can lead readiness when the 6 SRS warning lamp
is not lit while the engine is running .
Occupant safety 37
G WARNING environment. Check your national disposal

The SRS self-check has detected a guidelines. California residents, see
malfunction if the 6 SRS warning lamp: www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Rdoes not come on at all
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function
Rfails to go out approximately 4 seconds
Safety
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD
after the engine was started
that has deployed must be replaced.
Rcomes on after the engine was started or
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
while driving
They could tear.
For your safety, Mercedes-Benz strongly RDo not make any modification that could
recommends that you have the system
change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
checked as soon as possible at an authorized
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
Mercedes-Benz Center. Otherwise the SRS
may not be activated when it is needed in an severely weaken them. In a crash they may
accident, which could result in serious or fatal not be able to provide adequate protection.
RNo modifications of any kind may be made
injury. The SRS might also deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could to any components or wiring of the SRS.
also result in injury. RDo not change or remove any component
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates or part of the SRS.

a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or RDo not install additional trim material, seat
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work covers, badges, etc. over the steering
on the SRS must therefore only be performed wheel hub, front-passenger front air bag
by qualified technicians. Contact an cover, outer sides of the seat backrests,
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. door trim panels, or door frame trims.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system RDo not install additional electrical/
to accommodate a person with disabilities, electronic equipment on or near SRS
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center components and wiring.
for details. USA only: Call our Customer RKeep area between air bags and occupants
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
(1-800-367-6372) for details. umbrellas, etc.).
RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
Safety guidelines for seat belts, from the coat hooks or handles over the
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) door. These items may be thrown around in
and air bags the vehicle and cause head and other
injuries when the window curtain air bag is
G WARNING deployed.
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
RAir bag system components will be hot after
been subjected to stress in an accident an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
must be replaced. Their anchoring points
RNever place your feet on the instrument
must also be checked. Only use seat belts
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
installed or supplied by an authorized
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
Mercedes-Benz Center.
seat.
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency
RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain
risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
perchlorate material, which may require
causing unintended air bag deployment.
special handling and regard for the
Work on the SRS must therefore only be
Z
38 Occupant safety
performed by qualified technicians. G WARNING

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz To reduce the risk of injuries during front air
Center. bag inflation, the driver and front-passenger
RFor your protection and the protection of must always be seated correctly and have
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or their seat belts fastened accordingly.
Safety
ETD, our safety instructions must be For maximum protection in the event of a
followed. These instructions are available collision, you must always be in the normal
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz seat position with your back against the
Center. backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure
RGiven the considerable deployment speed, that it is correctly positioned on your body.
required inflation volume, and the material Since the air bag inflates with considerable
of the air bags, there is the possibility of speed and force, a proper seating position
abrasions or other, potentially more serious and correct positioning of the hands on the
injuries resulting from air bag deployment. steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
strongly recommends that you inform the properly or are too close to the air bag can be
subsequent owner that the vehicle is seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the inflates with great force instantaneously:
applicable section in the Operator's Manual.
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
position that is as upright as possible with
Air bags your back against the seat backrest.
RMove the driver's seat as far back as
Important safety notes possible, still permitting proper operation
of vehicle controls. The distance from the
G WARNING
center of the driver's chest to the center of
Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence the air bag cover on the steering wheel
of injuries and fatalities in certain situations: must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front- You should be able to accomplish this by
passenger front air bags and driver's knee adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
bag) you have any difficulties, please contact an
Rside impacts (side impact air bags, window authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
curtain air bags and pelvis air bags) RDo not lean your head or chest close to the
However, no system available today can steering wheel or dashboard.
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. ROnly hold the steering wheel by the rim.
When the air bags are deployed, a small Placing hands and arms inside the rim can
amount of powder is released. The powder increase the risk and potential severity of
generally does not constitute a health hazard hand/arm injury when the driver front air
and does not indicate that there is a fire in the bag inflates.
vehicle. In order to prevent potential RAdjust the front-passenger seat as far back
breathing difficulties, you should leave the as possible from the dashboard when the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you seat is occupied.
have any breathing difficulty but cannot get ROccupants, especially children, should
out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, never place their bodies or lean their heads
then get fresh air by opening a window or in the area of the door where the side
door. impact air bag inflates. This could result in
Occupant safety 39
serious injuries or death should the side to the extent possible by a properly fastened
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
upright as possible, wear the seat belt needed to provide the best possible
properly and use an appropriately sized protection in a rollover.
child restraint, infant restraint or booster Air bags provide additional protection; they
Safety
seat recommended for the size and weight are not, however, a substitute for seat belts.
of the child. All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat
Failure to follow these instructions can result belts regardless of whether your vehicle is
in severe injuries to you or other occupants. equipped with air bags or not.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you It is important for your safety and that of your
make the buyer aware of this safety passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
information. Be sure to give the buyer this and to have any malfunctioning air bags
Operator's Manual. repaired. This will help to make sure the air
bags continue to perform their protective
G WARNING function for the vehicle occupants in the
Accident research shows that the safest place event of a crash.
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat.
A side impact air bag related injury may occur
Front air bags
if occupants, especially children, are not The front air bags increase protection for the
properly seated or restrained when next to a driver's and front-passenger's head and
side impact air bag which needs to deploy chest.
rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
(1) Always sit as upright as possible
and use the seat belts properly.
Make sure that children 12 years
old and under use an appropriately
sized child restraint, infant
restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
(2) Always wear seat belts properly. Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the
steering wheel; front-passenger front air
The air bags are only deployed if the air bag bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove
control unit detects the need for deployment. box.
Only in the event of such a situation will they They are deployed:
provide their supplemental protection. Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
The driver and passenger should always wear Rif the system determines that air bag
their seat belts. Otherwise, it is not possible deployment can offer additional protection
for the air bags to provide their supplemental to that provided by the seat belt
protection. Rif the seat belt is fastened
In the event of other types of impacts and Rindependently of other air bags in the
impacts below air bag deployment
vehicle
thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The
driver and passengers will then be protected
Z
40 Occupant safety
Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air Driver's knee bag
bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag
control unit evaluates the vehicle
deceleration. In the first deployment stage,
the front air bag is filled with enough
propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.
Safety
The front air bag is fully deployed if a second

deployment threshold is exceeded within a
few milliseconds.
The deployment of the front-passenger front
air bag is also influenced by the weight
category of the front passenger, which is
determined by the Occupant Classification Driver's knee bag : provides additional
System (OCS) (Y page 42). protection for the driver against:
The lighter the passenger side occupant, the Rknee injuries
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
Rthigh injuries
(predicted at the start of the impact) for
second stage inflation of the front-passenger Rlower leg injuries
front air bag. In the second stage, the front Driver's knee bag : deploys below the
air bags are inflated with the maximum steering wheel. During a frontal impact, if the
amount of propellant gas available. system determines that air bag deployment
The front air bags are not deployed in can offer additional protection to that
situations where a low impact severity is provided by the seat belt, driver's knee
predicted. You will then be protected by the bag : is deployed along with the driver's air
fastened seat belt. bag. The driver's knee bag : operates best
The front-passenger front air bag will only in conjunction with a properly positioned and
deploy if: fastened seat belt.
Rthe system, based on the OCS weight
sensor readings, detects that the front- Side impact air bags
passenger seat is occupied.
G WARNING
Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
console is not lit, (Y page 42). control are located in the doors. Do not
Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high modify any components of the doors or door
impact severity. trim panels including, for example, the
addition of door speakers.
Improper repair work on the doors or the
modification or addition of components to the
doors create a risk of rendering the side
impact air bags inoperative or causing
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the
doors must therefore only be performed by
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized
Occupant safety 41
G WARNING If the OCS detects that the front-passenger

Only use seat covers which have been tested seat is not occupied and the front-passenger
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your seat belt is not fastened (the belt tongue is
vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat not engaged in the seat belt buckle), the side
coverings can cause a malfunction of the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side
will not deploy. The side impact air bag on the
Safety
impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center front-passenger side will deploy if the front-
for availability. passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of
whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
When deployed, the side impact air bags offer or not.
additional protection for the thorax of the
vehicle occupants on the side of the vehicle Pelvis air bags
on which the impact occurs. However, they Pelvis air bags are not available for AMG
do not protect the: vehicles.
Rhead
Rneck
G WARNING
Only use seat covers which have been tested
Rarms
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using seat covers or other seat
coverings can cause a malfunction of the side
impact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for availability.
Pelvis air bag deployment enhances the level

of protection of the vehicle occupants on the
side of the vehicle on which the impact
occurs.
Front side impact air bags : and rear side

impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer
seat cushions.
The side impact air bags are deployed:
Ron the side on which an impact occurs
Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
Rindependently of seat belt use
Rindependently of the front air bags Pelvis air bags : deploy next to and below
Rindependently of the ETDs the outer seat cushions. They are deployed:
Side impact air bags will not deploy in side Ron the side on which an impact occurs
impacts which do not exceed the system's Rat the start of an accident with a high rate
preset deployment thresholds for lateral of lateral vehicle deceleration or
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be acceleration, e.g. in a side impact
protected by the fastened seat belt. Rindependently of seat belt use
Z
42 Occupant safety
Rindependently of the front air bags Rindependently of seat belt use

Rindependently of the ETDs Rindependently of the front air bags
Pelvis air bags : will not deploy in side Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in
impacts which do not exceed the system's impacts with deceleration rates which do not
preset deployment thresholds for lateral exceed the system's preset deployment
Safety
acceleration/deceleration. You will then be thresholds for vehicle deceleration or

protected by the fastened seat belt. acceleration. You will then be protected by
If the OCS detects that the front-passenger the fastened seat belt.
seat is not occupied and the front-passenger
seat belt is not fastened (the belt tongue is
not engaged in the seat belt buckle), the Occupant Classification System
pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side will (OCS)
not deploy. The pelvis air bag on the front-
How the occupant classification
passenger side will deploy if the front-
system works
passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of
whether the front-passenger seat is occupied The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
or not. categorizes the occupant on the front-
passenger seat by means of a weight sensor.
Window curtain air bags The front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated automatically for certain weight
The window curtain air bags enhance the level categories. The 45 indicator lamp
of protection for the head, but not chest or shows you the current status. If the
arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, the
the vehicle on which the impact occurs.
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
The window curtain air bags are integrated
The system does not deactivate:
into the side of the roof frame and deploy in
the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. Rthe side impact air bag
Rthe pelvis air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices
To be classified correctly, the front passenger

must sit:
Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly
Rin a position that is as upright as possible
with their back against the seat backrest
Rwith their feet on the floor
If the front-passenger's weight is transferred

Window curtain air bags : are deployed: to another object in the vehicle (e.g. by
Ron the side on which an impact occurs leaning on armrests), OCS may not be able to
Rat
approximate the occupant's weight category.
the start of an accident with a high rate
of lateral vehicle deceleration or If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or
acceleration, e.g. in a side impact the seat cushion are damaged, have the
Rregardless of whether the front-passenger
necessary repair work carried out at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
seat is occupied
Occupant safety 43
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz remain illuminated or go out. With the

recommends that you only use seat 45 indicator lamp illuminated, the
accessories which have been approved by front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Mercedes-Benz. With the 45 indicator lamp out, the
Both the driver and the passenger should front passenger front air bag is activated.
Safety
always use the 45 indicator lamp as When the OCS senses that the front
an indication of whether or not the passenger passenger seat occupant is classified as an
is properly positioned. adult or someone larger than a small
G WARNING individual, the 45 indicator lamp will
illuminate for approximately six seconds
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates
when the engine is started and then go out.
when an adult or someone larger than a small
This indicates that the front passenger front
individual is in the front passenger seat, have
air bag is activated.
the front passenger reposition himself or
herself in the seat until the 45 If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
indicator lamp goes out. the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated and will not be deployed.
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air bag If the 45 indicator lamp is not
deployment when the OCS has classified the illuminated, the front passenger front air bag
front passenger seat occupant as weighing as is activated and will be deployed
much as or less than a typical 12-month-old Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
child in a standard child restraint or if the front Rif the impact exceeds a predetermined
passenger seat is classified as being empty. triggering threshold
When the OCS senses that the front Rindependent of the side impact air bag or
passenger seat occupant is classified as pelvis air bag
being up to or less than the weight of a typical
If the front passenger front air bag is
12-month-old child in a standard child
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will
influenced by
illuminate when the engine is started and
Rthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed
remain illuminated. This indicates that the
front passenger front air bag is deactivated. by the air bag control unit
Rthe front passenger's weight category as
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat is classified as being empty, identified by the OCS
the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate
For further information, see "Air bag display
when the engine is started and remain
messages" (Y page 221).
illuminated. This indicates that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated. G WARNING
When the OCS senses that the front According to accident statistics, children are
passenger seat occupant is classified as safer when properly restrained on the rear
being heavier than the weight of a typical 12- seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
month-old child seated in a standard child we strongly recommend that children be
restraint or as being a small individual (such placed in the rear seats whenever possible.
as a young teenager or a small adult), the Regardless of seating position, children 12
45 indicator lamp will illuminate for years old and under must be seated and
approximately 6 seconds when the engine is properly secured in an appropriate infant
started. Depending on occupant weight restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
sensor readings from the seat, it will then
Z
44 Occupant safety
recommended for the size and weight of the 45 indicator lamp while driving to
child. make sure that the 45 indicator
The infant or child restraint must be properly lamp is illuminated. If the 45
secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do
belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors not transport a child on the front-passenger
Safety
and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with seat until the system has been repaired.
the child seat manufacturer's instructions. A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
Occupants, especially children, should always front-passenger seat will be seriously
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt injured or even killed if the front-passenger
properly and use an appropriately sized infant front air bag inflates.
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child
recommended for the size and weight of the restraint on the front-passenger seat:
child. - move the seat as far back as possible
Children can be killed or seriously injured by - use the proper child restraint
an inflating air bag. Note the following recommended for the age, size and
important information when circumstances weight of the child
require you to place a child in the front-
- secure child restraint with the vehicle's
passenger seat:
seat belt according to the child seat
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag manufacturer's instructions
technology designed to deactivate the RFor children larger than the typical 12-
front-passenger front air bag in your vehicle month-old child, the front-passenger front
when the system senses the weight of a air bag may or may not be activated.
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
child restraint on the front-passenger seat. mean that the front-passenger front air bag
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the also has to deploy.
front-passenger seat will be seriously The OCS may have detected that the seat:
injured or even killed if the front-passenger Rwas empty or occupied by a person with a
front air bag inflates in a collision which
weight of up to or less than that of a typical
could occur under some circumstances,
12-month-old child seated in a standard
even with the air bag technology installed
child restraint
in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate
Rwas occupied by a small individual, such as
this risk completely is never to place a child
in a rear-facing child restraint in the front- a young teenager or a small adult
passenger seat. We therefore strongly Rwas occupied by a child in a child restraint
recommend that you always place a child system, whose weight is greater than that
in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear of a typical 12-month-old child.
seat. These are examples of when the OCS
RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on deactivates the front-passenger front air bag.
the front-passenger seat, make sure the Deactivation takes place although the
45 indicator lamp is illuminated, collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the
indicating that the front-passenger front air driver's air bag.
bag is deactivated. Should the 45
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while
the restraint is installed, please check
installation. Periodically check the
Occupant safety 45
System self-test
The 45 indicator lamp illuminates
when you:
Rturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock
Safety
Ron vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button once or twice
If an adult occupant is properly sitting on the
passenger seat and the OCS classifies the
occupant as an adult, the 45 indicator
If the SmartKey has been removed from the lamp illuminates and goes out again after
ignition lock or is in position 0, indicator lamp approximately 6 seconds.
45: does not light up.
If the seat is not occupied and the OCS
G WARNING classifies the front passenger seat as being
If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the unoccupied, the 45 indicator lamp
instrument cluster and the 45 will illuminate and not go out.
indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the G WARNING
OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger
If the 4 5 indicator lamp does not
front air bag will be deactivated in this case.
illuminate, the system is not functioning. You
Have the system checked by qualified
must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
technicians as soon as possible. Contact an
Center before seating any child on the front
passenger seat.
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For more information, see "Problems with the
In order to ensure proper operation of the air Occupant Classification System"
bag system and OCS: (Y page 46).
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a G WARNING
position that is as upright as possible with Never place anything between seat cushion
your back against the seat backrest. and child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reduces
RWhen seated, a passenger should not the effectiveness of the OCS. The underside
position him/herself in such a way as to and rear side child restraint system must be
cause the passenger's weight to be lifted placed entirely on the seat cushion and the
from the seat cushion as this may result in backrest of the front-passenger seat
the OCS being unable to correctly backrest.
approximate the passenger's weight If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger
category. seat backrest.
RRead and observe all warnings in this
An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause
chapter. injuries to the child in case of an accident,
instead of increasing protection for the child.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for
installation of child restraint systems.
Z
46 Occupant safety
Problems with the occupant classification system
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The 45 The OCS is malfunctioning.
indicator lamp X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Safety
illuminates and Mercedes-Benz Center.

remains illuminated. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
The person on the display (Y page 221).
front-passenger seat:
Rhas the weight of a
typical adult
Rhas been determined
by the system not to
be a child.
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical
adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not
allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

The 45 The OCS is malfunctioning.
indicator lamp does not X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the
illuminate and/or does child seat.
not remain illuminated. X Check the installation of the child restraint system.
The front-passenger X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto
seat is: the seat.
Runoccupied X If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate, have the
Roccupied with a OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
weight up to or less Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger
than a typical 12- seat as long as the OCS is not functioning.
month-old child in a X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
standard child display (Y page 221).
restraint system
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger
seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Occupant safety 47
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK- G WARNING

PRO luxury head restraints (except For your protection, drive only with properly
AMG vehicles) positioned head restraints.
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
head restraints increase protection of the to the head as possible and the center of the
Safety
driver's and front-passenger's head and head restraint supports the back of the head
neck. In the event of a rear collision of a at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
certain severity, the NECK-PRO head injury to the head and neck in the event of an
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints accident or similar situation.
on the driver's and front-passenger seats are
moved forwards and upwards. This provides
better head support. Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head
G WARNING
restraints
Do not attach any objects (e.g. a coat hanger)
to the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO Important safety notes
luxury head restraints. Otherwise, the NECK-
PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head G WARNING
restraints may not function properly and in For reasons of safety, have the NECK-PRO
the event of a rear-end collision may not offer head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head
the protection they are designed to provide. restraints checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center after a rear-end
G WARNING collision.
Seat or head restraint covers can cause a
malfunction when the NECK-PRO head G WARNING
restraints/NECK PRO luxury head restraints When pushing back the NECK-PRO head
are activated or when the side impact air bags restraint cushion, make sure your fingers do
or pelvis air bags are deployed, or they can not become caught between the head
prevent this completely. The NECK-PRO head restraint cushion and the cover. Failure to
restraints/NECK PRO luxury head restraints observe this could result in injuries.
or side impact air bags/pelvis air bags can
therefore not provide the intended protection. NECK-PRO head restraints
Do not use any seat or head restraint covers.
i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO requires a lot of strength. If you have
luxury head restraints have been triggered in difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO head
an accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints, have this work carried out at a
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
on the driver's and front-passenger seats authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
(Y page 47). Otherwise, the additional
protection will not be available in the event of
another rear-end collision. NECK-PRO head
restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
that have been triggered are moved forwards
and can no longer be adjusted.
Z
48 Occupant safety
restraint and the rear cover of the head

restraint.
X Push resetting tool : downwards until you
hear the head restraint deployment
mechanism engage.
Safety
X Pull out resetting tool :.

X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury head
restraint cushion back = until it engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second
NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.
X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint X Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle
cushion forwards in the direction of document wallet.
arrow :.
X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
down in the direction of arrow ; as far as Seat belts
it will go.
X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint
Important safety notes
cushion back in the direction of arrow = The use of seat belts and infant and child
until the cushion engages. restraint systems is required by law in all 50
X Repeat this procedure for the second states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.
NECK-PRO head restraint. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints occupants should have their seat belts
fastened when the vehicle is in motion.
i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-
PRO luxury head restraints, have this work i For further information on infants and
carried out at a qualified specialist children traveling in the vehicle and on
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes- infant and child restraint systems, see
Benz Center. "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 53).
G WARNING
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
Always make sure all of your passengers are
properly restrained. You and your passengers
should always wear seat belts.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can
be considerably more severe without your
X Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle
seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat
document wallet. belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit
X Slide resetting tool : into guide ; the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
between the NECK-PRO luxury head it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
Occupant safety 49
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or Correct use of the seat belts
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. The air bags can only protect
G WARNING
as intended if the occupants are properly USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
wearing their seat belts. RSeat belts can only work when used
Safety
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other
G WARNING way than as described in this section, as
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat that could result in serious injuries in the
backrest in an excessively reclined position as event of an accident.
this can be dangerous. You could slide under REach occupant should wear their seat belt
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under at all times, because seat belts help reduce
it, the seat belt would apply force at the the likelihood of and potential severity of
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and The integrated restraint system includes
seat belt provide the best restraint when the SRS (driver front air bag, driver's side knee
wearer is in a position that is as upright as bag, front-passenger front air bag, side
possible and the seat belt is properly impact air bags, pelvis air bags, window
positioned on the body. curtain air bags for the side windows),
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt
G WARNING force limiters, and front seat knee bolsters.
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than The system is designed to enhance the
there are seat belts available. Make sure protection offered to properly belted
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly occupants in certain frontal (front air bags,
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never driver's side knee bag, and ETDs) and side
use a seat belt for more than one person at a (side impact air bags, pelvis air bags,
time. window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts
which exceed preset deployment
G WARNING thresholds.
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
been subjected to stress in an accident must arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.
be replaced and their anchoring points must In a frontal crash, your body would move
also be checked. too far forward. That would increase the
Only use seat belts which have been approved chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
by Mercedes-Benz. belt would also apply too much force to the
Do not make any modifications to the seat ribs or abdomen, which could severely
belts. This can lead to unintended activation injure internal organs such as your liver or
of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when spleen.
necessary. Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may section is located as close as possible to
severely weaken them. In a crash they may the middle of the shoulder. It should not
not be able to provide adequate protection. touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
portion of the seat belt under your arm.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. your hips and not across the abdomen. If
the lap belt is positioned across your
Z
50 Occupant safety
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in Fastening seat belts

a crash.
G WARNING
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
According to accident statistics, children are
breakable objects in or on your clothing,
safer when properly restrained on the rear
such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,
Safety
these might cause injuries.

we strongly recommend that children be
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
placed in the rear seat whenever possible.
snugly. Take special care of this when Regardless of seating position, children 12
wearing loose clothing. years old and under must be seated and
RNever use a seat belt for more than one properly secured in an appropriately sized
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt child restraint system or booster seat
around a person and another person or recommended for the size and weight of the
other objects at the same time. child. For additional information, see the
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a "Children in the vehicle" section.
crash, you would not have the full width of A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
the seat belt to distribute impact forces. significantly increased if the child restraints
The twisted seat belt against your body are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
could cause injuries. or the child is not properly secured in the child
RPregnant women should also always use a restraint.
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible on
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen.
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
as upright as possible.
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
sure it is properly positioned.
RNever place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
booster seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions.
X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to
G WARNING an almost vertical position (Y page 92).
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt
could tear. sash guide :.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. section of the seat belt across the middle
This could damage the seat belt. of your shoulder and the lap section across
Never attempt to make modifications to seat your hips.
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.
the seat belts.
Occupant safety 51
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the Releasing seat belts

appropriate height (Y page 51).
X Press release button ?(Y page 50) and
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
guide belt tongue ; back towards belt
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
sash guide :.
across your body.
Safety
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue
securely fasten child restraint systems in the will be trapped in the door or in the seat
vehicle. For further information on special mechanism. This could damage the door,
seat belt retractors, see (Y page 55). the door trim panel and the seat belt.
For more information about releasing the seat Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill
belt with release button ?, see "Releasing their protective function and must be
seat belts" (Y page 51). replaced. Consult an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Belt height adjustment
Belt warning for the driver and front
You can adjust the seat belt height on the passenger
driver's seat and the front-passenger seat.
Regardless of whether the driver and front
passenger have fastened their seat belts
already, the 7 seat belt warning lamp
lights up for 6 seconds after every engine
start. It then goes out if the driver and the
front passenger have fastened their seat
belts.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after
the engine is started, an additional warning
tone will sound. The warning tone goes out
after approximately six seconds or once the
Adjust the height so that the upper part of the driver's seat belt is fastened.
seat belt is routed across the center of your If the driver or front passenger have not
shoulder. fastened their seat belt after 6 seconds and
the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt
X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.
warning lamp lights up.
The belt sash guide engages in various
positions. Runtil the driver or the front passenger have
X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide fastened their seat belts
release :. Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is
X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.

exceeded once, a warning tone with
increasing intensity sounds additionally for
X Release belt sash guide release : and
a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver
make sure that the belt sash guide has or front passenger have fastened their seat
engaged. belts.
If the driver or front passenger undo their seat
belts during the journey, the 7 seat belt
warning lamp lights up and the warning tone
sounds again.
Z
52 Occupant safety
The warning tone ceases even if the driver or Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
front passenger have still not fastened their each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front.
seat belt after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied and
warning lamp stops flashing but continues to the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
be lit. the front-passenger side.
Safety
Once the vehicle is stationary, the warning The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear
tone is reactivated and the 7 seat belt compartment are triggered independently of
warning lamp starts to flash again if the the lock status of the seat belts.
vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) The ETDs are triggered depending on the type
once. and severity of an accident:
The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end
out if: collision, the vehicle decelerates or
Rboth the driver and the front passenger accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal
have fastened their seat belts. direction during the initial stages of the
or impact
Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open. Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side
opposite the impact the vehicle
i For more information on the 7 seat decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a
belt warning lamp, see "Warning and lateral direction
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a
seat belt" (Y page 239).
bang, and a small amount of powder may also
be released. Only in rare cases will the bang
Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt affect your hearing. The powder that is
force limiters released generally does not constitute a
The front seat belts and the outer seat belts health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp
in the rear are equipped with ETDs and seat lights up.
belt force limiters.
G WARNING
The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,
Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
pulling them close against the body.
replaced.
The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat
For your safety, when disposing of the
positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.
pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back instructions. These are available at any
towards the backrest. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Seat belt force limiters, when triggered, help
to reduce the peak force exerted by the seat ! If the front-passenger seat is not
belt on the vehicle occupant. occupied, do not engage the seat belt
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats tongue in the buckle on the front-
are synchronized with the front air bags. passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency
These take on a part of the deceleration force. Tensioning Device could be triggered in the
Thus, the force exerted on the occupant is event of an accident.
distributed over a greater area.
The ETDs can only be activated when:
Rthe ignition is switched on.
Rthe restraint systems are operational; see
"SRS warning lamp" (Y page 36).
Children in the vehicle 53
Children in the vehicle The infant or child restraint must be properly

secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat
Child restraint systems belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
Important safety notes top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
We recommend that all infants and children
Safety
Occupants, especially children, should always
be properly secured in an infant or child sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
restraint system at all times while the vehicle properly and use an appropriately sized infant
is in motion. restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
The use of seat belts and infant and child recommended for the size and weight of the
restraint systems is required by law in all 50 child.
states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. Children can be killed or seriously injured by
territories and all Canadian provinces. an inflating air bag. Note the following
Infants and children must always be seated in important information when circumstances
an appropriate infant or child restraint system require you to place a child in the front
recommended for the size and weight of the passenger seat:
child. The infant or child restraint system
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
must be properly secured in accordance with
technology designed to deactivate the front
the manufacturer's instructions. All infant or
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
child restraint systems must meet U.S.
when the system senses the weight of a
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
typical 12-month-old child or less along
and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
with the weight of a standard appropriate
Standards 213 and 210.2.
child restraint on the front passenger seat.
An information label on the child restraint
RFor children larger than the typical
system indicates whether it meets these
12-month-old child, the front passenger
standards. This information is also provided
front air bag may or may not be activated.
in the installation instructions supplied with
Always make sure the 4 5 indicator
the child restraint system.
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front
Always read and follow the manufacturer's passenger front air bag is deactivated.
instructions when using an infant or child
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
restraint system or booster seat.
front passenger seat will be seriously
Observe all warning signs in the vehicle injured or even killed if the front passenger
interior and on the infant or child restraint. front air bag inflates in a collision which
G WARNING could occur under some circumstances,
According to accident statistics, children are even with the air bag technology installed
safer when properly restrained in the rear in your vehicle. The only means to
seating positions than in the front seating completely eliminate this risk is to never
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
children be placed in the rear seats whenever in the front seat. We therefore strongly
possible. Regardless of seating position, recommend that you always place a child
children 12 years old and under must be in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
seated and properly secured in an appropriate RIf you must install a rear-facing child
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster restraint on the front passenger seat
seat recommended for the size and weight of because circumstances require you to do
the child. so, make sure the 4 5 indicator
lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front
Z
54 Children in the vehicle
passenger front air bag is deactivated. becoming a projectile in the event of an

Should the 4 5 indicator lamp not accident.
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:
Periodically check the 4 5 indicator X Secure the infant or child with an
Safety
lamp while driving to make sure the 4 appropriate infant or child restraint
5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the recommended for the child's age and
4 5 indicator lamp goes out or weight.
remains out, do not transport a child on the X Make sure that the infant or child is
front passenger seat until the system has properly secured at all times while the
been repaired. vehicle is in motion.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously G WARNING
injured or even killed if the front passenger When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
front air bag inflates. SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
RIf you have to place a child in a forward- the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
facing child restraint on the front passenger Do not leave children unattended in the
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
use the proper child restraint restraint system, or with access to an
recommended for the age, size and weight unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
of the child, and secure child restraint with access to a vehicle could result in an accident
the vehicle's seat belt according to the and/or serious personal injury. The children
child seat manufacturer's instructions. could:
Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
G WARNING Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
Infants and small children should never share excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
a seat belt with another occupant. During an Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
accident, they could be crushed between the vehicle equipment that can be operated
occupant and seat belt. even if the SmartKey is removed from the
A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,
significantly increased if the child restraints such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ adjustment, or the memory function
or the child is not properly secured in the child If children open a door, they could injure other
restraint. persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
Children too big for a toddler restraint must themselves or be injured by following traffic.
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position Do not expose the child restraint system to
the shoulder belt across the chest and direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat metal parts, for example, could become very
may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt hot, and the child could be burned on these
positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until parts.
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt
fits properly without a booster. G WARNING
When the child restraint is not in use, remove Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat passenger compartment or trunk unless they
belt to prevent the child restraint from are firmly secured in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors

increases a child's risk of injury in the event in the rear
of
G WARNING
Rstrong braking maneuvers Children that are too large for a child restraint
Rsudden changes of direction must travel in seats using normal seat belts.
Safety
Ran accident Position shoulder belt across the chest and
shoulder, not face or neck.
Special seat belt retractor In order to attain the correct seating position
for children weighing over 41 lb (18 kg), it may
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are be necessary to use a booster seat until they
equipped with a special seat belt retractor. reach a height where a normal lap/shoulder
When activated, the special seat belt seat belt lies properly across their bodies
retractor ensures the seat belt will not without the need for a booster seat.
slacken once the child restraint system has
Install the child restraint system according to
been secured.
the manufacturer's instructions.
Installing a child restraint system:
The child restraint system must be installed
X Always comply with the manufacturer's firmly on both brackets.
installation instructions. An incorrectly installed child restraint system
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the inertia can come loose in the event of an accident,
reel. causing the child to be severely or fatally
X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt injured.
buckle. Child restraint systems/child restraint
Activating the special seat belt retractor: retaining brackets that are damaged or have
suffered damage due to an impact must be
X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia replaced.
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you should LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized
hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat securing system for specially designed child
belt retractor is enabled. restraint systems on the rear seats. Securing
X Push down on the child restraint system to rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
take up any slack. restraint systems are installed on the left and
right of the rear seats.
Removing a child restraint system/
deactivating the special seat belt retractor: Secure non LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint systems using the vehicle's seat belt
X Always comply with the manufacturer's system. Always install child restraint systems
installation instructions. according to the manufacturer's instructions.
X Press the seat belt release button and
! When installing the child restraint system,
guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.
The special seat belt retractor is make sure that the seat belt for the center
deactivated. seat does not get trapped. Otherwise, the
seat belt could be damaged.
G WARNING
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt
retractor will be deactivated.
Z
56 Children in the vehicle
seat backrest could fold forward. The child

restraint system is no longer supported
properly or held in position and can no longer
fulfill its function. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries.
Safety
Top Tether provides an additional connection

between the child restraint system secured
with ISOFIX and the rear seat. It helps reduce
the risk of injury even further.
The Top Tether anchorage points are located
Vehicles without rear-seat through-loading facility
in the rear compartment behind the head
Installation instructions : indicate the restraints.
installation location of securing rings =.
X Remove covers ; from securing rings =
by pulling in the direction of the arrow.
Vehicles with rear-seat through-loading facility

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system. Comply with the
manufacturer's instructions when
installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system.
X Move head restraint : upwards.

Top Tether
X Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
G WARNING =.
Always lock the rear seat backrests in their X Route Top Tether belt A under head
upright position when the rear seats are
restraint : between the two head restraint
occupied by passengers. Lock the rear seat
backrests in their upright position before
bars.
installing the Top Tether straps or when the X Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether
cargo compartment is not in use. Make sure anchorage =.

that rear seat backrests are secured properly X Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not
by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. twisted.
If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the
X Fold down cover ; of Top Tether Child-proof locks for the rear doors
anchorage =.
G WARNING
X Move head restraint : back down again
Children could open a rear door from inside
slightly if necessary (Y page 96). Make the vehicle. This could result in serious
sure that you do not interfere with the injuries or an accident. Therefore, when
Safety
correct routing of Top Tether belt A. children ride in the rear always secure the rear
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child doors with the child-proof locks.
restraint system with Top Tether. Comply
with the manufacturer's installation You secure each door individually with the
instructions when doing so. Make sure that child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door
Top Tether belt A is tight. secured with a child-proof lock cannot be
opened from inside the vehicle. When the
vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened
Child-proof locks from the outside.

G WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
X To activate: press the child-proof lock
and/or serious personal injury. The children
lever up in the direction of arrow :.
could:
X Make sure that the child-proof locks are
working properly.
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the Override feature for the rear side
ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, windows
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function G WARNING
When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,
If children open a door, they could injure other
activate the override switch. Otherwise, the
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
children could be injured, e.g. by trapping
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
themselves in the rear side window.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
Z
58 Driving safety systems
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
Safety
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
X To activate/deactivate: press button ;. device could void the user's authority to
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the operate the equipment.
rear side windows is deactivated. The product label with FCC ID and IC
Operation is only possible using the certification number can be found in the
switches in the driver's door. If indicator battery case of the SmartKey.
lamp : is off, operation is possible using i Canada only:
the switches in the rear compartment. This device complies with RSS-Gen of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Panic alarm 1. This device may not cause interference,
and
device could void the user's authority to
operate the equipment.
The product label with FCC ID and IC
certification number can be found in the
battery case of the SmartKey.
X To activate: press ! button : for at

least one second. Driving safety systems
An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting
flashes.
Driving safety systems overview
X To deactivate: press ! button : In this section, you will find information about
again. the following driving safety systems:
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. RBAS (Brake Assist System)
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus*)
or
X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. RESP (Electronic Stability Program)
The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
vehicle. RADAPTIVE BRAKE
RPRE-SAFE Brake
Driving safety systems 59
Important safety notes may come on as well as messages in the

multifunction display that may appear.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, the
driving safety systems can neither reduce the If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock
risk of accident nor override the laws of during hard braking, reducing the steering
physics. Driving safety systems are merely capability and extending the braking distance.
Safety
aids designed to assist driving. You are
The ! warning lamp in the instrument
responsible for the distance to the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
good time. Always adapt your driving style to on. It goes out when the engine is running.
suit the prevailing road/weather conditions,
as well as the traffic conditions and maintain Braking
a safe distance to the vehicle in front. Drive If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel
carefully. a pulsing in the brake pedal.
i Please note that the driving safety X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
systems described only work as effectively brake pedal with force until the braking
as possible when there is adequate contact situation is over.
between the tires and the road surface. Pay X To make a full brake application:
particular attention to the information depress the brake pedal with full force.
regarding tires, recommended minimum
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
tire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and
indication of hazardous road conditions, and
tires" section (Y page 310).
functions as a reminder to take extra care
In wintry driving conditions, always use while driving.
winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,
snow chains. Only in this way will the G WARNING
driving safety systems described in this Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady
section work as effectively as possible. brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the
brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS
and significantly reduces braking
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) effectiveness.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" BAS (Brake Assist System)
section (Y page 59).
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way section (Y page 59).
that the wheels do not lock when you brake.
BAS operates in emergency braking
This allows you to continue steering the
situations. If you depress the brake pedal
vehicle when braking.
quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph force, thus shortening the stopping distance.
(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface
X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,
even when you only brake gently. the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
G WARNING The brakes will function as usual once you
If the ABS malfunctions, other driving systems release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
such as the BAS or the ESP are also switched
off. Observe indicator and warning lamps that
Z
G WARNING X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the

If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still emergency braking situation is over.
functions, but without the additional brake ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
boost available that the BAS would normally The brakes will work normally again if:
provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Ryou release the brake pedal.
Safety
Therefore, the braking distance may increase.

Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end
collision.
Rno obstacle is detected in front of your
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)
vehicle.
BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles BAS PLUS is then deactivated.
equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS.
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the
i Observe the "Important safety notes" radar sensor system must be switched on and
section (Y page 59). operational, see "Radar sensor system" in the
At speeds above approximately index.
20 mph (30 km/h), BAS PLUS assists you G WARNING
when braking in hazardous situations and BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
uses the radar sensor system to evaluate the objects and complex traffic situations. BAS
traffic conditions. PLUS cannot intervene in these cases.
i This device has been approved by the FCC There is a risk of an accident. Always pay
as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar careful attention to the traffic situation and be
sensor is intended for use in an automotive ready to brake.
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
altering of the device will void any In particular, the detection of obstacles can
warranties, and is not permitted by the be impaired if there is:
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
any non-approved way. covering the sensors
Any unauthorized modification to this Rsnow or heavy rain
device could void the user's authority to Rinterference by other radar sources
operate the equipment. Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections,
With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS for example in parking garages
PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
path of your vehicle for an extended period of motorbike
time. Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line
At speeds up to approximately
40 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also detect G WARNING
stationary obstacles, for example stopped or BAS PLUS does not react:
parked vehicles. Rto people or animals
Should you approach an obstacle and BAS Rto oncoming vehicles
PLUS has detected a risk of collision, BAS
Rto crossing traffic
PLUS calculates the braking force necessary
to avoid a rear-end collision. Should you apply Rin curves
the brakes forcefully, BAS PLUS can As a result, BAS PLUS cannot intervene in
automatically increase the braking force to a critical situations. There is a risk of an
level suitable for the traffic conditions.
accident. Always pay careful attention to the prevent accidents resulting from excessive
traffic situation and be ready to brake. speed.
Following damage to the front end of the ! Vehicles without 4MATIC: switch the
vehicle, have the configuration and operation ignition off when:
of the radar sensors checked at a qualified
Safety
Rthe parking brake is being tested using a
specialist workshop. This also applies to dynamometer
collisions at low speeds where there is no
Rthe vehicle is being towed with the front
visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
axle raised
If BAS PLUS is not available due to a
malfunction in the radar sensor system, the Application of the brakes by ESP may
brake system remains available with full otherwise destroy the brake system.
brake boosting effect and BAS. ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off the
ignition when the parking brake is being
tested on a brake dynamometer.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) Application of the brakes by ESP may
Important safety notes otherwise destroy the brake system.
i See the "Important safety notes" section ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or
(Y page 59). performance tests may only be carried out
on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you wish to
If ESP detects that the vehicle is deviating operate the vehicle on such a
from the direction desired by the driver, one dynamometer, please consult an
or more wheels are braked to stabilize the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center in
vehicle. If necessary, the engine output is also advance. You could otherwise damage the
modified to keep the vehicle on the desired drive train or the brake system.
course within physical limits. ESP assists
the driver when pulling away on wet or i Only use wheels with the recommended
slippery roads. ESP can also stabilize the tire sizes. Only then will ESP function
vehicle during braking. properly.
If ESP intervenes, the ESP warning
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
lamp flashes in the instrument cluster.
G WARNING G WARNING
Observe "Important safety notes"
Under no circumstances should you
(Y page 58).
deactivate ESP when the ESP
warning lamp in the instrument cluster Traction control is part of ESP.
flashes. Proceed as follows:
Traction control brakes the drive wheels
Rwhen driving off, apply as little throttle as individually if they spin. This enables you to
possible. pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,
Rwhile driving, ease up on the accelerator for example if the road surface is slippery on
pedal. one side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, more
Radapt your speed to suit the prevailing road drive torque is also transferred to the wheel
and weather conditions. or wheels with traction.
Failure to observe these guidelines could Traction control remains active if you
cause the vehicle to skid. ESP cannot deactivate ESP.
Z
Deactivating/activating ESP (except G WARNING

AMG vehicles) When the ESP OFF warning lamp is lit,
G WARNING ESP is deactivated.
ESP should not be deactivated during If the ESP warning lamp and the
normal driving other than in the ESP OFF warning lamp remain lit,
Safety
circumstances described below. Disabling ESP is not available due to a malfunction.

the system will reduce vehicle stability in When ESP is deactivated or not operational,
driving maneuvers. vehicle stability in standard driving
Do not deactivate ESP when the emergency maneuvers is reduced.
or spare wheel is mounted. Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions and to the non-operating
ESP is activated automatically when the status of the ESP.
engine is started.
It may be best to deactivate ESP in the ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
following situations: extended period with ESP deactivated.
Rwhen using snow chains You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Rindeep snow X To activate:(Y page 204).
Ron sand or gravel The ESP OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out.
G WARNING
Switch on ESP immediately if one of the Deactivating/activating ESP (AMG
previously stated conditions is no longer met. vehicles)
Otherwise, ESP cannot stabilize the vehicle
if it begins to lurch or when a wheel spins. Activating/deactivating SPORT handling
mode
If you deactivate ESP:
G WARNING
RESP no longer improves driving stability. The SPORT handling mode should not be
Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and switched on during normal driving.
the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of Switching on the SPORT handling mode will
the wheels results in a cutting action, which result in the following:
provides better grip.
Rno restriction to the engine torque
Rtraction control is still activated.
Rsystem supported traction control is
RESP still provides support when you
limited
brake.
The SPORT handling mode is designed for
If ESP is deactivated and one or more wheels driving on closed tracks when the vehicle's
start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in own natural oversteer and understeer
the instrument cluster flashes. In such characteristics are desired and requires a
situations, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle. highly skilled and experienced driver able to
X To deactivate:(Y page 204). handle these critical driving situations.
The ESP OFF warning lamp in the You could lose control of your vehicle and
instrument cluster lights up. cause an accident.
Please be aware of these limits when you
switch on the SPORT handling mode.
Do not switch on the SPORT handling when a X To activate: briefly press button :.
spare wheel is mounted. The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
ESP is activated automatically when the The SPORT handling mode message
engine is started. appears in the multifunction display.
Safety
It may be best to activate SPORT handling X To deactivate: briefly press button :.
mode in the following situations:
The M SPORT handling mode warning
Rwhen using snow chains lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
Rindeep snow
Ron sand or gravel Activating/deactivating ESP
G WARNING
G WARNING
The ESP should not be switched off during
Switch off the SPORT handling mode and
normal driving.
switch on the ESP immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not apply Disabling of the system will result in the
anymore. Otherwise the SPORT handling following:
mode will only stabilize the vehicle to a limited Rno restriction to engine torque
extent when it is starting to skid or a wheel is Rloss of system-supported traction control
spinning.
"ESP OFF" is designed for driving on closed
When SPORT handling mode is activated: tracks when the vehicle's natural oversteer
and understeer characteristics are desired
RESP only improves driving stability to a and requires a highly skilled and experienced
limited degree. driver able to handle these critical driving
Rthe engine's torque is restricted only to a situations.
limited degree and the drive wheels can You could lose control of your vehicle and
spin. The spinning of the wheels results in cause an accident.
a cutting action, which provides better grip. Please be aware of these limits when you
switch off the ESP.
RESP still provides support when you brake
Do not switch off the ESP when a spare
firmly. wheel is mounted.
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one
or more wheels start to spin, the ESP ESP is activated automatically when the
warning lamp in the instrument cluster engine is started.
flashes. ESP only stabilizes the vehicle to a It may be best to deactivate ESP in the
limited degree. following situations:
Rwhen using snow chains
Rindeep snow
Ron sand or gravel
G WARNING
Switch on ESP immediately if one of the
previously stated conditions is no longer met.
Otherwise, ESP cannot stabilize the vehicle
if it begins to lurch or when a wheel spins.
Z
If you deactivate ESP: Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
RESP no longer improves driving stability. road conditions and to the non-operating
Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and
status of the ESP.
the drive wheels are able to spin. The ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
extended period with ESP deactivated.
Safety
action, which provides better grip.

You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
X To activate: briefly press button :.
RPRE-SAFE Brake is no longer available,
nor is it activated if you brake firmly and The ESP OFF warning lamp in the
ESP intervenes. instrument cluster goes out. The ON
message appears in the multifunction
RESP still provides support when you brake
display.
firmly.
If ESP is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in EBD (electronic brake force
the instrument cluster does not flash. In such distribution)
situations, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle.
i Observe the "Important safety notes"
section (Y page 59).
EBD monitors and controls the brake
pressure on the rear wheels to improve
driving stability while braking.
G WARNING
If EBD has malfunctioned, the braking system
remains available with full brake boosting
effect. However, the rear wheels can still lock,
e.g. under full braking. This could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and cause an
X To deactivate: press button : until the accident. You should therefore adapt your
ESP OFF warning lamp lights up in driving style to the different handling
the instrument cluster. characteristics.
The OFF message appears in the
multifunction display. X Observe the notes on warning and indicator
lamps (Y page 242) as well as display
G WARNING messages (Y page 216).
When the ESP OFF warning lamp is lit,
ESP is deactivated.
If the ESP warning lamp and the ADAPTIVE BRAKE
ESP OFF warning lamp remain lit, ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety
ESP is not available due to a malfunction. and offers increased braking comfort. In
When ESP is deactivated or not operational, addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE
vehicle stability in standard driving BRAKE also has the HOLD function
maneuvers is reduced. (Y page 172) and hill start assist
(Y page 140). For further information, see
Driving tips (Y page 156).
Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end

PRE-SAFE Brake
collision.
PRE-SAFE Brake is only available in vehicles Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in
with DISTRONIC PLUS. front of your vehicle.
i Observe the "Important safety notes" i USA only: this device has been approved
Safety
section (Y page 59). by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".
PRE-SAFE Brake can help you to minimize The radar sensor is intended for use in an
the risk of a frontal collision with a vehicle automotive radar system only. Removal,
ahead or reduce the effects of such a tampering, or altering of the device will void
collision. If PRE-SAFE Brake has detected a any warranties, and is not permitted by the
risk of collision, you will be warned visually FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
and acoustically as well as by automatic any non-approved way.
braking. PRE-SAFE Brake cannot prevent a Any unauthorized modification to this
collision without your intervention. device could void the user's authority to
At speeds above approximately operate the equipment.
20 mph (30 km/h), this function warns you i Canada only: this device complies with
when you are rapidly approaching the vehicle RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
in front. An intermittent warning tone will subject to the following two conditions:
then sound and the distance warning
1. This device may not cause interference,
lamp in the instrument cluster will light up.
and
X Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front. received, including interference that may
or cause undesired operation of the device.
X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do Removal, tampering, or altering of the
so. device will void any warranties, and is not
If the driver and front passenger have their permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
seat belt fastened, PRE-SAFE Brake can also in any non-approved way.
brake the vehicle automatically at speeds Any unauthorized modification to this
from approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) to device could void the user's authority to
approximately 124 mph (200 km/h). operate the equipment.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly With the help of the radar sensor system,
complicated driving conditions may cause PRE-SAFE Brake can detect obstacles that
unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary are in front of your vehicle for an extended
intervention of PRE-SAFE Brake. To stop the period of time.
braking action, you can either depress the At speeds up to approximately 40 mph
accelerator pedal further, activate kickdown (70 km/h), PRE-SAFE Brake can also react
or release the brake pedal. to stationary obstacles, for example stopped
The braking action of PRE-SAFE Brake is or parked vehicles.
ended automatically if: If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE
Ryourspeed drops below approximately Brake detects a risk of collision, the system
9 mph (15 km/h). will initially alert you both visually and
Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. acoustically. If you do not brake or take
evasive action, the system will warn you by
automatically braking the vehicle gently. If
the risk of collision remains and you do not
Z
66 Theft deterrent locking systems
brake, take evasive action or accelerate Rto crossing traffic

significantly, the vehicle may perform Rin curves
automatic emergency braking. Automatic
emergency braking is not performed until As a result, PRE-SAFE Brake cannot
immediately prior to an accident that can no intervene in critical situations. There is a risk
longer be avoided. of an accident. Always pay careful attention
Safety
to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING
Even if PRE-SAFE Brake slows the vehicle In order to maintain the appropriate distance
before an imminent rear-end collision, the to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a
system cannot avert a collision without the collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.
intervention of the driver. There is a risk of an X To activate/deactivate: activate or
accident. Brake according to the situation or deactivate PRE-SAFE Brake in the on-
take evasive action. Delayed intervention by board computer (Y page 205).
the driver can lead to an accident. The symbol appears in the
multifunction display as long as the HOLD
G WARNING function is not activated (Y page 172).
PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always detect On vehicles with Parking Guidance, the
complex traffic situations properly. symbol is displayed when
In these cases, PRE-SAFE(R) Brake may: transmission position P is selected or if you
Rgive
drive faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle For PRE-SAFE Brake to assist you when
Rneither give a warning nor intervene driving, the radar sensor system must be
There is a risk of an accident. Always pay
switched on (Y page 208) and operational.
particular attention to the traffic situation and Following damage to the front end of the
be ready to brake, especially if PRE-SAFE(R) vehicle, have the configuration and operation
Brake warns you. Terminate the intervention of the radar sensors checked at a qualified
in a non-critical driving situation. specialist workshop. This also applies to
collisions at low speeds where there is no
In particular, the detection of obstacles can visible damage to the front of the vehicle.
be impaired if there is:
Rdirt on the sensors or anything else
Theft deterrent locking systems
covering the sensors
Rsnow or heavy rain Immobilizer
Rinterference by other radar sources
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
Rthe possibility of strong radar reflections, being started without the correct SmartKey.
for example in parking garages When leaving the vehicle, always take the
Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
motorbike engine can be started by anyone with a valid
Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
X To activate with the SmartKey: remove
G WARNING
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
PRE-SAFE Brake does not react:
X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
Rto people or animals ignition off and open the driver's door.
Rto oncoming vehicles X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
Theft deterrent locking systems 67
i The immobilizer is always deactivated X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey
when you start the engine. or KEYLESS-GO.
In the event that the engine cannot be Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm
started when the starter battery is fully system is armed after approximately 15
charged, the immobilizer may be faulty. seconds.
Safety
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X To stop the alarm using the SmartKey:
insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
or
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the X Press the % or & button on the
alarm system is armed and you open:
SmartKey.
Ra door The alarm is switched off.
Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
Rthe trunk lid
grasp the outside door handle. The
Rthe hood SmartKey must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you The alarm is switched off.
close the open door that has triggered it, for or
example. X Press the Start/Stop button on the
i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside
seconds, the emergency call system the vehicle.
mbrace (USA only) or TELE AID (Canada The alarm is switched off.
only) initiates a call to the Customer
Assistance Center automatically. The
emergency call system initiates the call
provided that:
Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace/
TELE AID service.
Rthe mbrace/TELE AID service has been
activated properly.
Rthe required mobile phone, power supply
and GPS are available.
Z
68
69

SmartKey ............................................. 70
Doors .................................................... 77
Trunk .................................................... 80
Side windows ...................................... 83
Sliding sunroof .................................... 86
Opening/closing
70 SmartKey
Useful information hot, and a child could be burned on these

parts.
i This Operator's Manual describes all
models and all standard and optional G WARNING
equipment of your vehicle available at the If a key ring is too heavy or too large, the
time of publication of the Operator's weight acting on the SmartKey could cause it
Manual. Country-specific differences are to turn in the ignition lock or catch on the
possible. Please note that your vehicle may steering wheel. This could cause the engine
Opening/closing
not be equipped with all features to be switched off suddenly. You could lose
described. This also applies to safety- control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
related systems and functions. Do not attach any heavy or large key rings to
i Please read the information on qualified the SmartKey that is inserted in the ignition.
General notes
SmartKey If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with
Important safety notes the SmartKey, either the battery in the
SmartKey is discharged, the SmartKey is
G WARNING faulty or the starter battery is discharged.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the X Check the battery in the SmartKey and
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take replace it if necessary (Y page 74).
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. X Unlock the driver's door using the
Do not leave children unsupervised in the mechanical key (Y page 79).
X Lock the vehicle using the mechanical key
restraint system, and do not give them access
(Y page 79).
to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
X Have the starter battery and the battery
and/or serious personal injury. They could: contacts checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts
Rbe
If the SmartKey is faulty, contact Roadside
seriously or fatally injured by extreme
Assistance or a qualified specialist workshop.
heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or have an accident with
vehicle equipment that may still be in SmartKey functions
operation even after the SmartKey has
been removed from the ignition, such as the General notes
seat adjustment, steering wheel
i USA only:
adjustment or memory function.
If children open a door, they could cause
severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if
they get out of the vehicle, they could injure
themselves when doing so or be seriously or 1. This device may not cause harmful
even fatally injured by any passing traffic. interference, and
Do not expose the child restraint system to 2. this device must accept any interference
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's received, including interference that may
metal parts, for example, could become very cause undesired operation.
SmartKey 71
Any unauthorized modification to this When it is dark, the surround lighting also
device could void the users authority to comes on if it is activated in the on-board
operate the equipment. computer (Y page 207).
The Product label with FCC ID and IC If you activate the acoustic locking
certification number can be found in the confirmation function, you will hear the
battery case of the SmartKey. following, depending on the date of
production of the vehicle:
i Canada only:
Ran acoustic signal when locking
Opening/closing
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to or
the following two conditions: Rone acoustic signal when unlocking and
1. This device may not cause interference, three when locking.
and The audible signal can be activated and
2. this device must accept any interference deactivated using the on-board computer
received, including interference that may (Y page 208).
cause undesired operation of the device. X To unlock centrally: press the %
Any unauthorized modification to this button.
device could void the users authority to
If you do not open the vehicle within
approximately 40 seconds of unlocking:
The Product label with FCC ID and IC
Rthe vehicle is locked again.
battery case of the SmartKey. Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armed
again.
Locking and unlocking centrally X To lock centrally: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:

Rthe doors KEYLESS-GO
Rthe trunk lid
Rthe fuel filler flap General notes
i USA only:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
: & Locks the vehicle device could void the users authority to
; F Unlocks the trunk lid operate the equipment.
= % Unlocks the vehicle The Product label with FCC ID and IC
When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. battery case of the SmartKey.
When locking, they flash three times.
i Canada only:
Z
72 SmartKey
This device complies with RSS-210 of can then not be locked or started using
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to KEYLESS-GO.
the following two conditions: RIf the KEYLESS-GO key has been removed
1. This device may not cause harmful from the vehicle, e.g. if a passenger leaves
interference, and the vehicle with a KEYLESS-GO key:
2. this device must accept any interference - if the start/stop button is pressed or if
received, including interference that may an attempt is made to lock the vehicle
cause undesired operation. with the locking button on the outer door
Opening/closing
Any unauthorized modification to this handle, the Key Not Detected message
device could void the users authority to appears in the multifunction display
operate the equipment. - when the engine is running, the red Key
The Product label with FCC ID and IC Not Detected message appears in the
certification number can be found in the multifunction display as you pull away.
battery case of the SmartKey. Find the KEYLESS-GO key and change its
position in the vehicle. Carry the
Important notes on the use of KEYLESS- KEYLESS-GO key in your shirt pocket, for
GO example.
RIf you have started the engine with the
RThe KEYLESS-GO key can be used like a
Start/Stop button, you can switch it off
conventional key.
again by:
RYou can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
- pressing the Start/Stop button again
with those of a conventional key, e.g.
- inserting the KEYLESS-GO key into the
unlock with KEYLESS-GO and lock with the
& button. ignition lock if the vehicle is stationary
and the automatic transmission is in park
RAlways carry your KEYLESS-GO key on your
position P.
person.
RYou could unlock the vehicle by mistake if
RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key together
the distance between the KEYLESS-GO key
with: and the vehicle is less than 3 ft (1 m) and:
- electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
- an exterior door handle is hit by a water
or another key jet
- metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
or
This can affect the functionality of - you clean an exterior door handle.
KEYLESS-GO.
RBear in mind that the engine can be started
RWhen locking and unlocking using
by any of the vehicle occupants if there is
KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.
SmartKey and the corresponding door
handle must not exceed 3 ft (1 m).
RIf the KEYLESS-GO key is removed from the
vehicle, it is possible that the system may
not recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle
SmartKey 73
X To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner Restoring the factory settings
surface of the door handle.
X Press the % and & buttons
X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor
simultaneously for approximately six
surface :.
seconds until the battery check lamp
X Convenience closing feature: touch flashes twice.
recessed sensor surface ; for an
extended period (Y page 85).
Opening/closing
If you pull on the handle of the trunk lid, only Mechanical key
the trunk of the vehicle is unlocked.
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
Changing the settings of the locking unlocked with the SmartKey, use the
system mechanical key.
You can change the setting of the locking If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
system in such a way that only the driver's open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the
door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. This anti-theft alarm system will be triggered
is useful if you frequently travel on your own. (Y page 67).
X To change the setting: press and hold There are several ways to turn off the alarm:
down the % and & buttons X To turn the alarm off with the
simultaneously for approximately six SmartKey: press the % or & button
seconds until the battery check lamp on the SmartKey.
(Y page 74) flashes twice. or
X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
i If the setting of the locking system is
changed within the signal range of the or
vehicle, pressing the & or % button X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-
locks or unlocks the vehicle. GO: press the Start/Stop button in the
The SmartKey now functions as follows: ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the
vehicle.
X To unlock the driver's door: press the
or
% button once.
X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-
X To unlock centrally: press the %
GO. The SmartKey must be outside the
button twice. vehicle.
X To lock centrally: press the & button.
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked
follows: automatically.
X To unlock the driver's door: touch the X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
inner surface of the door handle on the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
driver's door.
X To unlock centrally: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the front-
passenger door or the rear door.
X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
Z
74 SmartKey
Removing the mechanical key Checking the battery

Opening/closing
X Push release catch : in the direction of X Press the & or % button.

the arrow and at the same time, remove The battery is working properly if battery
mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. check lamp : lights up briefly
If battery check lamp : does not light up
briefly during the test, the battery is
SmartKey battery discharged.
Important safety notes X Changing the battery (Y page 74)
Have the batteries changed at a qualified i You can obtain the battery at a qualified
specialist workshop. specialist workshop.
G WARNING i If the SmartKey battery is checked within
Batteries contain toxic substances. the signal reception range of the vehicle,
Swallowing batteries can lead to serious pressing the & or % button locks or
health issues or death. unlocks the vehicle.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
Seek medical attention immediately if a Changing the battery
battery is swallowed. You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X Take the mechanical key out of the
G WARNING SmartKey (Y page 73).
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. Observe
government disposal guidelines. California
residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
X Press mechanical key ; into the opening

in the SmartKey in the direction of the
SmartKey 75
arrow until battery tray cover : opens.

When doing so, do not hold cover : shut.
X Remove battery tray cover :.
Opening/closing
X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive
terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free
cloth to do so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free from lint, grease and all other forms of
contamination.
X Insert the front tabs of battery tray
cover : and then press to close it.
X Insert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey.
X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons
on the vehicle.
Z
76 SmartKey
Problems with the SmartKey

You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control
using the SmartKey. function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the
driver's door handle from close range and press the %/
Opening/closing
& button.
If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 74) and replace it if
necessary (Y page 74).
X Lock (Y page 79) or unlock (Y page 79) the vehicle using
the mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.

the mechanical key.
X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
using KEYLESS-GO. the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the %/& button.
There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.

X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of
the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door
handle from close range and press the %/& button.
X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 74) and replace it if
necessary (Y page 74).
the mechanical key.
You have lost a X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist

SmartKey. workshop.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors 77

The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low.
started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again.
X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary
Opening/closing
(Y page 298).
or
X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 301).
or
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be The steering lock is mechanically blocked.

started using the X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. While
SmartKey. doing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.
The engine cannot be A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as
started using KEYLESS- easily.
GO. The SmartKey is in X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
the vehicle.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Doors been removed from the ignition, such as the

Important safety notes adjustment or memory function.
G WARNING If children open a door, they could cause
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if
SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take they get out of the vehicle, they could injure
the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. themselves when doing so or be seriously or
Do not leave children unsupervised in the even fatally injured by any passing traffic.
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child Do not expose the child restraint system to
restraint system, and do not give them access direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised metal parts, for example, could become very
access to a vehicle could result in an accident hot, and a child could be burned on these
and/or serious personal injury. They could: parts.
Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts
G WARNING
Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
heat or cold
passenger compartment or trunk unless they
are firmly secured in place.
vehicle equipment that may still be in
Z
78 Doors
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo The central locking/unlocking button does

increases a child's risk of injury in the event not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.
of i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally
Rstrong braking maneuvers from the inside if the vehicle has been
Rsudden changes of direction locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
Ran accident i It is only possible to lock the vehicle
centrally if the front-passenger door is
Opening/closing
closed.
Unlocking and opening doors from
inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open
the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they
are not secured by the child-proof locks
(Y page 57).
Only open the door when the traffic situation
permits.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening the X To unlock: press button :.
vehicle from the inside will activate the anti-
X To lock: press button ;.
theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm
(Y page 67). If the front-passenger door is closed, the
vehicle locks.
You can open a front door from inside the
vehicle even if it has been locked. Only open
the door when the traffic situation permits.
If the vehicle has been locked with the central
locking button:
Rand the SmartKey is set to its factory
setting, the entire vehicle is unlocked if a
front door is opened from the inside
Rand the SmartKey is set to an individual
X
setting, only the front door that is opened
Pull door handle ;.
from inside the vehicle is unlocked.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops
If the vehicle has been locked centrally with
up. The door is unlocked and can be
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it is not
opened.
unlocked when the release button for the
central locking is used.
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside Automatic locking feature
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle The vehicle locks automatically when the
from the inside. ignition is switched on and the wheels of the
Doors 79
vehicle are turning at a speed of more than

9 mph (15 km/h).
You could therefore be locked out when:
Rthe vehicle is being pushed.
Rthe vehicle is being towed.
Rthe vehicle is being tested on a
dynamometer.
Opening/closing
X Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise
to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it.
SmartKey.
X To deactivate: press and hold button :
for about five seconds until a tone sounds.
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
X To activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds. If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
i If you press one of the two buttons and X Open the driver's door.
do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has
X Close the front-passenger door, the rear
already been selected.
doors and the trunk lid.
You can also switch the automatic locking X Press the locking button (Y page 78).
function on and off using the on-board
X Check whether the locking knobs on the
computer (Y page 208).
front-passenger door and the rear doors
are still visible. Press down the locking
Unlocking the driver's door knobs by hand, if necessary.
(mechanical key) X Close the driver's door.
If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
SmartKey (Y page 73).
the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
the driver's door as far as it will go.
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm
system will be triggered (Y page 67).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of
the driver's door as far as it will go.
Z
80 Trunk
been removed from the ignition, such as the

adjustment or memory function.
If children open a door, they could cause
severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if
they get out of the vehicle, they could injure
themselves when doing so or be seriously or
even fatally injured by any passing traffic.
Opening/closing
Do not expose the child restraint system to

direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
X
metal parts, for example, could become very
Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far
hot, and a child could be burned on these
as it will go to position 1.
parts.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove
it. G WARNING
X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
are locked. passenger compartment or trunk unless they
X Insert the mechanical key into the are firmly secured in place.
SmartKey. Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
i If you lock the vehicle as described above, increases a child's risk of injury in the event
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti- of
theft alarm system is not armed. Rstrong braking maneuvers
Rsudden changes of direction
Ran accident
Trunk
Important safety notes G WARNING
Make sure the trunk lid is closed when the
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
engine is running and while driving. Among
could otherwise lock yourself out.
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
G WARNING gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the in unconsciousness and death.
! The trunk lid swings upwards when
Do not leave children unsupervised in the opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
restraint system, and do not give them access To open the trunk lid completely, a minimum
to an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised clearance of 5.90 ft (1.80 m) above the
access to a vehicle could result in an accident ground is necessary.
and/or serious personal injury. They could: The trunk lid can be:
Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts Ropened and closed manually from outside
Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme Ropened automatically from outside
heat or cold Ropened automatically from inside
Rlocked separately
vehicle equipment that may still be in
Trunk 81
Runlocked with the mechanical key (Y page 70) or with KEYLESS-GO

Ropened with the emergency release button (Y page 71).
i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the
trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and
Opening and closing manually then opens again.
Opening
X Press the % button on the SmartKey. Opening automatically from outside
Opening/closing
G WARNING
gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting
in unconsciousness and death.

opened. Therefore, make sure that there is
X Pull handle :. sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
X Raise the trunk lid. To open the trunk lid completely, a minimum
clearance of 5.90 ft (1.80 m) above the
ground is necessary.
Closing
G WARNING Opening
To prevent possible personal injury, always You can open the trunk lid automatically
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk using the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk
opening when closing the trunk lid. Be lid.
especially careful when small children are
X Press and hold the F button on the
around.
SmartKey until the trunk lid opens.
or
X When the trunk is unlocked, pull the trunk
lid handle and let it go again immediately.
Closing
Opening automatically from the

inside
X Pull the trunk lid down using recess :. G WARNING

X If necessary, lock the vehicle with
the & button on the SmartKey
Z
82 Trunk
gases may enter the vehicle interior resulting X Remove the mechanical key.
in unconsciousness and death. X Insert the mechanical key into the
SmartKey.
You can open the trunk lid from the driver's
seat when the vehicle is stationary and
unlocked. Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)
Opening/closing
opened. Therefore, make sure that there is

sufficient clearance above the trunk lid.
If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the
mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system
will be triggered (Y page 67).
X To open: press the upper section of remote SmartKey (Y page 73).
operating switch for trunk lid : until the
X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
trunk lid opens.
lock as far as the stop.
Locking the trunk separately

You can lock the trunk separately. If you then
unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk
remains locked and cannot be opened.
X Close the trunk lid.
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise

from position 1 as far as it will go to
position 2.
The trunk is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back to position
1 and remove it.
SmartKey.
X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid

lock as far as the stop. Trunk emergency release
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from You can open the trunk lid from inside the
position 1 to position 2. vehicle with the emergency release button.
Side windows 83
The closing of the door windows can be

immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if the switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
If a door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing the windows by pressing and
Opening/closing
holding the & button on the SmartKey or
by pressing and holding the lock button
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside
X Briefly press emergency release
door handle, the anti-entrapment feature will
button :.
not operate.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
Activate the override switch when children
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
with the trunk lid emergency release when children may otherwise injure themselves,
the vehicle is stationary or while driving. e.g. by becoming trapped in the door window
Trunk lid emergency release light: opening.
Remergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened. G WARNING
Remergency release button : flashes for Do not keep any part of your body up against
the window pane when opening a window. The
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.
downward motion of the pane may pull that
The trunk lid emergency release does not part of your body down between the window
open the trunk lid if the battery is pane and the door frame and trap it there. If
disconnected or discharged. there is a risk of entrapment, release the
switch and pull it to close the window.
Side windows
Important safety notes Opening and closing the side
windows
G WARNING
When opening or closing the door windows,
make sure that there is no danger of anyone
being harmed by the opening/closing
procedure.
The door windows are equipped with
automatic operation and the anti-entrapment
feature. If in automatic mode a door window
encounters an obstruction that blocks its
path, the anti-entrapment feature will stop the
door window and open it slightly.
The door windows operate differently when : Front left
the switch is pulled. See the "Problems with ; Front right
door windows" section for details. = Rear right
? Rear left
Z
84 Side windows
The switches for all side windows are located panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
on the driver's door. There is also a switch on panel are in the desired position.
each door for the corresponding side window. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof
The switches on the driver's door take with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the
precedence. roller sunblinds are opened first.
i The side windows cannot be operated X Press and hold the % button again until
from the rear when the override feature for the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
the side windows is activated (Y page 57). panel is in the desired position.
Opening/closing
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the X To interrupt convenience opening:

ignition lock. release the % button.
X To open: press the corresponding switch.
X To close: pull the corresponding switch.
Convenience closing
i If you press the switch beyond the point
of resistance, an automatic opening/ General notes
closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop When you lock the vehicle, you can
automatic operation by operating the simultaneously:
switch again. Rclose the side windows
Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama
i You can continue to operate the side
windows after you switch off the engine or roof with power tilt/sliding panel
remove the SmartKey. This function is On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
available for up to five minutes or until the tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the
driver's or front-passenger door is opened. roller sunblinds.
G WARNING
When closing the door windows and the
Convenience opening feature
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start tilt/sliding panel, make sure that there is no
driving. To do this, the key is used to carry out danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
the following functions simultaneously: procedure.
Runlock the vehicle If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
Ropen the side windows RRelease the & button to stop the closing
Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama procedure. To open, press and hold the
roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the % button. To continue the closing
roller sunblinds procedure after making sure that there is
i The convenience opening feature can no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure, press and hold the
only be operated using the SmartKey. The
& button.
SmartKey must be close to the driver's
door handle. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's RRelease the sensor surface on the outside
door handle. door handle to stop the closing procedure.
X Press and hold the % button until the RImmediately pull on the same outside door
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the handle and hold firmly. The door windows
and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof
Side windows 85
with power tilt/sliding panel will open for sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with
as long as the door handle is held but the power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
door is not opened. i Make sure you only touch recessed
sensor surface :.
Using the SmartKey X Make sure that all the side windows and the
i The SmartKey must be close to the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with
driver's door handle. power tilt/sliding panel are closed.
Opening/closing
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
door handle. tilt/sliding panel:
X Press and hold the & button until the X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
side windows and the sliding sunroof or the door handle again until the roller sunblinds
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding of the panorama roof with power tilt/
panel are fully closed. sliding panel close.
X Make sure that all the side windows and the X To interrupt convenience closing:
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with release recessed sensor surface : on the
power tilt/sliding panel are closed. door handle.
On vehicles with a panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
X Press and hold the & button again until Resetting the side windows
the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof You must reset each side window if a side
with power tilt/sliding panel close. window can no longer be closed fully.
X To interrupt convenience closing: X Close all the doors.
release the & button. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
Using KEYLESS-GO X Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is
The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the completely closed. (Y page 83)
vehicle. All the doors must be closed.
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:

X Immediately pull the corresponding switch
on the door control panel until the side
window is completely closed (Y page 83).
X Hold the switch for an additional second.
X If the corresponding side window remains
closed after the button has been released,
the side window has been reset correctly.
If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
Z
86 Sliding sunroof
Problems with the side windows term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of
sliding sunroof.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed
because it is blocked by objects, e.g. G WARNING
leaves in the window guide. When opening or closing the sliding sunroof,
X Remove the objects. make sure that there is no danger of anyone
X Close the side window.
being harmed by the opening/closing
procedure.
Problem: a side window cannot be closed
Opening/closing
The sliding sunroof is equipped with

and you cannot see the cause. automatic operation and the anti-entrapment
G WARNING feature. If the movement of the sliding sunroof
Closing the side windows with increased force is blocked during the closing procedure, the
or without the anti-entrapment feature could sliding sunroof will stop and open slightly.
lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure The sliding sunroof operates differently when
that nobody can become trapped when the sliding sunroof switch is pressed and held.
closing the side windows. See the "Problems with the sliding sunroof"
section for more details.
If a side window is obstructed during closing The opening/closing procedure of the sliding
and reopens again slightly: sunroof can be immediately halted by
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull releasing the sliding sunroof switch or, if the
the corresponding switch again until the sliding sunroof switch was moved past the
side window has closed. resistance point and released, by moving the
The side window is closed with increased sliding sunroof switch in any direction.
force.
G WARNING
If a side window is obstructed again during
The sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In the
closing and reopens again slightly:
event of an accident, the glass may shatter.
X Immediately after the window blocks, pull This may result in an opening in the roof.
the corresponding switch again until the In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
side window has closed. their seat belts or not wearing them properly
The side window is closed without the anti- may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
entrapment feature. opening also presents a potential for injury for
occupants wearing their seat belts properly,
G WARNING
as entire body parts or portions of them may
Pulling and holding the switch to close the
protrude from the passenger compartment.
door window immediately after it had been
blocked two times will cause the door window ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free
to close without the anti-entrapment feature of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions
for as long as you hold the switch. may occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could
Sliding sunroof be damaged.
Important safety notes ! The weather can change abruptly. It could
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding start to rain or snow. Make sure that the
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding sunroof is closed when you leave the
sliding panel. In the following section, the vehicle. The vehicle electronics can be
Sliding sunroof 87
damaged if water enters the vehicle When opening and raising the roof,
interior. automatic operation is only available if the
sliding sunroof is in the closed position.
i Resonance noises can occur in addition
to the usual airflow noises when the sliding The sun protection cover automatically opens
sunroof is open. They are caused by minor along with the sliding sunroof. You can open
pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. or close the sun protection cover manually
Change the position of the sliding sunroof when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
or open a side window slightly to reduce or
Opening/closing
eliminate these noises. Resetting
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move
smoothly.
Operating the sliding sunroof
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
Opening and closing ignition lock.
X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear
i You can continue to operate the sliding
(Y page 87).
sunroof after switching off the engine or
X Keep the 3 switch pressed for another
removing the SmartKey from the ignition
lock. This function is available for up to five second.
minutes or until the driver's or front- X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be
passenger door is opened. fully opened and closed again (Y page 87).
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps
above again.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
opened or closed fully after resetting,
contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Operating the panorama roof with

power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing
: To raise
; To open
= To close/lower
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the
corresponding direction.
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, an automatic opening/
closing process is started in the Overhead control panel
corresponding direction. You can stop : To raise
automatic operation by operating the ; To open
switch again.
= To close/lower
Z
88 Sliding sunroof
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding Opening and closing

panel can only be operated when the roller
sunblind is open.
ignition lock.
X Push or pull the 3 switch in the
Opening/closing
i If you press the 3 switch beyond the

closing process is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by operating the
switch again.
: To open
When raising the roof, automatic operation
; To open
is only available if the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel is in the closed = To close
position. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X Press or pull the 3 switch in the
Operating the sunblinds for the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel i If you press the 3 switch beyond the
General notes closing process is started in the
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior corresponding direction. You can stop
from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can automatic operation by operating the
only be opened and closed together when the switch again.
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
is closed. Resetting the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel and the roller
G WARNING sunblinds
When opening or closing the roller sunblinds,
Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/
make sure that no one can be injured.
sliding panel and the roller sunblinds if the
The roller sunblinds have automatic operation panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
and an anti-entrapment feature. If the roller or the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly.
sunblinds are blocked during the closing
procedure, the anti-entrapment feature stops
the roller sunblinds and they open again ignition lock.
slightly. X Press the 3 switch to the point of
The opening and closing of the roller resistance in the direction of arrow ; and
sunblinds can be terminated immediately by hold it until the panorama roof with power
releasing the button. In automatic operation, tilt/sliding panel has opened about 4 in
press the button briefly in any direction to (10 cm).
stop the roller sunblinds. X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point
of resistance in the direction of arrow =
Sliding sunroof 89
until the panorama roof with power tilt/ If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during
sliding panel is fully closed. closing and reopens again slightly:
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an X Immediately after the sliding sunroof
additional second. blocks, pull the 3 switch in the
X Press the 3 switch to the point of overhead control panel down to the point
resistance in the direction of arrow ; and of resistance and hold it until the sliding
hold it until the sunblinds have opened sunroof is closed.
about 4 in (10 cm). The sliding sunroof is closed with increased
Opening/closing
X Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point force.
of resistance in the direction of arrow = If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again
until the roller sunblinds are fully closed. during closing and reopens again slightly:
X Keep the 3 switch pulled for an X Immediately after the sliding sunroof
additional second. blocks, pull the 3 switch in the
X Make sure that the panorama roof with overhead control panel down to the point
power tilt/sliding panel and the roller of resistance and hold it until the sliding
sunblinds can be fully opened and closed sunroof is closed.
again (Y page 87). The sliding sunroof is closed without the
X If this is not the case, repeat the steps anti-entrapment feature.
above again.
G WARNING
! If the panorama roof with power tilt/ Pressing and holding the sliding sunroof
sliding panel and the roller sunblind cannot switch to close the sliding sunroof
be fully opened or closed after resetting, immediately after it had been blocked two
contact a qualified specialist workshop. times will cause the sliding sunroof to close
without the anti-entrapment feature for as
long as you hold the switch.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding
opened or closed as a result of a
sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/
malfunction, contact a qualified specialist
sliding panel. In the following section, the
workshop.
term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of
sliding sunroof.
Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed
and you cannot see the cause.
G WARNING
You could be severely or even fatally injured
when closing the sliding sunroof with
increased closing force or if the anti-
entrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure
that nobody can become trapped when
closing the sliding sunroof.
Z
90
91

Correct driver's seat position ............ 92
Seats .................................................... 93
Steering wheel .................................... 99
Mirrors ............................................... 101
Memory function .............................. 103
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

92 Correct driver's seat position
Useful information Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

Ryou have moved the backrest to an
i This Operator's Manual describes all almost vertical position.
models and all standard and optional Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so
equipment of your vehicle available at the that your thighs are gently supported.
time of publication of the Operator's Ryou can depress the pedals properly.
Manual. Country-specific differences are
X Check whether the head restraint is
possible. Please note that your vehicle may
adjusted properly (Y page 95).
not be equipped with all features
described. This also applies to safety- When doing so, make sure that you have
related systems and functions. adjusted the head restraint so that the back
of your head is supported at eye level by

i Please read the information on qualified the center of the head restraint.
Observe the safety guidelines on steering
wheel adjustment (Y page 99).
Correct driver's seat position X Check whether steering wheel : is
adjusted properly.
Adjusting the steering wheel
manually(Y page 99)
Adjusting the steering wheel electrically
(Y page 100)
When adjusting the steering wheel, make
sure:
Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
Ryou can move your legs freely.
Ryou can see all the displays in the
instrument cluster clearly.
Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts
(Y page 48).
X Check whether you have fastened seat
belt ; properly (Y page 50).
Observe the safety guidelines on seat
adjustment (Y page 93). The seat belt should:
Rfit snugly across your body
X Check whether you have adjusted seat =
Rbe routed across the middle of your
properly.
Manual and electrical seat adjustment shoulder
Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the
(Y page 94)
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 94) hip joints
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view
When adjusting the seat, make sure:
mirror and the exterior mirrors
Ryou are as far away from the driver's air
bag as possible.
Ryou are sitting in a normal upright
position.
Seats 93
(Y page 101) in such a way that you have with the driver still able to operate the
a good view of road and traffic conditions. controls properly.
X Vehicles with a memory function: save Radjust the head restraint so that it is as
the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror close to the head as possible and the center
settings (Y page 103). of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level.
Rnever place hands under the seat or near
Seats any moving parts while a seat is being
adjusted.
Failure to do so could result in an accident

G WARNING and/or serious personal injury.
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control, all seat, head restraint, steering G WARNING
wheel and rear view mirror adjustments, as The electrically adjustable seats can be
well as fastening of seat belts, must be done operated at any time. Therefore, do not leave
before setting the vehicle in motion. children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child's
G WARNING unsupervised access to a vehicle could result
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving. in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. G WARNING
Never travel in a moving vehicle with the seat According to accident statistics, children are
backrest in an excessively reclined position as safer when properly restrained in the rear
this can be dangerous. You could slide under seating positions than in the front seating
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
it, the seat belt would apply force at the children be placed in the rear seats whenever
abdomen or neck. This could cause serious or possible. Regardless of seating position,
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts children 12 years old and under must be
provide the best restraint when the wearer is seated and properly secured in an
in a position that is as upright as possible and appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
seat belts are properly positioned on the restraint, or booster seat recommended for
body. the size and weight of the child. For additional
information, see "Children in the vehicle".
G WARNING A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is
Your seat belt must be adjusted so that you significantly increased if the child restraints
can correctly fasten your seat belt. are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
Observe the following points: or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Radjust the seat backrest until your arms are
slightly angled when holding the steering G WARNING
wheel.
For your protection, drive only with properly
Radjust the seat to a comfortable seating
positioned head restraints.
position that still allows you to reach the
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
to the head as possible and the center of the
position should be as far back as possible
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
Z
94 Seats
injury to the head and neck in the event of an Adjusting the seats manually and
accident or similar situation. electrically
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat

heating, observe the following information:
Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat
: Backrest angle
heating should also not be used to dry
the seats. ; Seat height
Rclean the seat covers as recommended; = Seat cushion angle
see the "Interior care" section. ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Rdo not transport heavy loads on the
i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat
seats. Do not place sharp objects on the
with an integrated head restraint. It is
seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.
therefore not possible to set the height and
The seats should only be occupied by
angle of the head restraint.
passengers, if possible.
Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do i Adjust the seat cushion angle so that your
not cover the seats with insulating thighs are lightly supported.
materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,
seat covers, child seats or booster seats. Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
! When you move the seats, make sure that X Lift handle ? and slide the seat forwards
there are no objects in the footwell or or backwards.
behind the seats. Otherwise, you could X Release lever ? again.
damage the seats and the objects. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
i The head restraints in the front seats are position.
equipped with the NECK-PRO system
(Y page 47). For this reason, it is not Seat cushion angle
possible to remove the head restraints
X Turn handwheel = in the desired direction.
from the front seats.
Vehicles without the through-loading
feature: the head restraints cannot be
removed from the rear compartment seats. Adjusting the seats electrically
Please contact an authorized Mercedes- i Vehicles without Memory function: the
Benz Center for more information. seats can be adjusted within three minutes
of a front door being opened.
i Other topics:
RRear bench seat through-loading feature
(Y page 256)
Seats 95
The time period starts over again if, within i You can store the seat settings using the
these three minutes, you: memory function (Y page 103).
Ropen or close a front door i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat
Rinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock featuring an integrated head restraint and
or remove it from the ignition lock the head restraint adjustment button is
Rswitch the ignition on or off deactivated. It is therefore not possible to
If the SmartKey is in position 2 in the set the height and angle of the head
ignition lock, the seats can be adjusted at restraint.
any time.
Depending on the equipment, the seat

Adjusting the head restraints
adjustment buttons are either located on the
side of the seat or on the door control panel. Adjusting the head restraints manually
Adjusting the head restraint height3
: Head restraint height

; Seat cushion angle
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
= Seat height
desired position.
? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
X To lower: press release catch : in the
A Backrest angle
direction of the arrow and push the head
restraint down to the desired position.
Adjusting the angle of the head restraints
: Seat cushion angle

; Seat height
= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
? Backrest angle
3 For vehicles without memory function only.
Z
96 Seats
X Push or pull the lower edge of the head Keep the area around head restraints clear of
restraint in the direction of the arrow. articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
folding operation of the head restraints.
Adjusting the head restraint height
electrically4 G WARNING
For your protection, drive only with properly
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide
positioned head restraints.
the switch for head restraint adjustment
(Y page 94) up or down in the direction of Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it
the arrow. is as close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level. This will reduce the

Adjusting luxury head restraints potential for injury to the head and neck in the
G WARNING event of an accident or similar situation.
When folding back the side cushions, never With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
reach between the side cushion and the the respective head restraint up from the
mounting post. You could otherwise be lowest non-use position and have the
trapped. occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints installed when the rear seats are
occupied. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint

height
X To adjust the side bolsters of the head

restraint: push or pull right and/or left-
hand side bolster : into the desired
position.
X To adjust the angle of the head
restraint: push or pull the head restraint in
the direction of arrow ;. If the head restraint is fully lowered, it is
necessary to press release catch :.
Rear seat head restraints X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
G WARNING
X To lower: press release catch : and push
For safety reasons, always drive with the rear
head restraints in the upright position when the head restraint down until it is in the
the rear seats are occupied. desired position.
4 For vehicles with memory function only.

Seats 97
Removing and installing rear head

restraints5
G WARNING
Occupants should only travel sitting on seats
which have the head restraints installed. In
the event of an accident, this reduces the risk
of injury for passengers seated in the rear
compartment.

X Move adjustment lever : in the direction
of the arrow until the desired backrest
contour is achieved.
Adjusting the four-way lumbar

support
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum
X Release the rear seat backrest and fold it support for your back.
slightly forwards (Y page 257).
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to
the stop.
X Press release catch : and pull the head
restraint out of the guides.
X To re-install: insert the head restraint so
that the notches on the bar are on the left
when viewed in the direction of travel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear
it engage in position.
X Fold back the rear seat backrest until it
: To raise the backrest contour
engages.
; To soften the backrest contour
= To lower the backrest contour
Adjusting the lumbar support ? To harden the backrest contour
You can adjust the contour of the front seats

so as to provide optimum support for your Adaptive backrest (AMG vehicle)
back.
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually so as to provide
optimum support for your back.
5 Only for vehicles with through-loading facility.
Z
98
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Seats
: To adjust the upper back support Driver's and front-passenger seat

; To adjust the contour of the backrest in The system automatically switches down
the lumbar region from level 3 to level 2 after approximately
= To adjust the lateral structure and support eight minutes.
of the seat The system automatically switches down
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
2 in the ignition lock. minutes.
The system automatically switches off
i If, after a certain amount of time, the seat approximately 20 minutes after it is set to
no longer has the desired contour, repeat level 1.
the adjustment.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
Switching the seat heating on/off X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
Switching on/off X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
G WARNING until all the indicator lamps go out.

Repeatedly setting the seat heating to level
3 may result in excessive seat temperatures. Problems with the seat heating
The health of passengers that have limited
The seat heating has switched off
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
prematurely or cannot be switched on. The
react to excessively high temperatures may
vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low
be affected or they may even suffer burn-like
because too many electrical consumers are
injuries. Therefore, do not use seat heating
switched on.
level 3 repeatedly.
X Switch off electrical consumers which you
The three red indicator lamps in the button do not need, such as the rear window
indicate the heating level you have selected. defroster or interior lighting.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
heating may switch off.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Switching on/off
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons
indicate the ventilation level you have
selected.
Steering wheel 99
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat feature locked could cause the driver to lose
ventilation may switch off. control of the vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature can be operated at any time.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child's unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.

Adjusting the steering wheel
manually
2 in the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
i You can open the side windows and the
sliding sunroof using the "Convenience
opening" feature (Y page 84). The seat
ventilation of the driver's seat
automatically switches to the highest level.
X To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out. : Release lever
; To adjust the steering wheel height
Problems with the seat ventilation = To adjust the steering wheel position
The seat ventilation has switched off (fore-and-aft adjustment)
prematurely or cannot be switched on. The X Push release lever : down completely.
vehicle's electrical system voltage is too low The steering column is unlocked.
because too many electrical consumers are X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
switched on. position.
X Switch off electrical consumers which you X Push release lever : up completely.
do not need, such as the rear window The steering column is locked.
defroster or interior lighting. X Check if the steering column is locked.
When doing so, try to push the steering
wheel up or down or try to move it in the
Steering wheel fore-and-aft direction.
G WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the steering wheel adjustment
Z
100 Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel G WARNING

electrically Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
be completed before setting the vehicle in
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Position of the steering wheel when the

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active

The steering wheel swings upwards when
: To adjust the steering wheel height you:
; To adjust the steering wheel position Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
(fore-and-aft adjustment) Ropen the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO is
i Other topics: in position 1
Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is
REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
(Y page 100)
Rstoring settings (Y page 103) i The steering wheel only moves upwards if
it has not already reached the upper end
stop.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT system
Position of the steering wheel for
Important safety notes driving
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting The steering wheel is moved to the last
in and out of your vehicle easier. selected position when:
You can activate and deactivate the EASY- Rthe driver's door is closed.
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board
Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition
computer (Y page 209).
lock.
G WARNING or
You must make sure no one can become Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on
trapped or injured by the moving steering vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
When you close the driver's door with the
activated.
ignition switched on, the steering wheel is
To stop steering wheel movement, move also automatically moved to the previously
steering wheel adjustment stalk or press the set position.
memory position switch.
The last position of the steering wheel is
Do not leave children unattended in the stored after each manual setting or when you
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. store the setting with the memory function
Children could open the driver's door and (Y page 103).
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Mirrors 101
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature The exterior mirrors are automatically heated

if the rear window defroster is switched on
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
and the outside temperature is low.
triggered in an accident, the steering column
will move upwards when the driver's door is
opened. This occurs irrespective of the
position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and
rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is
only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY

feature is activated in the on-board computer.
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Press button : for the left-hand exterior
Rear-view mirror (manual anti-glare)
mirror or button ; for the right-hand
exterior mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding
button lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after
some time. You can adjust the selected
mirror using adjustment button = as long
as the indicator lamp is lit.
X Press adjustment button = up, down, to
the right or to the left until the exterior
mirror is set to a position that provides you
X anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare with a good overview of traffic conditions.
switch : forwards or back.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
Exterior mirrors This function is only available in vehicles for
Adjusting the exterior mirrors Canada.
G WARNING
Exercise care when using the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a
wider field of view). Objects in mirror are
closer than they appear. Check your interior
rear view mirror and glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
Z
102 Mirrors
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position Exterior mirror out of position
1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
X Briefly press button :.
position, proceed as follows:
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
X Vehicles without electrically folding
i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror
always folded out fully while the vehicle is into the correct position manually.
in motion, as they may otherwise vibrate. X Vehicles with electronically folding
i If you are driving faster than mirrors6: press the mirror-folding button
9 mph (15 km/h), you can no longer fold in (Y page 101) repeatedly until you hear the
mirror engage in position.
the exterior mirrors.

The mirror housing is engaged again and
you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
Setting the exterior mirrors
(Y page 101).
This function is only available in vehicles for
Canada.
If the battery has been disconnected or Automatic anti-glare mirrors
completely discharged, the exterior mirrors
must be reset. The exterior mirrors will G WARNING
otherwise not fold in when you select the If incident light from headlamps is prevented
"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the from striking the sensor in the rear-view
on-board computer (Y page 209). mirror, for instance, by luggage piled too high
in the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in
glare function will not operate.
position 1 in the ignition lock.
Incident light could then blind you. This may
X Briefly press button :.
distract you from the traffic conditions and,
as a result, you may cause an accident.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror
on the driver's side automatically go into anti-
glare mode if the ignition is switched on and
Canada.
incident light from headlamps strikes the
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function sensor in the rear-view mirror.
is activated in the on-board computer
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
(Y page 209):
reverse gear is engaged or the interior lighting
Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
is switched on.
soon as you lock the vehicle from the
outside.
Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again Parking position for the exterior
automatically as soon as you unlock the mirror on the front-passenger side
vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
passenger door. Setting and storing the parking position
i The mirrors do not fold out if they have You can position the front-passenger side
been folded in manually. exterior mirror in such a way that you can see
the rear wheel on that side as soon as you
6 Canada only
Memory function 103
engage reverse gear. You can store this If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
position. the steps.
Calling up a stored parking position

setting
ignition lock.
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side with the corresponding
button (Y page 101).

X Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and side moves to the stored parking position.
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
ignition lock. side moves back to its original position:
X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 6 mph
the front-passenger side. (10 km/h)
X Engage reverse gear. Rabout ten seconds after you have
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger disengaged reverse gear
side moves to the preset parking position. Rif you press button : for the exterior
X Use adjustment button = to adjust the mirror on the driver's side
exterior mirror to a position that allows you
to see the rear wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored. Memory function
i If you shift the transmission to another Storing settings
position, the exterior mirror on the front-
With the memory function, you can store up
passenger side returns to the driving
to three different settings, e.g. for three
position.
different people.
i You can also store the parking position The following settings are stored as a single
using memory button M ?. memory preset:
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in Rposition of the seat, backrest and head
position 2 in the ignition lock. restraint
X With the exterior mirror on the front- Rdriver's side: steering wheel position
passenger side activated, use Rdriver's side: position of the exterior
adjustment button = to adjust the mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger
exterior mirror to a position which sides
allows you to see the rear wheel and
the curb. G WARNING
X Press memory button M ? and one of Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function while
the arrows on adjustment button =
driving could cause the driver to lose control
within three seconds.
of the vehicle.
The parking position is stored if the
exterior mirror does not move.
Z
104
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Memory function
X Adjust the seat (Y page 94).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steering
wheel (Y page 100) and the exterior mirrors
(Y page 101).
X Press memory button M and one of the
storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected
preset position. A tone sounds when the
settings have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting

! If you want to move the seat from the fully
reclined position to a stored seat position,
first raise the backrest. The seat could
otherwise be damaged.
X Press and hold the relevant storage
position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat,
steering wheel and exterior mirrors are in
the stored position.
i The setting procedure is interrupted as
soon as you release the storage position
button.
105
Useful information ............................ 106

Exterior lighting ................................ 106
Interior lighting ................................. 112
Replacing bulbs ................................. 113
Windshield wipers ............................ 116
Lights and windshield wipers

106 Exterior lighting
Useful information Light switch
i This Operator's Manual describes all Operation

models and all standard and optional Depending on the date of manufacture of your
equipment of your vehicle available at the vehicle, the c or symbol for the
time of publication of the Operator's automatic headlamp mode/daytime running
Manual. Country-specific differences are lamps is located on the light switch.
described. This also applies to safety-
Exterior lighting
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz Illustration: light switch with the symbol for
the automatic headlamp mode/daytime running
recommends that you drive with the lights lamps
switched on even during the daytime. In some 1W Left-hand standing lamps
countries, operation of the headlamps varies
due to legal requirements and self-imposed 2X Right-hand standing lamps
obligations. 3T Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4 Automatic headlamp mode/daytime
Information about driving abroad running lamps
Converting to symmetrical low beam 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
when driving abroad: switch the headlamps BR Rear fog lamp
to symmetrical low beam in countries in CN Front fog lamps7
which traffic drives on the opposite side of the
road to the country where the vehicle is
registered. This prevents glare to oncoming
traffic. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate
as large an area of the edge of the road.
Have the headlamps converted at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, as close to the border
as possible before driving in these countries.
Converting to asymmetrical low beam
after returning: have the headlamps
converted back to asymmetrical low beam at
a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, as soon as
possible after crossing the border again.
7 Only vehicles with front fog lamps have the fog lamps function.
Exterior lighting 107
Low-beam headlamps
X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
position 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.
The L indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up.
Daytime running lamps

Illustration: light switch with the c symbol for Daytime running lamps in Canada
the automatic headlamp mode/daytime running
lamps The daytime running lamps function is

1W Left-hand standing lamps
required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore
be deactivated.
2X Right-hand standing lamps
X Turn the light switch to c or .
3T Parking lamps, license plate and
With the engine running: depending on the
instrument cluster lighting
ambient light, the daytime running lamps or
4c Automatic headlamp mode/daytime the low-beam headlamps are switched on.
running lamps
When the low-beam headlamps are
5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
switched on, the L indicator lamp in the
BR Rear fog lamp instrument cluster lights up.
CN Front fog lamps7 When the engine is running and the vehicle is
The turn signals, high-beam headlamps and stationary: if you move the selector lever from
the high-beam flasher are operated using the a drive position to P (vehicles with automatic
combination switch (Y page 109). transmission) or if the parking brake is
applied, the low-beam headlamps go out after
! Switch off the parking lamps and standing
three minutes.
lamps when you leave the vehicle. This
prevents the battery from discharging. When the engine is running, the vehicle is
stationary and in high ambient light
The exterior lighting (except the parking/ brightness: if you turn the light switch
standing lamps) switches off automatically if to T, the daytime running lamps and the
you: parking lamps are switched on.
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock If the engine is running and you turn the light
Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey switch to L, the manual settings take
in position 0 precedence over the daytime running lamps.
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the Daytime running lamps in the USA
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
This function is only available on vehicles with
daytime running lamps.
In the USA, the daytime running lamps are
deactivated upon delivery from the factory.
X To activate the daytime running lamps
(vehicles with a luxury multifunction
7 Only vehicles with front fog lamps have the fog lamps function.
steering wheel): you can activate the The automatic headlamp feature is only an
daytime running lamps function using the aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's
on-board computer (Y page 207). lighting at all times.
With the engine running: depending on the Front fog lamps
ambient light, the daytime running lamps or
the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Only vehicles with front fog lamps have the
fog lamps function.
When the low-beam headlamps are
switched on, the L indicator lamp in the G WARNING
instrument cluster lights up. If you suspect that driving conditions will be
It is only possible to activate the high-beam foggy, turn the light switch to L before you
headlamps if the brightness of the ambient start your journey. Otherwise, your vehicle
light is at a low level. may not be visible and you could endanger
However, the high-beam flasher can always yourself and others.

be used.
X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn
If the engine is running and you turn the light the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position
switch to T or L, the manual settings 2 or start the engine.
take precedence over the daytime running
X Turn the light switch to L or c or
lamps.
.
X Press the N button.
Automatic headlamp mode
The green N indicator lamp in the
X To switch on automatic headlamp instrument cluster lights up.
mode: turn the light switch to c or X To switch off the front fog lamps: press
. the N button.
SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: The green N indicator lamp in the
the parking lamps are switched on or off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
Rear fog lamp
With the engine running: depending on the
brightness of the ambient light, the daytime X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
running lamps8 or the low-beam headlamps SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2
are switched on or off automatically. or start the engine.
When the low-beam headlamps are X Turn the light switch to L or c or
switched on, the L indicator lamp in the .
instrument cluster lights up. If the light switch is set to c or ,
the rear fog lamp only lights up if the low-
G WARNING beam headlamps are on.
If the light switch is set to c or , the
low-beam headlamps will not come on
automatically if it is foggy. This could
endanger you and others. Therefore, turn the
light switch to L in fog.
8 Only if daytime running lamps have been activated via the on-board computer.
X Press the R button. High-beam headlamps

The yellow R indicator lamp in the X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:
instrument cluster lights up. turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the position 2 or start the engine.
R button. X Turn the light switch to L or c or
The yellow R indicator lamp in the
.
X Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of
Headlamp cleaning system arrow :.
The headlamps are cleaned automatically if In the c or position, the high-
the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is beam headlamps are only switched on
operated ten times while the lights are on and when it is dark and the engine is running.

the engine is running (Y page 116). The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on.
Combination switch X To switch off the high-beam
Turn signals headlamps: move the combination switch

back to its normal position.
The K indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
High-beam flasher
X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the
ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the
engine.
X Pull the combination switch in the direction
of arrow =.
: High-beam headlamps
; Right turn signal
Hazard warning lamps
= High-beam flasher
? Left turn signal
X To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction
of arrow ; or ?.
Z
The hazard warning lamps automatically Cornering light function

switch on if:
Ran air bag is deployed.
Rthe vehicle is slowed down severely from a
speed of over 45 mph (70 km/h) and
comes to a halt.
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on
a turn signal using the combination switch,
only the turn signal lamp on the
corresponding side of the vehicle will flash.
The cornering light function improves the
X To switch off the hazard warning

illumination of the road over a wide angle in
lamps: press button :.
the direction you are turning, enabling better
The hazard warning lamps are deactivated visibility in tight bends, for example. It can
automatically if the vehicle returns to a speed only be activated when the low-beam
of over 6 mph (10 km/h) after a full headlamps are switched on.
application of the brakes. Active:
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if Rif you are driving at speeds below
the ignition is switched off. 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn
signals or turn the steering wheel.
Rif you are driving at speeds between
Active light function 25 mph (40 km/h) and
45 mph (70 km/h) or turn the steering
wheel.
Not active: if you are driving at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn
signal or turn the steering wheel to the
straight-ahead position.
The cornering light function may remain lit for
a short time, but is automatically switched off
after no more than three minutes.
The active light function is a system that Adaptive Highbeam Assist

moves the headlamps according to the
steering movements of the front wheels. In You can use this function to set the
this way, relevant areas remain illuminated headlamps to change between low beam and
while driving. This allows you to recognize high beam automatically. The system
pedestrians, cyclists and animals. recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either
approaching from the opposite direction or
Active: when the lights are switched on.
traveling in front of your vehicle, and
consequently switches the headlamps from
high beam to low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low- When you drive slower than approximately
beam headlamp range depending on the 30 mph (45 km/h) or if other road users
distance to the other vehicle. Once the are identified or if the roads are sufficiently
system no longer detects any other vehicles, illuminated:
it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. the high-beam headlamps are switched off
The system's optical sensor is located behind automatically. The K indicator lamp in
the windshield near the overhead control the instrument cluster goes out. The _
panel. indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
stays on.
X To deactivate: move the combination
switch back to its normal position.
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.

G WARNING
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid
intended to support you while driving. The
driver is and remains responsible for proper
vehicle lighting in accordance with the
prevailing light, sight and traffic conditions.
The system may be impaired or unavailable
when
Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog,
or heavy spray
X To activate: activate the Adaptive Rthe optical sensor area of the windshield is
Highbeam Assist function using the on-
dirty, fogged up, or covered by a sticker for
board computer (Y page 207).
example
The system cannot recognize the following
X Press the combination switch beyond the road users:
pressure point in the direction of arrow :
RRoad users without a lighting system of
(Y page 109).
their own, e.g. pedestrians
If it is dark and the light sensor activates
RRoad users with dim lighting of their own,
the low-beam headlamps, the _
indicator lamp in the instrument cluster e.g. cyclists
lights up. RRoad users whose lighting is obstructed,
If you drive faster than approximately e.g. road users behind a guardrail
28 mph (45 km/h): RIn some seldom cases, even road users with
the headlamp range is set automatically a lighting system of their own may be
depending on the distance between the recognized too late or not at all.
vehicle and other road users. The automatic high-beam headlamps will then
If you drive faster than approximately not be deactivated or it will be activated in
35 mph (55 km/h) and no other road users spite of preceding or oncoming road users.
are identified: This could endanger you and/or others and
the high-beam headlamps are switched on cause an accident. Always pay close attention
automatically. The K indicator lamp in to the traffic situation and switch off the high
beam manually if necessary.
the instrument cluster also lights up.
Z
112 Interior lighting
Headlamps fogged up on the inside

The headlamps may fog up on the inside if
there is high atmospheric humidity.
X Drive with the headlamps switched on.
The level of moisture diminishes,
depending on the length of the journey and
the weather conditions (humidity and
temperature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:
X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified Rear-compartment overhead control panel
specialist workshop. : p Switches the right-hand reading
lamp on/off
; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

Interior lighting on/off
Overview of interior lighting
Interior lighting control
Important notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
except for when the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock.
Automatic interior lighting control

Front overhead control panel X To switch on/off: press the | button.
: u Switches the rear interior lighting When the automatic interior lighting
on/off control is activated, the button is flush with
; | Switches the automatic interior the overhead control panel.
lighting control on/off The interior lighting automatically switches
= p Switches the right-hand front on if you:
reading lamp on/off Runlock the vehicle
? c Switches the front interior lighting
Ropen a door
on/off
Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
A p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off The interior light is activated for a short while
when the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock. You can activate this delayed
switch-off using the on-board computer
(Y page 208).
Replacing bulbs 113
Manual interior lighting control Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an

X To switch the front interior lighting on/ authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this
off: press the c button. purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety
or on safety-related systems must be carried
X To switch the rear interior lighting on/
out at a qualified specialist workshop.
off: press the u button.
X To switch the reading lamps on/off: Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
press the p button. vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
that these function correctly at all times.
Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Crash-responsive emergency lighting
Other bulbs
The interior lighting is activated automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident. There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs

X To switch off the crash-responsive that you cannot replace. Replace only the
emergency lighting: press the hazard bulbs listed (Y page 114). Have the bulbs that
warning lamp button. you cannot replace yourself changed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
or
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an
X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this
SmartKey.
purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety
Replacing bulbs
If you require assistance changing bulbs,
Important safety notes consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with
Xenon bulbs your bare hands. Even minor contamination
If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs, can burn into the glass surface and reduce
you can recognize this by the following: the the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-
cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb
from the top to the bottom and back again when installing.
when you start the engine. For this to be Only use bulbs of the correct type.
observed, the lights must be switched on If the new bulb still does not light up, consult
before starting the engine. a qualified specialist workshop.
G DANGER Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of
Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You could vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure
get an electric shock and be seriously or even that these function correctly at all times.
fatally injured if you touch the electric Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
contacts on Xenon bulbs. Therefore, never G WARNING
remove the cover from Xenon bulbs.
Bulbs and lamps can be very hot. You should
Do not change Xenon bulbs yourself, but have therefore allow them to cool down before you
them replaced at a qualified specialist change them. Otherwise, you could be burned
workshop which has the necessary specialist if you touch them.
knowledge and tools to carry out the work
Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.
required.
Otherwise, they could damage the bulbs, for
example, and injure themselves.
Z
114 Replacing bulbs
Never use a bulb which has been dropped.

Such a bulb may break or even explode and
injure you.
Halogen bulbs are pressurized and can
explode when you change them, particularly
if they are very hot. You should therefore wear
eye protection and gloves when you are
changing them.
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types Tail lamp

You can change the following bulbs. The bulb : Backup lamp: P 21 W
type can be found in the legend. ; Brake lamp: P 21 W

= Brake lamp/tail lamp: P 21 W
Changing the front bulbs

Low-beam headlamps (halogen
headlamps)
Halogen headlamps
: Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W
; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
= Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W
X Switch off the lights.

X Open the hood.
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
and pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
Bi-Xenon headlamps X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
Replacing bulbs 115
High-beam headlamps (halogen X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.

headlamps) X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X Insert bulb holder ;.
Cornering light function (Bi-Xenon

headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.
X Open the hood.
and pull it out.
X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Switch off the lights.
X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Open the hood.
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise
it clockwise. and pull it out.
X Align housing cover : and turn it X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
clockwise until it engages. pull it out.
X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
Parking lamps/standing lamps X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
(halogen headlamps)
X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn
it clockwise.
Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trim
panels
You must open the side trim panel in the trunk
X Switch off the lights. and remove the first-aid kit before you can
X Open the hood.
change the bulbs in the tail lamps.
and pull it out.
X Pull out bulb holder ;.
Z
116 Windshield wipers
X Remove the tail lamp connector

X Simultaneously press retaining lugs : in
the direction of the arrow and slightly pull
out the bulb holder with the bulbs.
X Remove the connector for LED light
functions from the top of the bulb holder.
X Pull the bulb holder out with the bulbs.
Left-hand side trim panel

: Backup lamp
; Brake lamp
= Parking lamp/brake lamp
Right-hand side trim panel X Press the respective bulb :, ; or = back
X To open: turn rotary catch :90 in the and turn it counter-clockwise to remove it
direction of the arrow and remove side trim from the bulb holder.
panel ;. X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and
X To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn

turn it clockwise.
X Reinsert the connector for LED light
release knob : 90 in the opposite
direction to the arrow. functions in the bulb holder.
X Insert the bulb holder again and lock it in
place.
Tail lamp
X Insert the tail lamp connector.
X Switch off the lights. X Close the side trim panel (Y page 115).
X Open the trunk.
X Open the side trim panel (Y page 115).
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers on/
off
G WARNING
Wiper blades are components that are subject
to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades
twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall.
Otherwise the windshield will not be wiped
properly. As a result, you may not be able to
Windshield wipers 117
observe surrounding traffic conditions and inadvertently. This could then damage the
could cause an accident. windshield wiper blades or scratch the
windshield.
! Do not operate the windshield wipers For this reason, you should always switch
when the windshield is dry, as this could off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust
In the or position, the appropriate
that has collected on the windshield can
wiping frequency is set automatically
scratch the glass if wiping takes place when
according to the intensity of the rain. In
the windshield is dry.
the position, the rain sensor is more
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on sensitive than in the position, causing
the windshield after the vehicle has been the windshield wipers to wipe more
washed in an automatic car wash, wax or frequently.
other residues may be the reason for this.

Clean the windshield using washer fluid
after washing the vehicle in an automatic Switching the rear window wiper on/
car wash. off
Combination switch Combination switch

1 $ Windshield wipers off : Switch
2 Intermittent wipe, low9 2 To wipe with washer fluid
3 Intermittent wipe, high10 3 I To switch on intermittent wiping
4 Continuous wipe, slow 4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping
5 Continuous wipe, fast 5 To wipe with washer fluid
B Single wipe/ To wipe the X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
windshield using washer fluid ignition lock.
X Switch on the ignition. X Turn switch : on the combination switch
X Turn the combination switch to the to the corresponding position.
corresponding position. When the rear window wiper is switched on,
the icon appears in the instrument cluster.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due
to optical influences and the windshield
becoming dirty in dry weather conditions,
the windshield wipers may be activated
9 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity.

10 Rain sensor set to high sensitivity.
Z
118 Windshield wipers
Replacing the wiper blades

G WARNING
For safety reasons, switch off the windshield
wipers and remove the key from the ignition
lock before changing the wiper blades
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: make sure that
the on-board electronics are in state 0).
Otherwise, the wiper motor could be switched
on suddenly and cause injury. X Remove the wiper blade from the retaining
pin on the wiper arm in the direction of the
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,
arrow.
make sure that you touch only the wiper
arm of the wiper. Installing the wiper blades
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper X Push the new wiper blade onto the
arm has been folded away from the retaining pin on the wiper arm in the
windshield. opposite direction to the arrow.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without Make sure that the wiper blade slides fully
a wiper blade back onto the windshield. onto the retaining pin on the wiper arm.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiper
you change the wiper blade. If you release arm.
the windshield wiper arm without a wiper X Fold the wiper arm back onto the
blade and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield.
windshield may be damaged by the force of
the impact. Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades replaced by a qualified Removing the wiper blade
specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized
Replacing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper blades
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).
X Fold the wiper arm away from the
windshield until it engages.
X Set the wiper blade at right angles to the
wiper arm. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
lock.
X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear
window until it engages.
X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to
wiper arm :.
Windshield wipers 119
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper The spray nozzles are misaligned
blade ; in the direction of the arrow until The windshield washer fluid from the spray
it releases. nozzles no longer hits the center of the
X Remove wiper blade ;. windshield. The spray nozzles are misaligned.
X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a
Installing the wiper blade
X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper
arm :.
X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper
blade ; in the opposite direction to the
arrow until it engages.
X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated

correctly.
X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper
arm :.
X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear
window.
Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers are obstructed
Leaves or snow, for example, may be
obstructing the windshield wiper movement.
The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X For safety reasons, you should remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or
X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers are inoperative

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X Select another wiper speed on the
combination switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at a
Z
120
121

Overview of climate control sys-
tems ................................................... 122
Operating the climate control sys-
tem ..................................................... 126
Setting the air vents ......................... 131
Climate control
122 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information sunroof/panorama roof with power tilt/

sliding panel closed.
i This Operator's Manual describes all i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period
models and all standard and optional during warm weather, e.g. using the
equipment of your vehicle available at the convenience opening feature (Y page 84).
time of publication of the Operator's This will speed up the cooling process and
Manual. Country-specific differences are the desired vehicle interior temperature
possible. Please note that your vehicle may will be reached more quickly.
described. This also applies to safety- i The integrated filter can filter out most
related systems and functions. particles of dust and completely filters out
pollen. A clogged filter reduces the amount
i Please read the information on qualified of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For
specialist workshops (Y page 24). this reason, you should always observe the
interval for replacing the filter, which is
specified in the Service Booklet. As it
Climate control
Overview of climate control systems depends on environmental conditions, e.g.

Important safety notes heavy air pollution, the interval may be
shorter than stated in the Service Booklet.
G WARNING i It is possible that the residual heat
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) function may be activated automatically an
may require replacement of the filter before hour after the SmartKey is removed. The
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged vehicle is then ventilated for 30 minutes to
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior dry the air-conditioning system.
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others.
Have a blocked filter replaced at a Mercedes-
Benz Center as soon as possible.
G WARNING
Follow the recommended settings for heating
and cooling given on the following pages.
Otherwise, the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
The automatic climate control adjusts the

temperature and the humidity of the vehicle
interior and filters undesired substances from
the air.
The automatic climate control is only
operational when the engine is running.11
Optimum operation is only achieved if you
drive with the side windows and sliding
11 Automatic climate control: the residual heat function can only be activated/deactivated when the ignition
is switched off.
Overview of climate control systems 123
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
Canada only
: To set the temperature, left (Y page 128)
; To defrost the windshield (Y page 129)
= To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 129)
? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 126)
A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 130)
B To set the temperature, right (Y page 128)
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 130)
D To set the air distribution (Y page 128)
E To increase the airflow (Y page 129)
F To reduce the airflow (Y page 129)
G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 126)
H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 127)
Z
124
Climate control Overview of climate control systems
USA only
= To switch maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 130)
C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 130)
D To set the air distribution (Y page 128)
E To increase the airflow (Y page 129)
F To reduce the airflow (Y page 129)
G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 126)
H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 127)
Notes on using dual-zone automatic or when in a tunnel. The windows could

climate control otherwise fog up as, in air-recirculation
mode, no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle.
The following contains notes and RUse the ZONE function to adopt the
recommendations on optimum use of dual-
temperature settings on the driver's side
zone automatic climate control.
for the front-passenger side as well. The
RActivate climate control using the and
indicator lamp in the button goes out.
buttons. The indicator lamps in the
and buttons light up.
RSet the temperature to 72 (22 ).
ROnly use the "defrosting" function briefly
until the windshield is clear again.
ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly,
e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors
Overview of climate control systems 125
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
Climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
= To activate/deactivate the residual heat function (Y page 131)
C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 129)
D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 126)
E To set the air distribution (Y page 128)
F To increase the airflow (Y page 129)
G To reduce the airflow (Y page 129)
H To adjust the climate control settings (AIR FLOW) (Y page 127)
I To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 130)
J To set climate control to automatic (Y page 127)
Rear control panel

K To increase the airflow (Y page 129)
L To reduce the airflow (Y page 129)
M Display
N To reduce the temperature (Y page 128)
O To increase the temperature (Y page 128)
Z
126 Operating the climate control system
Notes on using 3-zone automatic windows could fog up, impairing visibility and
climate control endangering you and others.
The following contains instructions and i Switch on climate control primarily using
recommendations to enable you to get the the button (Y page 127).
most out of your automatic climate control.
RActivate climate control using the and
Activating/deactivating
buttons. The indicator lamps in the
and buttons light up. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
RIn automatic mode, you can also use the ignition lock.
button to set a climate mode X To switch on: press the button.
(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The The indicator lamp in the button lights

MEDIUM level is recommended. up. Airflow and air distribution are set to
RSet the temperature to 72 (22 ). automatic mode.
ROnly use the "defrosting" function briefly or
X Press the ^ button.
Climate control
until the windshield is clear again.

ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly, The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors out. The previously selected settings come
or when in a tunnel. The windows could into effect again.
otherwise fog up as, in air-recirculation X To switch off: press the ^ button.
mode, no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
RUse the ZONE function to adopt the up.
temperature settings on the driver's side
for the front-passenger side and the rear
compartment as well. The indicator lamp in Activating/deactivating the cooling
the button goes out. with air dehumidification function
RUse the residual heat function if you want
Important information
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior
when the ignition is switched off. The The cooling with air dehumidification function
"residual heat" function can only be is only available when the engine is running.
activated or deactivated with the ignition The air inside the vehicle is cooled and
switched off. dehumidified according to the temperature
selected.
Operating the climate control system G WARNING

If you switch off the cooling function, the
Activating/deactivating climate vehicle will not be cooled when weather
control conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
Important information visibility and endanger you and others.
G WARNING
Condensation may drip from the underside of
When the climate control system is
the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is
deactivated, the outside air supply and
normal and not a sign that there is a
circulation are also deactivated. Only choose
malfunction.
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
Operating the climate control system 127
i The cooling with air dehumidification X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
function uses refrigerant R134a. This ignition lock.
coolant does not contain X Set the desired temperature.
chlorofluorocarbons, and therefore does X To activate: press the button.
not damage the ozone layer. The indicator lamp in the button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow
Activating/deactivating are activated.
X To activate: press the button.
i 3-zone automatic climate control: when
The indicator lamp in the button lights
automatic mode is activated, you can
up. select a climate mode setting
X To switch off: press the button. (Y page 127).
The indicator lamp in the button goes
X To switch off: press the _ button.
out. The cooling with air dehumidification
function has a delayed switch-off feature. or
X Press the K or I button.
Climate control
Problems with the cooling with air The indicator lamp in the button goes
dehumidification function out. Automatic air distribution and airflow
are deactivated.
When you press the button, the
indicator lamp in the button flashes three
times or remains off. You can no longer switch Adjusting the climate mode settings
on the cooling with air dehumidification (AIR FLOW)
function.
This function is only available with 3-zone
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. automatic climate control.
The climate mode settings are especially
effective at high temperatures.
Setting climate control to automatic
You can select the following climate mode
G WARNING settings in automatic mode:
If you switch off the cooling function, the FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly
vehicle will not be cooled when weather cooler
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly
visibility and endanger you and others.
warmer and with less draft
In automatic mode, the set temperature is X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
maintained automatically at a constant level. ignition lock.
The system automatically regulates the X Press the button.
temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow
X Press the button repeatedly until the
and the air distribution.
desired climate mode appears in the
Automatic mode will achieve optimal
display.
operation if cooling with air dehumidification
is also activated. If desired, cooling with air
dehumidification can be deactivated.
Z
Setting the temperature X Turn control : clockwise or counter-

clockwise (Y page 125).
Dual-zone automatic climate control Only change the temperature setting in
Different temperatures can be set for the small increments. Start at 72 (22 ).
driver's and front-passenger sides. X To increase/reduce the temperature in
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the the rear compartment using the rear
ignition lock. control panel: press the r or s
X To increase/reduce: turn controls : and
button on the rear control panel.
B clockwise or counter-clockwise Only change the temperature setting in
(Y page 123). small increments. Start at 72 (22 ).
Only change the temperature setting in i If you leave the vehicle parked for longer
small increments. Start at 72 (22 ). than 30 minutes, the temperature setting
for the rear compartment then switches
3-zone automatic climate control back to 22 .
Climate control
Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings
P Directs air through the center and side
air vents
O Directs the airflow through the
footwell air vents
S Directs air through the center, side and
footwell vents
Automatic climate control climate zones Directs air through the defroster vents
You can select different temperature settings b Directs the airflow through the
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as defroster, center and side air vents12
well as for the rear compartment. a Directs air through the defroster and
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the footwell vents
ignition lock. _ Directs the airflow through the
X To increase/reduce the temperature in defroster, center and side air vents as
the front: turn controls : and B well as the footwell air vents12
clockwise or counter-clockwise
(Y page 125). i Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side
Only change the temperature setting in
air vents.. The side air vents can only be
small increments. Start at 72 (22 ).
closed when the controls on the side air
X To increase/reduce the temperature in
vents are turned downwards.
the rear compartment using the front
control panel: press the button.
out.
12 Canada only.
Operating the climate control system 129
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the 3-zone automatic climate control: the
ignition lock. temperature setting for the driver's side is
X Press the _ button repeatedly until the adopted for the front-passenger side and
desired symbol appears in the display. the rear compartment.
out. Automatic control is deactivated and
the air distribution is controlled according Defrosting the windshield
to the selected setting. You can use this function to defrost the
windshield or to defrost the inside of the
windshield and the side windows.
Setting the airflow
i You should only select the defrosting
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the function until the windshield is clear again.
ignition lock.
X To increase/reduce: press the K or
ignition lock.
I button.
Climate control
i You can use automatic climate control to The indicator lamp in the button lights
set the airflow in the rear compartment up.
separately.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
Switching the ZONE function on/off Rcooling with air dehumidification on
Rhigh airflow13
Canada. Rhigh temperature13
X To switch on: press the button. Rair distribution to the windshield and
The indicator lamp in the button lights front side windows

up. Rair-recirculation mode off
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the X To switch off: press the button.
temperature setting for the driver's side is The indicator lamp in the button goes
not adopted for the front-passenger side. out. The previously selected settings come
3-zone automatic climate control: the into effect again. The cooling with air
temperature setting for the driver's side is dehumidification function remains on. Air-
not adopted for the front-passenger side recirculation mode remains deactivated.
and the rear compartment. or
When the buttons for temperature, airflow or X Press the button.
air distribution are activated, the temperature The indicator lamp in the button goes
setting for the driver's side is not adopted for out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
the other climate control zones. automatic mode.
X To switch off: press the button. or
The indicator lamp in the button goes X Turn temperature control : or B
out. clockwise or counter-clockwise
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the (Y page 123), (Y page 125).
temperature setting for the driver's side is
adopted for the front-passenger side.
13 Depending on the outside temperature.
Z
or Rear window defroster

X Press the K or I button.
Activating/deactivating
G WARNING
MAX COOL maximum cooling Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
The MAX COOL function is only available in removed from the rear window before driving.
vehicles for the USA. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
MAX COOL is only operational when the endangering you and others.
engine is running.
The rear window defroster has a high current
When you activate MAX COOL, climate draw. You should therefore switch it off as
control switches to the following functions: soon as the window is clear as it only switches
Rmaximum cooling off automatically after several minutes.
Rmaximum airflow If the battery voltage is too low, the rear
Rair-recirculation mode on window defroster may switch off.
Climate control
X To activate: press the button. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
The indicator lamp in the button lights up. ignition lock.

X To deactivate: press the button X Press the button.
again. The indicator lamp in the button lights

The indicator lamp goes out. The previously up or goes out.
selected settings come into effect again.
Problems with the rear window
defroster
Defrosting the windows The rear window defroster has deactivated
Windows fogged up on the inside itself prematurely or cannot be activated.
X Switch off any consumers that are not
X Activate the cooling with air
required, e.g. reading lamps or interior
dehumidification function .
lighting.
X Activate automatic mode . When the battery is sufficiently charged,
X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the rear window defroster is activated
the defrosting function (Y page 129). again automatically.
i You should only select this setting until
the windshield is clear again.
Activating/deactivating air-
recirculation mode
Windows fogged up on the outside
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
X Switch on the windshield wipers. unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle
X Press the _ button repeatedly until the from outside. The air already inside the
O or P symbol appears in the vehicle will then be recirculated.
display. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the
i You should only select this setting until same for all control panels.
the windshield is clear again.
G WARNING
Fogged windows impair visibility,
endangering you and others. If the windows
Setting the air vents 131
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the It is possible to make use of the residual heat
air recirculation mode immediately should of the engine to continue heating the
clear interior window fogging. If interior stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after
window fogging persists, make sure the air the engine has been switched off. The heating
conditioning is activated, or press the time depends on the temperature that has
button. been set.
i The blower will run at a low speed
regardless of the airflow setting.
ignition lock.
X To activate: press the g button. i If you activate the residual heat function
The indicator lamp in the g button lights at high temperatures, only the ventilation
up. will be activated. The blower runs at
medium speed.
i In the event of high pollution levels14 or at X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
high outside temperatures, air- ignition lock or remove it.
recirculation mode is automatically
Climate control
activated. When air-recirculation mode is
The indicator lamp in the button lights
activated automatically, the indicator lamp
in the g button is not lit. up.
Outside air is added after about 30 X To switch off: press the button.
minutes. The indicator lamp in the button goes
X
out.
To switch off: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button goes i Residual heat is deactivated
out. automatically:
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates Rafter about 30 minutes
automatically: Rwhen the ignition is switched on
Rafter approximately five minutes if Rif the battery voltage drops
outside temperatures are less than about Rif the coolant temperature is too low
41 (5 )
Rafter approximately five minutes if
cooling with air dehumidification is Setting the air vents
deactivated
Rafter approximately 30 minutes if outside
temperatures are over about G WARNING
41 (5 ) When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
Activating/deactivating the residual cold (depending on the set temperature). This
heat function could cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
The residual heat function is only available in skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
vehicles for Canada with automatic climate Always keep sufficient distance between
control. unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
14 Automatic climate control only.
Z
132 Setting the air vents
vehicle interior that are not in the immediate Setting the side air vents
area of unprotected skin.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air

through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield
and the hood free of blockages, such as ice,
snow or leaves.
Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grille
in the vehicle interior.
i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the
the sliders of the air vents to the center
position. left or right.
i Side window defroster vent : is never
Climate control
completely shut, even if side air vent ; is

Setting the center air vents
shut.
Setting the glove box air vent

When automatic climate control is activated,
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents. The level of airflow
depends on the airflow and air distribution
settings.
! Close the air vent when heating the
vehicle.
: Center air vent, left
At high outside temperatures, open the air
; Center air vent, right vent and activate the "cooling with air
= Center vent thumbwheel, right dehumidification" function. Otherwise,
? Center vent thumbwheel, left temperature-sensitive items stored in the
glove box could be damaged.
X To open/close: turn thumbwheels =
and ? up or down.
: Air vent thumbwheel

; Air vent
Setting the air vents 133
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel :

clockwise or counter-clockwise.
Setting the rear-compartment air

vents
Setting the center vents in the rear
compartment
Climate control
: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel
; Rear-compartment air vent, right
= Rear control panel for automatic climate
control15
? Rear-compartment air vent, left
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or
down.
15 Canada only.
Z
134
135

Breaking-in notes .............................. 136
Driving ............................................... 136
Automatic transmission ................... 142
Driving and parking

Refueling ............................................ 150
Parking ............................................... 153
Driving tips ........................................ 155
Driving systems ................................ 159
136 Driving
Useful information Additional breaking-in notes for AMG

vehicles:
i This Operator's Manual describes all Rdo not drive faster than 85 mph
models and all standard and optional (140 km/h) in the first 1000 miles
equipment of your vehicle available at the (1500 km).
Driving and parking
time of publication of the Operator's Ronly allow the engine to reach a maximum
Manual. Country-specific differences are engine speed of 4500 rpm briefly.
possible. Please note that your vehicle may Rchange gear in good time.
described. This also applies to safety- i You should also observe these notes on
related systems and functions. running in if the engine or parts of the drive
train on your vehicle have been replaced.
specialist workshops (Y page 24). i Always observe the respective speed
restrictions.
Breaking-in notes
AMG vehicles with rear axle locking
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) differential
The more you look after the engine when it is Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking
new, the more satisfied you will be with its differential on the rear axle. For better
performance in the future. protection of the differential on the rear axle,
RDrive at varying vehicle speeds and engine carry out an oil change after a breaking-in
speeds for the first 1000 miles (1500 km) phase of 2000 miles (3000 km). This oil
for this reason. change extends the service life of the
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle during this differential. Have the oil change carried out
period, e.g. driving at full throttle. at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-
RChange gear in good time, at the latest Benz recommends that you use an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.
when the tachometer needle is 2/3 of the
way to the red area in the tachometer
display. Driving
RIf possible, drive in drive program E (in AMG
vehicles in drive program C) for the first Important safety notes
1000 miles (1500 km).
G WARNING
RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to
Make sure absolutely no objects are
brake the vehicle.
obstructing the pedals' range of movement.
RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator
Keep the driver's footwell clear of all
pedal past the point of resistance obstacles. If there are any floormats or
(kickdown). carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when still have sufficient clearance.
driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain. During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase the objects could get caught between the
the engine speed gradually and bring the pedals. You could then no longer brake or
vehicle up to full speed. accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
Driving 137
G WARNING SmartKey positions

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
SmartKey
order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
control. Your vehicle's ABS will not prevent
Driving and parking

this type of loss of control.
G WARNING
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of parking position P or
neutral position N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
g To remove the SmartKey
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear Vehicles with automatic transmission:
when the engine is idling normally and when shift the transmission to position P
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. 1 Power supply for some consumers, such
as the windshield wipers
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
the engine's full performance until it has and drive position
reached operating temperature. 3 To start the engine
Only shift the automatic transmission to
If the SmartKey is in position 0 in the ignition
the desired drive position when the vehicle
lock for an extended period of time, it can no
is stationary.
longer be turned in the ignition lock. The
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive steering is then locked. To unlock, remove the
wheels when pulling away on slippery SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.
roads. You could otherwise damage the
The steering is locked when you remove the
drive train.
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil
i The SmartKey can be turned in the
temperatures (below 68 (+20 ), the
ignition lock even if it is not the correct
maximum engine speed is restricted in
SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not
order to protect the engine. To protect the
switched on. The engine cannot be started.
engine and maintain smooth engine
operation, avoid driving at full throttle when
the engine is cold. KEYLESS-GO
General information
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-
GO function and a detachable Start/Stop
button.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted into
the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in
the vehicle.
Z
138 Driving
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times

in succession corresponds to the different
SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. This
is only the case if you are not depressing the
brake pedal.
Driving and parking
If you depress the brake pedal and press the

Start/Stop button, the engine starts
immediately.
The Start/Stop button can be removed from
the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock. Start/Stop button
i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop = USA only
button from the ignition lock when you ? Canada only
leave the vehicle. However, you should
X Position 0: if Start/Stop button : has not
always take the SmartKey with you when
leaving the vehicle. The vehicle can be yet been pressed, this corresponds to the
started with the Start/Stop button if the SmartKey being removed from the ignition.
SmartKey is in the vehicle. X Position 1: press Start/Stop button :.
You can now activate the windshield
wipers, for example.
i If you then open the driver's door when in
this position, the power supply is
deactivated.
X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop
button : twice.
i If you press Start/Stop button : once
when in this position and the driver's door
: Start/Stop button is open, the power supply is deactivated
; Ignition lock again.
X
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
lock ;. up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after
i When you insert Start/Stop button : the engine is started or if it lights up while the
vehicle is in motion, see (Y page 241).
into ignition lock ;, the system requires a
detection time of approximately two
seconds before you can use Start/Stop
Starting the engine
button :.
G WARNING
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
Driving 139
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such i The Start/Stop button can be used to
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. start the vehicle without inserting the
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/
entering the vehicle while driving, have the Stop button must be inserted into the
cause determined and corrected ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in
Driving and parking

immediately. If you must drive under these the vehicle.
conditions, drive only with at least one X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
window fully open at all times. depressed.
X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 137)
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal
once.
when starting the engine.
The engine starts.
i The catalytic converter preheats for up to
30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of
the engine may change during this time. Pulling away
Automatic transmission Automatic transmission

X Shift the transmission to position P. G WARNING
The transmission position display in the It is dangerous to shift the automatic
multifunction display shows P. transmission out of parking position P or
i You can also start the engine when the
transmission is in position N.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey could lose control of the vehicle and hit
i To start the engine using the SmartKey someone or something. Only shift into gear
instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/ when the engine is idling normally and when
Stop button out of the ignition lock. your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the i It is only possible to shift the transmission
ignition lock (Y page 137) and release it as from position P to the desired position if
soon as the engine is running. you depress the brake pedal. Only then is
the selector lever lock released.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
G WARNING depressed.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the
vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave X Release the parking brake (Y page 154).
children unattended in the vehicle, as they X Release the brake pedal.
could otherwise accidentally start the engine. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do ! If a warning tone sounds and the
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, Release Park. Brake message appears
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A in the multifunction display, the parking
child's unsupervised access to a vehicle could brake is still applied. Release the parking
result in an accident and/or serious personal brake.
injury.
Z
140 Driving
i The vehicle locks centrally once you have

pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors
drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at
any time.
Driving and parking
You can also deactivate the automatic

locking feature (Y page 208).
i Upshifts take place at higher engine
speeds after a cold start. This helps the
catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature more quickly.
Hill start assist

Hill start assist helps you when pulling away
forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.
It holds the vehicle for a short time after you
have removed your foot from the brake pedal.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal
and depress it before the vehicle begins to
roll.
G WARNING
Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill
start assist. After approximately one second,
hill start assist will no longer brake your
vehicle and it could roll away.
XTake your foot off the brake pedal.

i Once you have taken your foot off the
brake pedal, the vehicle is held for around
one second.
X Pull away.
Hill start assist will not function if:
Ryou are pulling away on a level road or a
downhill gradient.
Rthe transmission is in position N.
Rthe parking brake is applied.
RESP is malfunctioning.
Driving 141
Problems with the engine

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
start. The starter motor
Driving and parking

RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
can be heard. X Before attempting to start the engine again, turn the SmartKey
in the ignition back to position 0 or press the Start/Stop button
repeatedly until all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go
out.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 138). Avoid excessively
long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain
the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak
start. You cannot hear or discharged.
the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 301).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two
minutes.
X Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:

Z
142 Automatic transmission

The engine is not There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanical
running smoothly and component of the engine management system.
is misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Driving and parking
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist

workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter and damage it.
The coolant The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine
temperature gauge is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
shows a value above X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant
248 (120 ). to cool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 280). Observe the warning
notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Automatic transmission Selector lever

Important safety notes Overview of transmission positions
G WARNING
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of parking position P or
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Example: selector lever
P Park position with selector lever lock
G WARNING
R Reverse gear
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
N Neutral
only will shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N automatically. D Drive
Always shift the automatic transmission into
park position P before turning off the engine.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Automatic transmission 143
Transmission position and drive Transmission positions

program display
B Park position
Do not shift the transmission into
position P(Y page 153) unless the
Driving and parking

vehicle is stationary. The parking
lock should not be used as a brake
when parking. In addition to
engaging the parking lock, you
must always apply the parking
brake to secure the vehicle.
The SmartKey can only be removed
if the transmission is in position P.
: Transmission position display If the SmartKey is removed from
; Drive program display the ignition lock, the selector lever
is locked.
The current position of the selector lever is
shown by the indicators next to the selector If the vehicle electronics are
lever. malfunctioning, the selector lever
may be locked in position P. To
The indicators light up when the SmartKey is
release the selector lever lock, see
inserted into the ignition lock. The indicators
"Releasing the parking lock
go out when the SmartKey is removed from
manually" (Y page 149).
the ignition lock.
C Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
Z
A Neutral Kickdown
Do not shift the transmission to N Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.
while driving. The transmission X Vehicles for USA (except AMG
could otherwise be damaged. vehicles): fully depress the accelerator
No power is transmitted from the
Driving and parking
pedal.
engine to the drive wheels. The transmission shifts to a lower gear
Releasing the brakes will allow you depending on the engine speed.
to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to X Vehicles for Canada and AMG vehicles:
push it or tow it. depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
If ESP is deactivated or faulty: pressure point.
only shift the transmission to The transmission shifts to a lower gear
position N if the vehicle is in danger depending on the engine speed.
of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
! Rolling in neutral N can damage Working on the vehicle
the drive train. G WARNING
7 Drive When working on the vehicle, engage the
The automatic transmission parking brake and shift the automatic
changes gear automatically. All transmission into park position P. Otherwise
forward gears are available. the vehicle could roll away which could result
in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Changing gear
Program selector button
The automatic transmission shifts to the
individual gears automatically when it is in General information
transmission position D. This automatic
The program selector button allows you to
gearshifting behavior is determined by:
choose between different driving
Ra shift range restriction, if selected characteristics.
Rthe selected drive program (Y page 144)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe road speed
Driving tips
AMG vehicles
When shifting down, the double-clutch
function is active regardless of the currently
selected drive program. The double-clutch
Example: program selector button
function reduces load change reactions and
is conducive to a sporty driving style. The
sound generated by the double-clutch
function depends on the drive program
selected.
E Economy Comfortable, economical i For further information on the automatic

driving drive program, see (Y page 146).
Only change from automatic drive program C,
S Sport Sporty driving style
S or S+ to manual drive program M when the
M Manual Manual gearshifting vehicle is stationary.
Driving and parking

X Turn drive program selector : until the
i For further information on the automatic desired drive program appears in the
drive program, see (Y page 146). multifunction display in the speedometer.
The drive program indicator on drive
Only change from automatic drive program
program selector : lights up in red.
E or S to manual drive program M when the
vehicle is stationary. i The automatic transmission shifts to
X Press program selector button : automatic drive program C each time the
repeatedly until the letter for the desired engine is started.
gearshift program appears in the i RS cannot be selected during normal
multifunction display.
driving. For further information on RACE
i When the engine is started, the automatic START, see (Y page 174).
transmission always switches to automatic
drive program E (drive program C in AMG
vehicles). Steering wheel paddle shifters
AMG vehicles
: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter

; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter
Drive program selector with manual drive program In the automatic drive program, you can
restrict or derestrict the shift range by using
C Controlled Comfortable, economical
the steering wheel paddle shifters
Efficiency driving
(Y page 146).
S Sport Sporty driving style In the manual drive program, you can change
gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters
S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty driving
or the selector lever (Y page 147).
style
i You can only change gear with the
M Manual Manual gearshifting
steering wheel paddle shifters when the
RS RACE Optimal vehicle transmission is in position D.
START acceleration from a
standstill
Z
Automatic drive program Shift range

Drive program E (drive program C on AMG = You can use the engine's braking
vehicles) is characterized by the following: effect.
Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic
transmission settings 5 To use the braking effect of the
Driving and parking
Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from

engine on downhill gradients and
for driving:
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner Ron steep mountain roads
Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in Rin mountainous terrain
forward and reverse gears, unless the Rin arduous conditions
accelerator pedal is depressed fully
Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving
4 To use the braking effect of the
engine on extremely steep downhill
stability on slippery road surfaces, for
gradients and on long downhill
example
stretches
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being
driven at lower engine speeds and the Restricting the shift range
wheels being less likely to spin X Press the selector lever to the left towards
Drive program S (drive programs S and S+ on D.
AMG vehicles) is characterized by the or
following:
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
Rsporty engine and automatic transmission shifter.
settings The automatic transmission shifts down
Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear one gear and restricts the shift range to the
Rthe automatic transmission shifting up relevant gear.
later
i If the engine exceeds the maximum
Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher
engine speed when shifting down, the
as a result of the later automatic automatic transmission protects against
transmission shift points engine damage by not shifting down.
i If the maximum engine speed for the shift
Shift ranges range is reached and you continue to
accelerate, the automatic transmission
Introduction shifts up in order to prevent the engine
When the automatic transmission is in from overrevving, even if the shift range is
position D, it is possible to restrict or restricted.
derestrict the shift range (Y page 146).
The shift range selected is shown in the Derestricting the shift range
multifunction display. The automatic X Briefly press the selector lever to the right
transmission shifts only as far as the selected towards D+.
gear.
or
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The shift range is derestricted.
Clearing the shift range restriction X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program
selector (Y page 145) until M appears in the
X Press and hold the selector lever towards
D+ until D is shown once more in the
The indicator M on the drive program
selector lights up in red.
Driving and parking

or
X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel Upshifting
paddle shifter until D is shown again in the
multifunction display. i Vehicles with the dynamic handling
The automatic transmission shifts from the package: if the maximum engine speed for
current shift range directly to D. the shift range is reached and you continue
to accelerate, the automatic transmission
shifts up, except when manual drive
Selecting the ideal shift range program M is selected.
X Press the selector lever to the left towards X Briefly press the selector lever to the right
D and hold it in position. towards D+.
or or
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter and hold it in position. shifter (Y page 145).
The automatic transmission shifts to the The automatic transmission shifts up to the
gear which allows optimum acceleration next gear.
and deceleration. To do this, the automatic
transmission shifts down one or more Vehicles with AMG engines
gears. ! In manual drive program M, the automatic
transmission does not shift up
automatically even when the engine
Manual drive program limiting speed for the current gear is
reached. When the engine limiting speed is
Switching on the manual drive program reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent
The manual drive program is only available for the engine from overrevving. Always make
vehicles with the dynamic handling package sure that the engine speed does not reach
and for AMG vehicles. the red area of the tachometer. There is
Manual drive program M is different from otherwise a risk of engine damage.
drive program S (in AMG vehicles, drive Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
programs S and S+) with regard to an upshift indicator appears in the
spontaneity, responsiveness and multifunction display.
smoothness of gear changes.
Manual drive program M can be selected
using the drive program selector or the
program selector button. You can change
gears using the steering wheel paddle shifters
or the selector lever in manual drive program
M if the transmission is in position D.
X Press the program selector button : Gear indicator
(Y page 144) repeatedly until M appears in ; Upshift indicator
the multifunction display.
Z
Downshifting Switching off the manual drive program

X Briefly press the selector lever to the left X Vehicles with the dynamic handling
towards D. package: press the program selector
or button (Y page 144). M is no longer shown
in the multifunction display.
Driving and parking
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

X AMG vehicles: turn the drive program
shifter (Y page 145).
The automatic transmission shifts down to selector (Y page 145) until C, S or S+
the next gear. appears in the multifunction display.
i If you brake the vehicle or stop without

shifting down, the automatic transmission
will shift down to a gear that will allow the
vehicle to accelerate or pull away again.
i Vehicles with the dynamic handling
package: to avoid overrevving the engine
when downshifting, the automatic
transmission does not shift to a lower gear
if this would result in the maximum engine
speed being exceeded.
i For maximum acceleration, push the
selector lever to the left or pull and hold the
left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until
the transmission shifts to the optimal gear
for the current speed.
Kickdown
i Vehicles with an AMG engine: it is not
possible to use kickdown in manual drive
program M.
You can also use kickdown for maximum
acceleration in manual drive program M.
X Vehicles for USA: fully depress the
accelerator pedal.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on the engine speed.
X Vehicles for Canada: depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure
point.
The transmission shifts to a lower gear
depending on the engine speed.
i During kickdown, you cannot change gear
using the steering wheel paddle shifters or
the selector lever.
Problems with the transmission

The transmission has The transmission is losing oil.
problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
Driving and parking

workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode.

is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
The transmission no X Stop the vehicle.
longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P.
X Switch off the engine.
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.
X Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
immediately.
Releasing the parking lock manually X Apply the parking brake.

X Pry off selector lever gaiter : with a flat,
In the event of an electrical malfunction, it is
possible to release the selector lever lock blunt object, (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in
manually to move it out of position P, e.g. if cloth) from the right-hand edge, pulling it
you wish to tow the vehicle away. up and out.
X Press release buttons ; down and
simultaneously move the selector lever out
of position P.
The selector lever can now be moved freely
until it is returned to position P.
Transfer case
This section is only valid for vehicles with 4-
wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always
transmitted to both axles.
! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to
remove the selector lever gaiter from the
! Performance tests may only be carried
center console. This could damage the out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake
selector lever gaiter. system or transfer case could otherwise be
damaged. Contact a qualified specialist
workshop for a performance test.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
Z
150 Refueling
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for skin contact with ethanol. Extinguish any
this purpose. naked flames before refueling. Never allow
! If the parking brake is being tested on a sparks or smoking materials near ethanol.
brake dynamometer, the ignition must be
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
switched off (SmartKey or Start/Stop
Driving and parking
gasoline engine. Even small amounts of the

button in position 0 or 1), as ESP will
wrong fuel result in damage to the fuel
otherwise automatically intervene. The
system and engine.
brake system could otherwise be damaged.
! Do not switch on the ignition if you
accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Refueling Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines.
Notify a qualified specialist workshop and
Important safety notes have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
G WARNING completely.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
Gasoline
personal injury.
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking Fuel grade
materials near gasoline.
! You should only refuel with premium-
Turn off the engine before refueling. grade unleaded gasoline, as this avoids
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid damaging the catalytic converter.
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing Flexible fuel vehicles, identifiable from the
contact. label inside the fuel filler flap, can be
Direct skin contact with fuels and the refueled with E85. For further information
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to your on flexible fuel, see "Fuel".
health. If engine running problems are apparent,
have the cause checked immediately and
G WARNING repaired. Excess unburned fuel can
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create otherwise enter the catalytic converter,
pressure in the system which could cause a leading to overheating and possibly
gas discharge. This could cause the gasoline causing a fire.
to spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
injury. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection
system could be blocked by particles from
G WARNING the fuel can.
C 300 and C 300 Sport with automatic i Only refuel with premium-grade unleaded
transmission: gasoline with a specified minimum octane
Flexible fuel vehicle (with Ethanol up to number of 91 (average value of 96 RON/
E85! sticker on the fuel filler flap): 86 MON).
Ethanol fuel (E85) and its vapors are highly You will usually find information about the
flammable, poisonous and fast burning. fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find
Ethanol fuel can cause serious injury if ignited, the label on the pump, ask the staff for
or if you come into contact with it or inhale its assistance.
vapors. Avoid inhaling ethanol vapors. Avoid
Refueling 151
C 300 and C 300 Sport with automatic SmartKey. The drivers door can be closed
transmission: you can tell a flexible fuel again.
vehicle by the label inside the fuel filler flap. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
You can find more information under "Fuel" arrow :.
(Y page 347), or by contacting an The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
Driving and parking

authorized Mercedes-Benz Service Center X Open the fuel filler flap.
or visiting http://www.mbusa.com (USA X Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise
only).
and remove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder
Refueling bracket on the inside of filler flap ;.

X Completely insert the pump nozzle into the
Fuel filler flap filler neck and refuel.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
automatically when you open or close the switches off.
vehicle with the SmartKey or using KEYLESS-
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
GO.
fuel system.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
in the instrument cluster 8. The arrow
Closing
next to the filling pump indicates the side of
the vehicle. X Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it
clockwise. The fuel filler cap audibly
engages.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
i If you drive with the fuel filler cap open,

reserve fuel warning lamp 8 flashes. In
addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up. A message appears in
the multifunction display (Y page 228).
For further information on warning and
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
: To open the fuel filler flap see (Y page 246).
; To insert the fuel filler cap i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
= Tire pressure table vehicle. A locking pin otherwise prevents
? Fuel type the fuel filler flap from closing after the
vehicle has been locked.
Opening
X Switch off the engine. Fuel filler flap emergency release
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition G WARNING
lock.
Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as they
KEYLESS-GO: open the drivers door. This may contain sharp edges. Otherwise, you
switches the ignition to position 0, which could injure yourself while releasing the fuel
corresponds to having removed the filler flap.
Z
152 Refueling
The emergency release is located in the trunk

behind the side trim on the right-hand side,
when viewed in the direction of travel.
X Open the trunk lid.
X Open the right-hand side trim panel
Driving and parking
(Y page 306).
X Pull emergency release : in the direction

of the arrow.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
Parking 153
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Fuel is leaking from the G Risk of explosion or fire
vehicle.
Driving and parking

The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0(Y page 137) in the ignition lock
immediately and remove it.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
The fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
cannot be opened. or
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 73).
X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(Y page 151).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is

jammed.
Parking Rslowly release the brake pedal.

Rwhen parked on an incline, always turn the
front wheels towards the road curb.
G WARNING Rturn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to
Do not park this vehicle in areas where position 0 and remove the SmartKey from
combustible materials can come into contact the ignition lock, or press the KEYLESS-GO
with the hot exhaust system. Do not park the Start/Stop button.
vehicle on dry grassland or harvested grain Rtake the SmartKey with you and lock the
fields. Combustible materials, such as grass, vehicle when leaving.
hay or leaves could be ignited by the hot
exhaust system and cause a vehicle fire.
Unintended vehicle movement can cause Switching off the engine
serious personal injury or damage to the
vehicle or the vehicle drivetrain. To reduce Important safety notes
such risks, always do the following before
G WARNING
turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle:
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
Rkeep your right foot on the brake pedal. has come to a complete stop. With the engine
Rengage the parking brake. not running, there is no power assistance for
Rshift the automatic transmission to park the brake and steering systems. In this case,
position P. it is important to keep in mind that a
Z
154 Parking
considerably higher degree of effort is release the parking brake and/or shift the
necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. automatic transmission out of park position
P, either of which could result in an accident
Vehicles with automatic transmission and/or serious personal injury.
Driving and parking
X Apply the parking brake firmly.

X Shift the transmission to position P.
Using the SmartKey

ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
i The SmartKey can only be removed if the
transmission is in position P.
Using KEYLESS-GO
X To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.
X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 137). When the engine is running, the $ (USA
The engine stops and all the indicator only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
lights up in the instrument cluster.
i When the driver's door is closed, this X To release: depress the brake pedal and
corresponds to SmartKey position 1. When keep it depressed.
the driver's door is open, it corresponds to
X Pull release handle :.
SmartKey position 0 or "SmartKey
removed". When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the $ (USA only) or
If you attempt to switch off the engine while
J (Canada only) indicator lamp goes out
the selector lever is in a position other than
P, a message appears in the multifunction in the instrument cluster.
display and you hear a tone.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
Parking brake If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
G WARNING
exhaustive discharge.
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
X Connect a trickle charger.
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock
up. You could lose control of the vehicle and i You can obtain information about trickle
cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle's chargers from a qualified specialist
brake lights do not light up when the parking workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-
brake is engaged. Benz Center.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
G WARNING six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the a result of lack of use.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave seek advice.
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
Driving tips 155
Driving tips Fuel consumption also increases when

driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic
General driving tips and in mountainous terrain.
Drinking and driving
Driving and parking

G WARNING
G WARNING
Always remember that you must concentrate
primarily on driving the vehicle. The driver's Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
concentration must always be directed driving are very dangerous combinations.
primarily at road traffic. For your own safety Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
and that of others, we recommend that you affect your reflexes, perceptions and
stop the vehicle at a safe place and in judgment.
accordance with the traffic conditions before The possibility of a serious or even fatal
making or accepting a phone call. accident are greatly increased when you drink
Comply with all legal requirements if you use or take drugs and drive.
the telephone while driving. Use the hands- Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
free system and only use the telephone when anyone to drive who has been drinking or
road, weather and traffic conditions permit. In taking drugs.
some jurisdictions, it is forbidden for drivers
to use mobile phones while driving. Pedals
Only operate the audio system or COMAND
(Cockpit Management and Data System) in G WARNING
compliance with all legal requirements and Make sure absolutely no objects are
when the road, weather and traffic conditions obstructing the pedals' range of movement.
permit. You may otherwise not be able to Keep the driver's footwell clear of all
observe the traffic conditions, endangering obstacles. If there are any floormats or
yourself and others. carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
Remember that your vehicle covers a distance pedals still have sufficient clearance.
of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) a second During sudden driving or braking maneuvers,
when it is traveling at only 30 mph the objects could get caught between the
(approximately 50 km/h). pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
Drive sensibly save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel: Rolling with the engine switched off
X The tires should always be inflated to the
recommended tire pressure. G WARNING
X Remove unnecessary loads.
There is no power assistance for the steering
and the brake when the engine is not running.
X Remove roof racks when they are not
needed. Steering and braking requires significantly
more effort and you could lose control of the
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
vehicle and cause an accident as a result.
X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is
X Have all maintenance work carried out as in motion.
indicated by the service intervals in the
Service Booklet or by the service interval
display.
Z
156 Driving tips
Exhaust check Downhill gradients

G WARNING ! On long and steep gradients, you must
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your reduce the load on the brakes by shifting
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon early to a lower gear. This allows you to take
advantage of the engine braking effect and
Driving and parking
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause

unconsciousness and possible death. helps avoid overheating and excessive
wear of the brakes.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. When you take advantage of the engine
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn
entering the vehicle while driving, have the for some time, e.g. on a slippery road
cause determined and corrected surface. This could cause damage to the
immediately. If you must drive under these drive train. This type of damage is not
conditions, drive only with at least one covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.
window fully open at all times.
Heavy and light loads
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust G WARNING
fumes within legal limits. Depressing the brake pedal constantly results
These systems only work at peak efficiency in excessive and premature wear to the brake
when they are maintained exactly in pads.
accordance with the manufacturer's It may also cause the brakes to overheat,
specifications. For this reason, all work on the seriously impairing their effectiveness. It may
engine must be carried out only by qualified then not be possible to stop the vehicle in
and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians. sufficient time to avoid an accident.
The engine settings must not be changed in
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but
service work must be carried out at regular
drive on for a short while. This allows the
intervals and in accordance with the
airflow to cool the brakes more quickly.
Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details
can be found in the Service Booklet.
Wet roads
G WARNING
Brakes After driving in heavy rain for some time
Important safety notes without applying the brakes or through water
deep enough to wet brake components, the
G WARNING first braking action may be somewhat
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in reduced. You have to depress the brake pedal
order to obtain braking action. This could more firmly. Maintain a safe distance from
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle vehicles in front.
control. Your vehicle's ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control. After driving on a wet road or having the
vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying
G WARNING attention to the traffic conditions. This will
Make sure that you do not endanger other
warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them
road users when you apply the brakes.
more quickly and protecting them against
corrosion.
Driving tips 157
Limited braking performance on salt- G WARNING

treated roads If brake pads or brake fluid other than those
G WARNING recommended are used, the braking
properties of the vehicle can be degraded to
The layer of salt on the brake discs and the
an extent that safe braking is substantially
Driving and parking

brake pads/linings may cause a delay in the
impaired. This could result in an accident.
braking effect, resulting in a significantly
longer braking distance, which could lead to ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or
an accident. performance tests may only be carried out
To avoid this danger, you should: on a 2-axle dynamometer. If you are
Roccasionally brake carefully, without planning to have the vehicle tested on such
putting other road users at risk, when you a dynamometer, contact an authorized
are driving on salted roads. This helps to Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further
remove any salt that may have started to information first. Otherwise, you could
build up on the brake discs and the brake damage the drive train or the brake system.
pads/linings.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
system operates automatically, the engine
ahead and drive with particular care. and the ignition must be switched off
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition
trip and immediately after commencing a lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or
new trip, so that salt residues are removed 1) while the parking brake is being tested
from the brake discs. on a brake dynamometer.
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
Servicing the brakes by ESP may seriously damage the brake
! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in system.
the instrument cluster and you hear a ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP
warning tone while the engine is running, system operates automatically, the engine
the brake fluid level may be too low. and the ignition system must be switched
Observe additional warning messages in off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the
the multifunction display. ignition lock or Start/Stop button in
The brake fluid level may be too low due to position 0 or 1) when:
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. Rtesting the parking brake on a brake
Have the brake system checked dynamometer.
immediately. This work should be carried Ryou intend to have the vehicle towed with
out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz the front axle raised.
Center.
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
All checks and maintenance work on the by ESP may seriously damage the brake
brake system must be carried out at a system.
qualified specialist workshop. This work
should be carried out at an authorized If your brake system is subject only to
Mercedes-Benz Center. moderate loads, you should test the
functionality of your brakes at regular
Have the brake pads replaced and the brake
intervals by pressing firmly on the brake pedal
fluid renewed at a qualified specialist
at high speeds. This improves the grip of the
workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
brake pads.
Center.
Z
158 Driving tips
G WARNING information about this from your authorized

Make sure that you do not endanger other Mercedes-Benz Center.
You can find a description of Brake Assist Driving on wet roads

Driving and parking
(BAS) on (Y page 59) or of BAS PLUS on

Hydroplaning
(Y page 60).
If water has accumulated to a certain depth
High-performance brake system for on the road surface, there is a danger of
AMG vehicles hydroplaning occurring, even if:
Ryou drive at low speeds.
The high-performance brake system is
installed only on the C 63 AMG. Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or
G WARNING
in conditions in which hydroplaning can occur
New vehicle brake pads and discs, and you must drive in the following manner:
replacement brake pads and discs may take
Rreduce your speed
several hundred miles of driving until they
provide optimum braking efficiency. Until that Ravoidruts
time, you may need to use increased brake Rbrake carefully
pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware
of this and adjust your driving and braking Driving on flooded roads
accordingly during this break-in period.
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Excessive high-demand braking will cause
correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
Check the depth of any water before driving
attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
through it. Drive slowly through standing
instrument cluster and brake condition
water. Otherwise, water may enter the
messages in the multifunction display.
vehicle interior or the engine compartment.
Especially for high performance driving, it is
This can damage the electronic
important to maintain and have the brake
components in the engine or the automatic
system checked regularly.
transmission. Water can also be drawn in
by the engine's air suction nozzles and this
The high-performance brake system is can cause engine damage.
designed for heavy loads. This may lead to
noise when braking. This will depend on:
Winter driving
Rspeed
Rbraking force General notes
Renvironmental conditions, such as
G WARNING
temperature and humidity
If the vehicle becomes trapped in snow,
The wear of individual components of the ensure that snow is kept away from the
brake system, such as the brake pads/linings exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle as
or brake discs, depends on the individual long as the engine is running. Otherwise,
driving style and operating conditions. poisonous carbon monoxide (CO) may enter
For this reason, it is impossible to state a the vehicle, resulting in loss of consciousness
mileage that will be valid under all and even death.
circumstances. An aggressive driving style
will lead to high wear. You can obtain further
Driving systems 159
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open Driving systems

a window slightly on the side of the vehicle
not facing the wind. Cruise control
At the onset of winter, have your vehicle
Driving and parking

winterproofed at a qualified specialist Cruise control maintains a constant road
workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes- speed for you. It brakes automatically in order
Benz Center. to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" steep downhill gradients, especially if the
section (Y page 312). vehicle is laden, you must select shift range
1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you will
Driving with summer tires make use of the braking effect of the engine,
which relieves the load on the brake system
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" and prevents the brakes from overheating
section (Y page 312). and wearing too quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic
Slippery road surfaces conditions make it appropriate to maintain a
steady speed for a prolonged period. You can
G WARNING
set any road speed above 20 mph
The outside temperature indicator is not
(30 km/h).
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. G WARNING
Indicated temperatures just above the The cruise control is a convenience system
freezing point do not guarantee that the road designed to assist the driver during vehicle
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, operation. The driver is and must always
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. remain responsible for the vehicle's speed
and for safe brake operation.
G WARNING Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in and weather conditions make it advisable to
order to obtain braking action. This could travel at a constant speed.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle RThe use of the cruise control can be
control. Your vehicle's ABS will not prevent dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
this type of loss of control. traffic because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road RThe use of the cruise control can be
surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise
changes in tire traction can result in wheel
control or DISTRONIC PLUS.
spin and loss of control.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be RDeactivate the cruise control when driving
stopped when moving at low speed: in fog.
X Shift the transmission to position N. The "Resume" function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
i For more information on driving with
previously set speed and wishes to resume
snow chains, see (Y page 313).
this particular preset speed.
G WARNING
Make sure that you do not endanger other
Z
160 Driving systems
G WARNING stored speed on downhill gradients by

The cruise control brakes automatically so automatically applying the brakes.
that the set speed is not exceeded.
Storing the current speed or calling up
the last stored speed
Cruise control lever
Driving and parking
G WARNING
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Possible
acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
to you and others.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?.
: To switch on or to increase the speed X Remove your foot from the accelerator
; To switch on or to reduce the speed pedal.
= To deactivate cruise control The first time cruise control is activated, it
? To switch on with the current speed or
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously
with the last stored speed
stored speed.
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display
Setting a speed
for five seconds. In the multifunction display,
the segments between the stored speed and G WARNING
the maximum speed light up. Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has made the necessary
Storing and maintaining the current adjustments.
speed Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
You can store the current speed if you are a value that the prevailing road conditions and
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
speed. of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
or serious injury to you and others.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever
up : or down ;. X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
X Remove your foot from the accelerator higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
pedal. X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle the desired speed is reached.
automatically maintains the stored speed.
X Release the cruise control lever.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintain The new speed is stored.
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
i Cruise control is not deactivated if you
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
depress the accelerator pedal. For
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
example, if you accelerate briefly to
Driving systems 161
overtake, cruise control adjusts the DISTRONIC PLUS

vehicle's speed to the last speed stored
after you have finished overtaking. Important safety notes
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and
Making adjustments in 1 mph (Canada: automatically helps you maintain the
Driving and parking

1 km/h) increments distance to the vehicle detected in front. It
X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the brakes automatically in order to avoid
pressure point, up : for a higher speed or exceeding the set speed.
down ; for a lower speed. On long and steep downhill gradients,
The last speed stored is increased or especially if the vehicle is laden, you must
reduced. select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By
doing so, you will make use of the braking
effect of the engine, which relieves the load
Making adjustments in 5 mph (Canada:
on the brake system and prevents the brakes
10 km/h) increments
from overheating and wearing too quickly.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front,
beyond the pressure point, up : for a DISTRONIC PLUS causes your vehicle to
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. brake and maintain the preset distance to the
The last speed stored is increased or vehicle in front.
reduced.
G WARNING
The DISTRONIC PLUS requires familiarity with
Deactivating cruise control its operational characteristics. We strongly
There are several ways to deactivate cruise recommend that you review the following
control: information carefully before operating the
system.
forwards =.
G WARNING
or The DISTRONIC PLUS is a convenience
X Brake. system. Its speed adjustment reduction
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: capability is intended to make cruise control
Ryou
more effective and usable when traffic speeds
depress the parking brake.
vary. It is not however, intended to, nor does
Ryou are driving below 20 mph (30 km/h). it, replace the need for extreme care.
RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP.
The responsibility for the vehicle's speed,
Ryou shift the transmission to position N distance to the preceding vehicle and, most
while driving. importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear stopping distance, always remains with the
a warning tone. You will see the Cruise driver.
Control Off message in the multifunction The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take street and
display for approximately five seconds. traffic conditions into account.
i The last speed stored is cleared when you Complex driving situations are not always
switch off the engine. fully recognized by the DISTRONIC PLUS. This
could result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Z
162 Driving systems
If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, G WARNING

the radar sensor system must be activated The DISTRONIC PLUS adaptive cruise control
(Y page 208) and operational. is not a substitute for active driving
If there is no vehicle driving in front of you, involvement. It does not react to pedestrians
DISTRONIC PLUS functions like cruise or on stationary objects, nor does it recognize
Driving and parking
control at a speed range between 20 mph or predict the curvature and lane layout or the
(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph movement of preceding vehicles. The
(Canada: 200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in DISTRONIC PLUS can only apply a maximum
front of you, it functions at a speed range of 40% of the vehicle's braking power.
between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph The DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow
(Canada: 200 km/h). vehicles possibly driving in front of you, such
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on as motorcycles and vehicles driving in an
roads with steep gradients. offset formation.
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, It is the driver's responsibility at all times to
it can resemble the radar detectors of the be attentive to the road, weather and traffic
responsible authorities. You can refer to the conditions. Additionally, the driver must
applicable section in the Operator's Manual if provide the steering, braking and other driving
there are any questions concerning this. inputs necessary to remain in control of the
i USA only: vehicle.
This device has been approved by the FCC High-frequency sources such as toll stations,
as a Vehicular Radar System. The radar speed measuring systems etc. can cause the
sensor is intended for use in an automotive DISTRONIC PLUS system to temporarily
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or cease functioning.
altering of the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the G WARNING
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and
any non-approved way. traffic conditions into account. Only use the
Any unauthorized modification to this DISTRONIC PLUS if the road, weather and
device could void the users authority to traffic conditions make it advisable to travel
operate the equipment. at a constant speed.
i Canada only: This device complies with G WARNING

RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is Use of the DISTRONIC PLUS can be
subject to the following two conditions: dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes
1. This device may not cause interference, in tire traction can result in wheel spin and
and loss of control.
2. this device must accept any interference The DISTRONIC PLUS does not function in
received, including interference that may adverse sight and distance conditions. Do not
cause undesired operation of the device. use the DISTRONIC PLUS during conditions of
Removal, tampering, or altering of the fog, heavy rain, snow or sleet.
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
device could void the users authority to
Driving systems 163
G WARNING Deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS:

The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take weather Rwhen changing to the right lane, if the
conditions into account. Switch off the vehicles in the left lane are driving slower
DISTRONIC PLUS or do not switch it on if: Rwhen driving into a filter lane or an
Rroads are slippery or covered with snow or expressway exit
Driving and parking

ice. The wheels could lose traction while Rin complex driving situations, for example
braking or accelerating, and the vehicle in construction sites on an expressway
could skid. In these situations DISTRONIC PLUS will
Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS system sensor covers maintain the set speed if it is not deactivated.
are dirty or visibility is diminished due to DISTRONIC PLUS is intended only for
snow, rain or fog, for example. The distance maintaining a set speed and a set distance
control system functionality could be from the objects moving in front of the
impaired. vehicle.
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
conditions even while the DISTRONIC PLUS is G WARNING
switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able An intermittent warning sounds and the
to recognize dangerous situations until it is distance warning lamp in the instrument
too late. This could cause an accident in which cluster is illuminated if the DISTRONIC PLUS
you and/or others could be injured. system calculates that the distance to the
vehicle ahead and your vehicle's current
G WARNING speed indicate that the DISTRONIC PLUS will
The "Resume" function should only be not be capable of slowing the vehicle
operated if the driver is fully aware of the sufficiently to maintain the preset following
previously set speed and wishes to resume distance, which creates a danger of a
this particular preset speed. collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
G WARNING your distance to the preceding vehicle. The
Your undivided attention to street and traffic warning sound is intended as a final caution
conditions is necessary at all times whether in which you should intercede with your own
DISTRONIC PLUS is active or not. braking inputs to avoid a potentially
The use of DISTRONIC PLUS can be dangerous situation. Do not wait for the
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic operation of the warning signal to intercede
because conditions do not allow safe driving with your own braking. This will result in
at a constant speed. potentially dangerous emergency braking
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to stationary which will not always result in an impact being
objects on the road (for example, a vehicle avoided.
stopped in traffic or an abandoned vehicle). Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
DISTRONIC PLUS likewise does not react to
oncoming vehicles. G WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with a
maximum deceleration of 13 ft/s2(4 m/s2).
This is equivalent to approximately 40 % of
your vehicle's maximum possible
deceleration.
Z
164 Driving systems
You need to brake yourself to prevent a motion by other means (e.g. in a car wash or
collision. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes the vehicle by towing).
to restore the set distance from the vehicle
ahead or the set speed. In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the
following conditions must be fulfilled:
Driving and parking
G WARNING Rthe engine must be started. It may take up

If you do not receive visual or acoustic to two minutes after pulling away before
warning signals during a critical traffic DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
situation, DISTRONIC PLUS has either not Rthe parking brake must not be applied.
recognized the collision risk, has been RESP must be activated but not
deactivated or is malfunctioning.
intervening.
Remember, whether or not DISTRONIC PLUS Rthe transmission must be in position D.
is operating, it is ultimately always the drivers
Rthe hood must be closed.
responsibility to apply the brakes in order to
control the vehicle and avoid a collision. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
fastened.
Cruise control lever
Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors
must be closed.
Rthe vehicle must not skid.
Activating while driving

When driving at speeds below 20 mph
(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC
PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected
and is shown in the multifunction display. If
the vehicle in front is no longer detected and
shown, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and
a warning tone sounds.
: To store the current speed or a higher
speed X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
; To store the current speed or a lower you ?, or briefly press up : or down ;.

speed DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
? To store the current speed or to call up

up : or down ; until the desired speed
the last stored speed is set.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
A To set the specified minimum distance
pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storing
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
the current speed and maintaining it
stored speed.
Important safety notes i If you do not fully release the accelerator
G WARNING pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override
The vehicle can be braked when DISTRONIC message is shown in the multifunction
PLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivate display. The set distance to a slower-
DISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set in moving vehicle in front will then not be
maintained. You will be driving at the speed
Driving systems 165
you determine by the position of the of your vehicle, but only up to the desired
accelerator pedal. speed you have stored.
Activating when driving towards a G WARNING
stationary vehicle If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.
Driving and parking

can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your DISTRONIC PLUS then no longer brakes your
vehicle is stationary as well. vehicle. In such cases, control the distance
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards from vehicles travelling in front with the brake
you ?, or briefly press up : or down ;. alone. You could otherwise cause an accident
and thereby injure yourself and others. The
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
driver remains fully responsible for the
i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at vehicle's distance from other vehicles, the
under 20 mph (30 km/h) if a vehicle in front speed being driven and for braking in good
has been detected. Therefore, the time.
DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the
instrument cluster should be activated Changing lanes
(Y page 204). If you wish to change to the passing lane (in
left-hand-drive vehicles, the passing lane is
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed
the left-hand lane), DISTRONIC PLUS
up : or down ; until the desired speed
supports you if:
is set.
Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph
i You can use the cruise control lever to set (60 km/h).
the stored speed and the control on the RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the
cruise control lever to set the specified distance to a vehicle in front.
minimum distance (Y page 168). Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signals.
Pulling away RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger

X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove of collision.
your foot from the brake pedal. If these conditions are met, your vehicle is
X
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
if changing lanes takes too long or if the
you ?.
distance between your vehicle and the
or vehicle in front becomes too small.
X Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its G WARNING
speed to that of the vehicle in front. DISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assist
are only aids designed to assist driving.
Driving They do not relieve you of the responsibility
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC of paying attention. The driver remains fully
PLUS operates in the same way as cruise responsible for the vehicle's distance from
control. other vehicles, the vehicle's speed and for
If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, braking in good time. Always pay attention to
DISTRONIC causes your vehicle to brake. This traffic conditions and your surroundings.
maintains the preset distance to the vehicle Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangers
in front. in time, cause an accident and injure yourself
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving and others.
vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed
Z
166 Driving systems
Vehicles with COMAND DISTRONIC PLUS must also never be

i The following function is not operational operated, activated or deactivated by a
in all countries. passenger or from outside the vehicle.
DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace the
from your navigation system so that it can parking brake and must not be used for
Driving and parking
react appropriately to certain traffic parking.

situations. This is the case if, while following The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect is
a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you: canceled and the vehicle can start moving if:
Rapproach or drive through a traffic circle RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using the
Rapproach a T intersection cruise control lever.
Rturn off at a freeway exit Ryou accelerate.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an
Even if the vehicle in front leaves the
detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS interruption in the power supply, e.g.
temporarily maintains the current driving battery failure.
speed and does not accelerate. This is based Rthe electrical system in the engine
on the current map data in the navigation compartment, the battery or the fuses are
system. tampered with.
Rthe battery is disconnected.
If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it,

deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle

in front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until
it is stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains
stationary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
Example: traffic circle
i Depending on the specified minimum
The current speed is maintained: distance, your vehicle will come to a
Rapproximately 10 seconds before the standstill at a sufficient distance behind the
traffic circle/T intersection and for vehicle in front. The specified minimum
approximately 1.5 seconds when driving on distance is set using the control on the
the traffic circle cruise control lever.
Rapproximately 12 seconds before reaching
You will see a warning message in the
a freeway exit and approximately multifunction display if DISTRONIC PLUS is
4 seconds after the freeway exit activated and:
Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
the set speed you specified. seat belt is unfastened.
Stopping Rthe engine is switched off.
G WARNING Rthe hood is opened.
Never get out of the vehicle when DISTRONIC Shift to 'P'

PLUS is activated.
Driving systems 167
X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the X Press the cruise control lever up : for a
vehicle from rolling away. higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until
warning message in the multifunction the desired speed is reached.
display disappears.
X Release the cruise control lever.
Driving and parking

The horn will also sound at regular intervals if The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you: is activated and adjusts the vehicle's speed
Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's to the new speed stored.
door and take off your seat belt
Ropen the hood Making adjustments in 1 mph (Canada:
The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact 1 km/h) increments
that the vehicle has been parked while X Briefly press the cruise control lever to the
DISTRONIC PLUS is still activated. The sound pressure point, up : for a higher speed or
becomes louder if you attempt to lock the down ; for a lower speed.
vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until The last speed stored is increased or
DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. reduced.
i If the engine has been switched off, it
cannot be started again until DISTRONIC Making adjustments in 5 mph (Canada:
PLUS has been deactivated. 10 km/h) increments
If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and a X Briefly press the cruise control lever
malfunction occurs in the system or if there beyond the pressure point, up : for a
is a disruption in the power supply, the higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
Brake Immediately message is shown in
The last speed stored is increased or
the multifunction display. Immediately
reduced.
depress the brake firmly until the warning
message in the multifunction display goes out
or shift the transmission to position P. Storing the current speed or calling up
DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. a stored speed
G WARNING
Setting a speed
The set speed stored in memory should only
G WARNING be set again if prevailing road conditions and
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment legal speed limits permit. Possible
until the vehicle has made the necessary acceleration or deceleration differences
adjustments. arising from returning to the preset speed
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
to you and others.
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration you ?.
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
or serious injury to you and others.
pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first
time it is activated, the current speed is
stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise
speed to the previously stored value.
Z
168 Driving systems
Setting the specified minimum distance DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the

speedometer
You can set the specified minimum distance
for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this
function, you can set the minimum distance
Driving and parking
that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in

front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can
see this distance in the multifunction display
(Y page 168).
G WARNING
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver's preferred driving When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or
style and applicable laws and driving two segments ; in the set speed range light
recommendations for safe following distance. up.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed
in the speedometer may differ slightly from
the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed = light up.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the

multifunction display
General notes
X To increase: turn control ; in direction
You can select the distance display in the
=.
Assistance menu (Y page 204) of the on-
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
board computer.
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front. Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is
X To decrease: turn control ; in deactivated
direction :. X Select the Distance Display function
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter using the on-board computer
distance between your vehicle and the (Y page 204).
vehicle in front. When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you
i Make sure that you maintain a sufficient will see the following in the multifunction
and safe distance from the vehicle in front. display:
Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if
necessary.
Driving systems 169
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
Driving and parking

: Symbol for activated PRE-SAFE Brake
; Vehicle in front, if detected
There are several ways to deactivate
= Distance indicator, current distance to DISTRONIC PLUS:
the vehicle in front
? Specified minimum distance to the
forwards :.
vehicle in front; adjustable
A Own vehicle or
X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, the
activated
DISTRONIC PLUS Off message is shown in
X Select the Distance Display function
the multifunction display for approximately
using the on-board computer five seconds.
(Y page 204).
i The last speed stored remains stored until
You will see the stored speed for about five
you switch off the engine.
seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
After this time, you will see the following in i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
the multifunction display while DISTRONIC depress the accelerator pedal. If you
PLUS is activated: accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS
adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished
overtaking.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically
deactivated if:
Ryou apply the parking brake.
Ryou are driving slower than
15 mph (25 km/h) and there is no vehicle
in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer
detected.
: DISTRONIC PLUS activated RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP.
; Own vehicle Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position.
= Specified minimum distance to the Ryou switch off the radar sensor system
vehicle in front; adjustable (Y page 208).
? Vehicle in front, if detected Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards
you in order to pull away and the front-
Z
170 Driving systems
passenger door or one of the rear doors is PLUS could lose sight of the preceding
open. vehicle. Your vehicle could then accelerate
Rthe vehicle has skidded. to the previously selected speed.
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will The DISTRONIC PLUS regulates only the
hear a warning tone. The DISTRONIC PLUS distance between your vehicle and those
Driving and parking
Off message is shown in the multifunction directly ahead of it. It may not register
display for approximately five seconds. stationary objects in the road, e.g.:
If the vehicle has been stopped by DISTRONIC Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
PLUS and a malfunction occurs in the system, Ra disabled vehicle
the Brake Immediately message appears in Ran oncoming vehicle
the multifunction display. Depress the brake
pedal immediately so that the vehicle does The driver must always be alert, observe all
not roll away. DISTRONIC PLUS is then traffic and intercede as required by means of
deactivated, and the message disappears. steering or braking the vehicle.
G WARNING G WARNING
The DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and The DISTRONIC PLUS should not be used in
releases the brakes when the vehicle snowy or icy road conditions.
decelerates below the minimum speed of
20 mph (30 km/h) by operation of the system Cornering, going into and coming out of a
unless the DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle bend
directly ahead of you. At that time the driver
must apply the brakes in order to reduce
vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

The following contains descriptions of certain
road and traffic conditions in which you must
be particularly attentive. In such situations,
brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then
deactivated. The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect
vehicles when cornering is limited. Your
G WARNING vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.
The DISTRONIC PLUS works to maintain the
speed selected by the driver unless a moving Vehicles traveling on a different line
obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g.
following another vehicle ahead of you at your
set distance).
This means that:
RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after
you have changed lanes.
RWhile in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, the DISTRONIC
Driving systems 171
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles Obstructions and stationary vehicles
traveling on a different line. The distance to
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lane
Driving and parking

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for
obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for
example, the detected vehicle turns a corner
and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.
vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this
vehicle will be too short. Crossing vehicles
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect

vehicles that are crossing your lane.
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights
vehicle in front on the edge of the road, with crossing traffic, for example, could cause
because of its narrow width. The distance to your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.
the vehicle in front will be too short.
Dynamic handling package with

sports mode
General notes
The most important part of the dynamic
handling package with sports mode is the
adjustable suspension system. This
automatically controls and adapts the
suspension to the respective driving
situation.
Z
172 Driving systems
The calibration of the suspension depends Comfort tuning

on:
In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics
Ryour driving style of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select
Rthe road surface conditions this mode if you prefer a more comfortable
Ryour individual selection; see the following driving style, but also when driving fast on
Driving and parking
description straight roads, e.g. highways.

If your vehicle is equipped with automatic X Press button ;.
transmission, the dynamic handling package Indicator lamp : goes out. Comfortable
with sports mode also includes steering suspension tuning is selected. On vehicles
wheel paddle shifters (Y page 145) with a with automatic transmission, drive
manual drive program (Y page 147). program E is selected.
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep
slopes
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
Example: position of dynamic handling package Rwhen waiting in traffic
with sports mode button
The vehicle is kept stationary without the
X Start the engine. driver having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
Sports tuning function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in
sports mode ensures even better contact
with the road. Select this mode when Activation conditions
employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on You can activate the HOLD function if:
winding country roads. Rthe vehicle is stationary.
Your selection remains stored until you Rthe engine is running.
switch off the engine.
Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt
X Press button ;.
is fastened.
Indicator lamp : lights up. Sports Rthe parking brake is not applied.
suspension tuning is selected. Depending
Rthe hood is closed.
on the engine output, the accelerator pedal
Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.
is more responsive. On vehicles with
automatic transmission, drive program S is RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
selected.
Driving systems 173
Activating the HOLD function The HOLD function does not replace the
X Make sure that the activation conditions parking brake and must not be used for
are met. parking.
X Depress the brake pedal. The braking effect of the HOLD function is
canceled and the vehicle could roll away if:
Driving and parking

Rthe HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or the
brake pedal.
Rthere is a malfunction in the system or an
interruption in the power supply, e.g.
battery failure.
X Rthe electrical system in the engine
Quickly depress the brake pedal further
until HOLD display : appears in the compartment, the battery or the fuses are
multifunction display. tampered with.
The HOLD function is activated. You can Rthe battery is disconnected.
release the brake pedal. If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivate
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
i If depressing the brake pedal the first against rolling away.
time does not activate the HOLD function,
wait briefly and then try again. You will see a warning message in the
G WARNING multifunction display if the HOLD function is
activated and:
The vehicle's brakes are applied when the
HOLD function is activated. For this reason, Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's
deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is seat belt is unfastened.
to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in a Rthe engine is switched off.
car wash or by towing). Rthe hood is opened.
Shift to 'P'
Deactivating the HOLD function X Move the selector lever to P to prevent the
The HOLD function is deactivated vehicle from rolling away.
automatically if: The HOLD function is deactivated. The
Ryou
warning message in the multifunction
accelerate and the transmission is in
display disappears.
position D or R.
Ryou shift the transmission to position P. A horn will also sound at regular intervals if
the HOLD function is activated and you:
Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain
Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's
amount of pressure until HOLD disappears
from the multifunction display. door and take off your seat belt
Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. Ropen the hood
The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact

G WARNING that the vehicle has been parked while the
Never get out of the vehicle when the HOLD HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt
function is activated. to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.
The HOLD function must never be operated The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD
or deactivated by a passenger or from outside function is deactivated.
the vehicle.
Z
174 Driving systems
i If the engine has been switched off, it Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brake
cannot be started again until the HOLD pedal is depressed (left foot).
function has been deactivated. Rthe transmission is in position D.
If there is a malfunction in the system or

power supply while the HOLD function is Activating RACE START
Driving and parking
activated, the Brake immediately message X Depress the brake pedal with your left foot,
is shown in the multifunction display. and keep it depressed.
Immediately depress the brake firmly until
X Turn the drive program selector clockwise
the warning message in the multifunction
(Y page 144) until the RS lamp lights up.
display goes out.
The multifunction display shows the RACE
You can also shift the transmission to position START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel:
P. This deactivates the HOLD function. Paddle DOWN message.
i If the conditions for activation are no
RACE START longer fulfilled, RACE START is canceled.
Important safety notes START canceled message.
i RACE START is only available in AMG X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shift
vehicles. paddle (Y page 145).
RACE START enables optimal acceleration or
from a standing start. The precondition for XTo confirm: pull the right steering wheel
this is a suitable high-grip road surface. shift paddle (Y page 145).
G WARNING START available Depress
RACE START is only available when SPORT accelerator message.
handling mode is activated. SPORT handling i If you do not depress the accelerator
mode only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited pedal fully within two seconds, RACE
extent in the event of swerving or wheelspin. START is canceled. The multifunction
RACE START should only be used on specially display shows the RACE START not
designated roads. Always adapt your speed possible See Operator's Manual
and driving style to the prevailing road and message.
weather conditions.
XDepress the accelerator pedal fully.
The engine speed increases to
Conditions for activation approximately 4000 rpm.
RACE START can be activated when: The multifunction display shows the RACE
Rthe doors are closed. START Release brake to start
message.
Rthe engine is running and it has reached an
operating temperature of approximately i If you do not release the brake pedal
176 (80 ). This is the case when the within seven seconds, RACE START is
engine oil temperature in the multifunction canceled. The multifunction display shows
display stops flashing. the RACE START canceled message.
RSPORT handling mode is activated. X Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
(Y page 62) accelerator pedal depressed.
Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-ahead The vehicle pulls away at maximum
position. acceleration.
Driving systems 175
The multifunction display shows the RACE or be fully raised. Observe the instructions
START active message. for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full
RACE START is deactivated when a speed of contact with the ground.
approximately 30 mph (Canada: 50 km/h) is i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
reached. Drive program S+ is activated. effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if
Driving and parking

SPORT handling mode remains activated. you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow
RACE START is deactivated immediately if chains if necessary.
you release the accelerator pedal during
RACE START or if any of the activation
conditions are no longer fulfilled. The PARKTRONIC
multifunction display shows the RACE START
not possible See Operator's Manual
message. i PARKTRONIC is only available in Canada.
i If RACE START is used repeatedly within G WARNING
a short period of time, it is only available The PARKTRONIC is a supplemental system.
again after the vehicle has been driven a It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the
certain distance. need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always remains with the driver.
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are G WARNING
permanently driven. Together with ESP, it Make sure no persons or animals are in or
improves the traction of your vehicle near the area in which you are parking/
whenever a drive wheel spins due to maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
insufficient grip. injured.
G WARNING PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and
traction: audibly the distance between your vehicle
RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as and an object.
possible. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator you:
pedal. Rswitch on the ignition
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N
prevailing road conditions. Rrelease the parking brake
Failure to observe these guidelines could PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
cause the vehicle to skid. 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents speeds.
resulting from excessive speed. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your
vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper
! Never tow the vehicle with one axle
and four sensors in the rear bumper.
raised. This may damage the transfer case.
Damage of this sort is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All
wheels must remain either on the ground
Z
176 Driving systems
Front sensors
Center Approximately 40 in
(approximately 100 cm)
Corners Approximately 24 in
Driving and parking
Rear sensors
: Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand
side (example) (approximately 80 cm)
Range of the sensors
! When parking, pay particular attention to
General notes objects above or below the sensors, such
The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and as flower pots or trailer drawbars.
slush; otherwise they may not function PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects
correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking when they are in the immediate vicinity of
care not to scratch or damage them the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle
(Y page 287). or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic
car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a
truck or a pneumatic drill could cause
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
Minimum distance
Side view (approximately 20 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the

relevant warning displays light up and a
warning tone sounds. If the distance falls
below the minimum, the distance may no
longer be shown.
Top view
Driving systems 177
Warning displays One or more segments light up as the vehicle

approaches an obstacle, depending on the
The warning displays show the distance
vehicle's distance from the obstacle.
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located From the:
on the dashboard above the center air vents. Rsixthsegment onwards, you will hear an
Driving and parking

The warning display for the rear area is intermittent warning tone for
located on the headliner in the rear approximately two seconds.
compartment. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two
seconds. This indicates that you have now
reached the minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
Warning display for the front area

: Segments on the left-hand side of the
vehicle
; Segments on the right-hand side of the
vehicle
= Segments showing operational readiness : Indicator lamp
The warning display for each side of the ; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC
vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is
segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if deactivated. Parking Guidance is also
yellow segments showing operational deactivated.
readiness = light up.
The selected transmission position i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
determines which warning display is active when you turn the SmartKey to position 2
when the engine is running. in the ignition lock.
Transmission Warning display

position
D Front area activated
R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas
is rolling activated
backwards
P No areas activated
Z
178 Driving systems
Problems with PARKTRONIC

Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified
Driving and parking
warning displays are lit. specialist workshop.

You also hear a warning
tone for approximately
two seconds.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after
approximately
20 seconds, and the
indicator lamp in the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 287).
warning displays are lit. X
Switch the ignition back on.
PARKTRONIC is
deactivated after The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or
approximately 20 ultrasound waves.
seconds.
X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Parking Guidance G WARNING

Parking Guidance is merely an aid and may
display parking spaces that are not suitable
i Parking Guidance is only available in for parking, for example:
Canada. Rno-parking areas
Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid Rparking spaces with unsuitable surfaces
with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to (road surface)
measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. Rdriveways
A suitable parking space is indicated by the Rentrances and exits
parking symbol. You receive steering
instructions when parking. You may also use Parking Guidance detects and measures
PARKTRONIC (Y page 175). potential parking spaces while driving past.
Changes to the parking space after this point
are not taken into account, for example if the
vehicle in front of or behind the parking space
changes position or objects in the parking
space are moved.
Even when using Parking Guidance, you are
still responsible for driving carefully. If you
rely on Parking Guidance alone, you could
Driving systems 179
cause an accident and injure yourself and Rsnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
others. space being measured inaccurately.

Safety always remains your responsibility and Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC
you must continue paying careful attention to (Y page 177) warning messages during the
your immediate surroundings when parking parking procedure.
Driving and parking

and maneuvering. Rwhen transporting a load which protrudes
from your vehicle, you must not use Parking
G WARNING Guidance.
Objects located above the height range of Rnever use Parking Guidance with snow
Parking Guidance will not be detected when chains or an emergency spare wheel
the parking space is measured. These objects mounted.
are not taken into account when the parking Rmake sure that the tire pressures are
procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging always correct. This has a direct effect on
loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods the steering instructions.
vehicles. Under some circumstances, Parking Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in the
Guidance might therefore issue steering parking space after parking is dependent
instructions too soon. This may lead to a on various factors. These include the
collision. For this reason, you should avoid position and shape of the vehicles parked
using Parking Guidance in such situations. in front and behind it and the conditions of
the location. In some cases, Parking
G WARNING Guidance may guide you too far or not far
Make sure that no persons or animals are in enough into a parking space. In some
the maneuvering range. Otherwise, they cases, it may also lead you across or onto
could be injured. the curb. If necessary, cancel the parking
procedure with Parking Guidance.
! Pay particular attention to low objects or
objects with flat surfaces, such as trailer ! If unavoidable, you should drive over
drawbars, posts, cross beams and curbs. obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at
These types of objects cannot be detected a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage
by Parking Guidance and may damage the the wheels or tires.
vehicle.
When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking
Detecting a parking space
Guidance is also unavailable.
Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces:
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are on straight roads, not bends
Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e.
not on the pavement, for example. Parking
Guidance may not detect flat curbs : Detected parking space on the left
Parking tips: ; Parking symbol
Ron narrow roads, drive past the parking = Detected parking space on the right
space as close as possible. Parking Guidance is automatically activated
Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrown when you drive forwards. The system is
or partially occupied by trailer drawbars operational at speeds of up to approximately
might be identified incorrectly or not at all. 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the
Z
180 Driving systems
system independently locates and measures X Stop the vehicle when the parking space
parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. symbol shows the desired parking space in
When driving at speeds below 19 mph the instrument cluster.
(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as X Shift the transmission to position R.
a status indicator in the instrument cluster. The following message appears in the
Driving and parking
When a parking space has been detected, an multifunction display: Check vehicle
arrow towards the right = or the left : also surroundings Confirm with OK.
appears. Parking Guidance only displays X Press the a button on the multifunction
parking spaces on the front-passenger side steering wheel to confirm.
as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's The multifunction display switches to
side are displayed as soon as the turn signal Parking Guidance.
on the driver's side is activated. To park on Depending on your distance from the
the driver's side, you must leave the driver's parking space, the Please drive
side turn signal switched on until you have backwards message appears in the
engaged reverse gear. multifunction display.
Parking Guidance will only detect parking
spaces:
Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel
Rthat are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wide
Rthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than
your vehicle
A parking space is displayed while you are
driving past it, and until you are X If necessary, reverse towards the parking
approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. space. This is indicated by an arrow
pointing backwards.
Parking Continue backing up until you hear a tone.
Stop the parking position has been
G WARNING reached. The arrow is white.
The Parking Guidance is only an aid and may The Please steer to the right or
not detect all obstacles. The Parking Please steer to the left message
Guidance does not relieve you of the appears in the multifunction display.
responsibility to pay attention. You are always
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your immediate surroundings
when parking and maneuvering. Otherwise,
you could endanger yourself and others.
X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the

steering wheel in the specified direction
until the arrow is white and a warning tone
sounds.
X To reverse into the parking space:
maintain the steering wheel angle and
reverse carefully.
Driving systems 181
X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, Rear view camera

The vehicle has reached the position in
which you need to countersteer. Important safety notes
The Please steer to the left or The rear view camera is an optical parking aid.
Please steer to the right message It shows the area behind your vehicle in the
Driving and parking

appears in the multifunction display. COMAND display.
X Countersteering: while the vehicle is
G WARNING
stationary, turn the steering wheel in the
specified direction until the arrow is white Make sure that no persons or animals are in
and a warning tone sounds. the maneuvering range. Otherwise, they
could be injured.
X To reverse into the parking space:
maintain the steering wheel angle and The rear view camera is located in the handle
reverse carefully. strip of the trunk lid.
X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,
at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the
continuous warning tone.
The Parking Guidance finished
message appears in the multifunction
display and a warning tone sounds. You
may be asked to steer in a different
direction and then change gear. In this
case, further displays in the multifunction
display will direct you to the final position.
X Maneuver if necessary.
: Rear view camera
X Always observe the warning messages
displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 177).
View through the camera
Canceling Parking Guidance The area behind the vehicle is displayed in a
mirror-inverted manner, as in the rear-view
X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the
mirror.
center console (Y page 177).
Parking Guidance is canceled immediately G WARNING
and PARKTRONIC is deactivated. The rear view camera is only an aid and may
Parking Guidance is canceled automatically if display obstacles
it is no longer possible to guide you into the Rfrom a distorted perspective
parking space, or if a malfunction occurs. Rinaccurately
The parking space symbol goes out and a Rmay not display obstacles at all
warning tone sounds. The Parking
The rear view camera does not relieve you of
Guidance Canceled message appears in the
the responsibility to be cautious. Take care
and pay careful attention. The rear view
camera may not show objects which are
Rveryclose to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rabove the trunk handle
Z
182 Driving systems
You are responsible for safety at all times and separate operating instructions for
must continue to pay attention to the COMAND).
immediate surroundings when parking and X Engage reverse gear.
maneuvering. This includes the area behind, The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise COMAND display.
Driving and parking
you could endanger yourself and/or others.
G WARNING ATTENTION ASSIST

The rear view camera will not function or will
not fully function if: Important safety notes
Rthe trunk lid is open ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
Rit is raining or snowing strongly or if it is monotonous journeys such as on freeways
foggy and interstate highways. It is active in the
Rit is night or if you are parking/ range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and
maneuvering your vehicle in a very dark 112 mph (180 km/h).
area If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical
Ra very bright white light is affecting the indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in
camera concentration on the part of the driver, it
suggests you take a break.
Rthe immediate vicinity is illuminated with
fluorescent light (the display of the G WARNING
COMAND system can flicker) ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and may
Rtemperature changes abruptly, for example detect your tiredness or lapses in
if you drive out of the cold into a heated concentration too late or not at all. It is not a
garage (condensation on the lens) substitute for a well-rested and attentive
Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered driver.
Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged Fatigue may cause you to recognize
In this case, have the position and the hazardous situations too late, misjudge a
setting of the camera checked at a situation or react more slowly. For this
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz reason, make sure you feel rested before you
recommends that you consult a Mercedes- begin driving and during your journey. Make
Benz Center for this purpose. sure that you take regular breaks in time,
particularly on long journeys. Otherwise, you
Do not use the rear view camera in these
may fail to recognize dangers in time, cause
situations. You could otherwise injure
an accident and injure yourself and others.
yourself and other people and/or cause
damage - including damage to your vehicle - ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of
while parking/maneuvering. fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking
the following criteria into account:
Activating the rear view camera Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position characteristics
2 in the ignition lock. Rdriving conditions, e.g. time, driving time
X Make sure that the "rear view camera"
function is selected in COMAND (see the
Driving systems 183
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is increasing lapses in concentration, you will be

restricted and warnings may be delayed or warned again after 15 minutes at the earliest.
not occur at all: ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you
Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the continue your journey and starts assessing
surface is uneven or if there are potholes your tiredness again if:
Driving and parking

Rif there is a strong side wind Ryou switch off the engine.
Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style Ryou take off your seat belt and open the
with high cornering speeds or high rates of driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or
acceleration to take a break.
Rif you predominantly drive at speeds under
50 mph (80 km/h) or over 112 mph
(180 km/h) Lane Tracking package
Rif you are currently using COMAND or
General notes
making a telephone call with it
Rif the time has been set incorrectly The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (Y page 183) and Lane Keeping
Rin active driving situations, such as when
Assist (Y page 185).
you change lanes or change your speed
Blind Spot Assist
Warning and display messages in the
multifunction display Important safety notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system
to monitor the areas on both sides of your
vehicle. It supports you from speeds of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning
display in the exterior mirrors draws your
attention to vehicles detected in the
monitored area. If you then switch on the
X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- corresponding turn signal to change lane, you
board computer (Y page 205). will also receive an optical and audible
Symbol : appears in the multifunction collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses
display. sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring
purposes.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be
warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your G WARNING
journey has begun. You will then hear an Blind Spot Assist is only an aid designed to
intermittent warning tone twice, and the assist driving. It may fail to detect some
Attention Assist: Drowsiness vehicles and is no substitute for attentive
Detected message appears in the driving.
multifunction display. Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road and
X If necessary, take a break. traffic conditions. It may fail to detect narrow
X Press a to confirm the message. vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
may only detect them too late.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors,
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you
strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow,
do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST
still detects typical indicators of fatigue or
Z
184 Driving systems
rain or mist, for example. In this case, vehicles that approach and drive past at high speeds
are detected late or not at all. are not detected. There is no display and no
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and warning.
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to If the lanes are very wide, it may not be
recognize dangers in time, cause an accident possible to monitor the complete width of the
Driving and parking
and injure yourself and others. neighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles in
the next lane may not be detected, especially
i USA only: if they are driving in a staggered formation.
This device has been approved by the FCC This may be the case if vehicles are driving at
as a Vehicular Radar System. The radar that edge of their lane which is furthest away
sensor is intended for use in an automotive from your vehicle.
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
altering of the device will void any your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
warranties, and is not permitted by the recognize dangers in time, cause an accident
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in and injure yourself and others.
any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
device could void the users authority to lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may
operate the equipment. be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not
driving in the middle of their lane. This may
For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when be the case if the vehicles are driving on the
driving, the radar sensor system must be inner side of their lane.
activated (Y page 208) and operational.
Due to the nature of the system:
Monitoring range of the sensors Rwarnings may be issued in error when
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area shown in driving close to crash barriers or similar
the figure up to 10 ft (3 m) behind and solid lane borders.
immediately adjacent to your vehicle. Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
alongside long vehicles, such as trucks, for
a prolonged time.
The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are
integrated into the sides of the rear bumper.
Make sure that the bumper is free from dirt,
ice or slush around the sensors. The rear
sensors must not be covered, for example by
bicycle racks or overhanging loads. Following
a severe impact or in the event of damage to
the bumpers, have the function of the radar
sensors checked at a qualified specialist
Center. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not
work properly.
G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas in the
immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehicles
Driving systems 185
Indicator and warning display Collision warning

If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range
of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the turn
signal, a double warning tone sounds. Red
warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal
Driving and parking

remains on, detected vehicles are indicated
by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There
are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
X Make sure that the radar sensor system
(Y page 208) and Blind Spot Assist
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp (Y page 205) are activated in the on-board
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator computer.
lamp : lights up yellow in the exterior X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
mirrors up to a vehicle speed of 20 mph ignition lock.

(30 km/h). When the vehicle speed exceeds Warning lamps : light up red in the
20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes exterior mirrors for approximately 1.5
out and Blind Spot Assist is ready for use. seconds and then turn yellow.
When your speed exceeds approximately
20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : lights up Lane Keeping Assist
red on the corresponding side whenever a
vehicle is detected in the blind spot Important safety notes
monitoring range. This warning is always Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
given when a vehicle enters the blind spot front of your vehicle by means of a camera at
monitoring range from behind or from the the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist
side. When you are passing another vehicle, detects lane markings on the road and warns
the warning is emitted only if the difference you before you leave your lane
in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). unintentionally.
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot
Assist is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator/warning
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
the ambient light.
G WARNING
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds under
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). The
indicator lamps in the exterior mirrors are
yellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range are : Lane Keeping Assist camera
then not indicated. If you have chosen the Display Unit
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and Speed-/Odometer(Y page 206) function in
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to the on-board computer and select km as the
recognize dangers in time, cause an accident unit of measurement, Active Lane Keeping
and injure yourself and others. Assist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. If
Z
186 Driving systems
the miles display unit is selected, the by means of intermittent vibration in the
assistance range begins at 40 mph. steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
G WARNING In order that you are warned only when
necessary and in good time if you cross the
Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your
lane marking, the system recognizes certain
vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and may
Driving and parking
conditions and warns you accordingly.

detect the lane markings on the road
incorrectly or not at all. The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
The system may be impaired or may not Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
function if: bend.
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to
insufficient illumination of the road, or due freeway.
to snow, rain, fog or spray. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, The warning vibration occurs later if:
the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Rthe road has narrow lanes.
Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the No warning vibration occurs if:
vicinity of the camera.
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or
Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane
accelerate.
are present.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too ABS, BAS or ESP.
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
detected. the warnings are suppressed for a certain
Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear, period of time.
e.g. near roadworks. Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge.
Rthe road is narrow and winding.
Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road and

traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for
attentive driving. You are responsible for the
vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and X Activate Lane Keeping Assist using the on-
steering correctly. Always adapt your driving board computer (Y page 205).
style to suit the prevailing road and weather Symbol : appears in the multifunction
conditions. Always pay attention to traffic display.
conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,
If your speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h)
you may fail to recognize dangers in time,
and lane markings are detected,
cause an accident and injure yourself and
symbol : is shown in green. Lane Keeping
others.
Assist is ready for use.
A warning can be given when a front wheel
passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
Driving systems 187
Active Driving Assistance package vehicle's speed, braking in good time, and
steering correctly. Always adapt your driving
General notes style to suit the prevailing road and weather
The Active Driving Assistance package conditions. Always pay attention to traffic
consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 161), conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,
Driving and parking

Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 187) and you may fail to recognize dangers in time,
Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 190). cause an accident and injure yourself and
others.
Active Blind Spot Assist
i USA only:
Important safety notes This device has been approved by the FCC
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor as a Vehicular Radar System. The radar
system to monitor the side areas of your sensor is intended for use in an automotive
vehicle which are in back of the driver. A radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
warning display in the exterior mirrors draws altering of the device will void any
your attention to vehicles detected in the warranties, and is not permitted by the
monitored area. If you then switch on the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
corresponding turn signal to change lane, you any non-approved way.
will also receive an optical and audible Any unauthorized modification to this
collision warning. If a risk of lateral collision device could void the users authority to
is detected, corrective braking may help you operate the equipment.
avoid a collision. To support the course- For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you
correcting brake application, Active Blind when driving, the radar sensor system must
Spot Assist also uses the forward-facing radar be activated (Y page 208) and operational.
sensor system. Active Blind Spot Assist
supports you from speeds of approximately Monitoring area
20 mph (30 km/h). Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area
G WARNING shown in the figure up to 10 ft (3 m) behind
and immediately adjacent to your vehicle. For
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid, and
this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assist uses
may detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly or
radar sensors in the rear bumper.
not at all.
The system may be impaired or may not
function if:
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,
rain, fog or spray.
Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect

narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles or
bicycles, or may only detect them too late. It
cannot detect vehicles that are overtaken at
a small distance and then enter the blind spot
area.
Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road
and traffic conditions. It is not a substitute for
attentive driving. You are responsible for the
Z
188 Driving systems
G WARNING workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors certain not work properly.
areas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle. Indicator and warning display
Vehicles that approach and drive past at high
speeds are not detected. No visual nor
Driving and parking
audible warnings are emitted and the system

does not brake the vehicle to correct your
course.
If the lanes are very wide, it may not be
possible to monitor the complete width of the
neighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles in
the next lane may not be detected, especially
if they are driving in a staggered formation.
This may be the case if vehicles are driving at
that edge of their lane which is furthest away : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp
from your vehicle.
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and
indicator lamp : lights up yellow in the
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
exterior mirrors up to a vehicle speed of
recognize dangers in time, cause an accident
20 mph (30 km/h). When the vehicle speed
and injure yourself and others.
exceeds 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may ready for use.
be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not When your speed exceeds approximately
driving in the middle of their lane. This may 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : lights up
be the case if there are vehicles driving at the red on the corresponding side whenever a
inner edge of their lanes. vehicle is detected in the blind spot
Due to the nature of the system: monitoring range. This warning is always
given when a vehicle enters the blind spot
Rwarnings may be issued in error when
monitoring range from behind or from the
driving close to crash barriers or similar
side. When you are passing another vehicle,
solid lane borders.
the warning is emitted only if the difference
Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving
in speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
alongside long vehicles, such as trucks, for
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
a prolonged time.
gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind
Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors Spot Assist is no longer active.
are integrated into the front and rear bumpers
The brightness of the indicator/warning
respectively. An additional radar sensor is
lamps is adjusted automatically according to
located behind the cover in the radiator grill.
the ambient light.
Make sure that the sensor areas on the
bumpers and the sensor cover in the radiator G WARNING
grill are free of dirt, ice and slush. The rear Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds
sensors must not be covered, for example by lower than 20 mph (30 km/h). The indicator
cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following lamps in the exterior mirrors are yellow.
a severe impact or in the event of damage to Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
the bumpers, have the function of the radar indicated.
sensors checked at a qualified specialist
Driving systems 189
Always pay attention to traffic conditions and and apply the brakes. Active Blind Spot Assist
your surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to does not detect all traffic situations and road
recognize dangers in time, cause an accident users. Always make sure that there is
and injure yourself and others. sufficient distance on the side for other traffic
or obstacles. An inappropriate brake
Driving and parking

Visual and audible collision warnings application may be interrupted at any time if
If you switch on the appropriate turn signals you steer slightly in the opposite direction or
and a vehicle is detected in the side accelerate.
monitoring range, you will receive a visual and You are responsible for driving at appropriate
acoustic collision warning. You will hear a speeds, braking in good time, and steering
double warning tone and red warning correctly. Always adapt your driving style to
lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, suit the prevailing road and weather
vehicles detected are indicated by the conditions. Always pay attention to traffic
flashing of red warning lamp :. There are no conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,
further warning tones. you may fail to recognize dangers in time,
Course-correcting brake application others.
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a
lateral collision in the monitoring range, a There will be either no or only a weak course-
course-correcting brake application is carried correcting brake application if:
out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
collision. barriers, located on both sides of your
The course-correcting brake application is vehicle.
available in the range between 20 mph Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). side.
If a course-correcting brake application Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the high cornering speeds.
exterior mirror and the following is shown in Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.
the multifunction display, for example:
ESP or PRE-SAFE Brake.
RESP is switched off.
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
X Make sure that the radar sensor system
G WARNING (Y page 208) and Active Blind Spot Assist
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid (Y page 205) are activated in the on-board
designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute computer.
for attentive driving. In some cases, the X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
course-correcting brake application is not ignition lock.
sufficient to avoid a collision. In such a case, Warning lamps : light up red in the
you must steer, brake or accelerate.
exterior mirrors for approximately 1.5
In very rare cases, the system may seconds and then turn yellow.
erroneously detect a danger of collision in the
area of crash barriers or similar lane borders
Z
190 Driving systems
Active Lane Keeping Assist Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or

covered, for instance by a sticker, in the
Important safety notes vicinity of the camera.
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or
in front of your vehicle by means of a camera covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
Driving and parking
at the top of the windshield. Active Lane

Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too
Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the
small and the lane markings thus cannot be
road and warns you before you leave your
detected.
lane unintentionally. If you do not react to the
Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear,
warning, a lane-correcting application of the
brakes can bring the vehicle back into the e.g. near roadworks.
original lane. Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.
lanes branch off, cross one another or
merge.
Rthe road is narrow and winding.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect

road and traffic conditions. It is not a
substitute for attentive driving. You are
responsible for the vehicle's speed, braking in
good time, and steering correctly. Always
adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions. Always pay
attention to traffic conditions and your
: Active Lane Keeping Assist camera surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail to
If you have selected the Display Unit recognize dangers in time, cause an accident
Speed-/Odometer(Y page 206) function in and injure yourself and others.
the on-board computer and select km as the
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
unit of measurement, Active Lane Keeping
Assist is active from speeds of 60 km/h. If A warning can be given when a front wheel
the miles display unit is selected, the passes over a lane marking. You will be
assistance range begins at 40 mph. warned by means of intermittent vibration in
the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.
G WARNING In order that you are warned only when
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep necessary and in good time if you cross the
your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and lane marking, the system recognizes certain
may detect the lane markings on the road conditions and warns you accordingly.
incorrectly or not at all. The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
The system may be impaired or may not
Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a
function if:
bend.
Rseveral or no lane markings for a single lane
Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a
are present. freeway.
Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.
insufficient illumination of the road, or due
The warning vibration occurs later if:
to snow, rain, fog or spray.
Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, Rthe road has narrow lanes.
the sun, or reflection from other vehicles. Ryou cut the corner on a bend.
Driving systems 191
No warning vibration occurs if: correcting brake application is not sufficient

Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or to bring your vehicle back to the original lane.
accelerate. In such cases, you must steer the vehicle
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. yourself to ensure that it does not leave the
lane.
Driving and parking

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect
ABS, BAS or ESP.
road and traffic conditions. Always make sure
Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,
that there is sufficient distance to the side for
the warnings are suppressed for a certain other traffic or obstacles. In rare cases,
period of time. unclear markings or particular structures on
Lane-correcting brake application the roadway can be recognized as solid lane
markings. An inappropriate brake application,
If you leave your lane under certain
e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane
circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly
marking, may be interrupted at any time by
on one side. This is meant to assist you in
steering slightly in the opposite direction.
bringing the vehicle back to the original lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot take
This function is available in the range between
weather conditions into account.
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h to
200 km/h). You are responsible for the driving at
appropriate speeds, braking in good time, and
A lane-correcting brake application can only
steering correctly. Always adapt your driving
be made after driving over a solid,
style to suit the prevailing road and weather
recognizable lane marking. Before this, a
conditions. Always pay attention to traffic
warning must be given by means of
conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel.
you may fail to recognize dangers in time,
In addition, a lane with lane markings on both
sides must be recognized. The brake
others.
application also slightly reduces vehicle
speed. No lane-correcting brake application occurs
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, if:
the following, for example, appears in the
Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or
multifunction display:
accelerate.
Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.
Ryou switch on the turn signals.
ESP, PRE-SAFE Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with
i A further lane-correcting brake high cornering speeds or high rates of

application can only occur after your acceleration.
vehicle has returned to the original lane. RESP is switched off.
Rthe transmission is not in position D.
G WARNING
Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not keep
your vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid been detected and displayed.
designed to assist driving. It is not a substitute
for attentive driving. In some cases, the lane-
Z
192 Driving systems
Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect

traffic situations or road users. An
inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you:
Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction.
Driving and parking
Ruse a turn signal.

Rclearly brake or accelerate.
A lane-correcting brake application is

interrupted automatically if:
ESP, PRE-SAFE Brake or Active Blind
Spot Assist.
Rlane markings can no longer be recognized.
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using

the on-board computer (Y page 205).
Symbol : appears in the multifunction
display.
If your speed exceeds 40 mph (60 km/h)
and lane markings are detected,
symbol : is shown in green. Active Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
193
On-board computer and displays

Displays and operation .................... 194
Menus and submenus ...................... 198
Display messages ............................. 213
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................ 239
194 Displays and operation
Useful information Rmalfunction/warning messages

Rfailure of any systems

i This Operator's Manual describes all Driving characteristics may be impaired.
models and all standard and optional
If you must continue to drive, do so with added
equipment of your vehicle available at the
caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
time of publication of the Operator's
Benz Center as soon as possible.
G WARNING
described. This also applies to safety- Malfunction and warning messages are only
related systems and functions. indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The
i Please read the information on qualified malfunction and warning messages are
specialist workshops (Y page 24). simply a reminder with respect to the
operation of certain systems. They do not
replace the owner's and/or driver's
Important safety notes responsibility to maintain the vehicle's
operating safety. Have all required
You will find an illustration of the instrument maintenance and safety checks performed on
cluster in the "At a glance" section the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized
(Y page 29). Mercedes-Benz Center to address the
malfunction and warning messages.
G WARNING
A driver's attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving. Displays and operation
For your safety and the safety of others, Coolant temperature display
selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the G WARNING
driver when traffic and road conditions permit Driving when your engine is overheated can
it to be done safely. cause some fluids which may have leaked into
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph the engine compartment to catch fire. You
(approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle is could be seriously burned.
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately Steam from an overheated engine can cause
14 m) every second. serious burns which can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
G WARNING if you see or hear steam coming from it.
No messages will be displayed if either the Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
instrument cluster or the multifunction other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
display is inoperative. vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
As a result, you will not be able to see the engine has cooled down.
information about your driving conditions,
The coolant temperature gauge is in the
such as
instrument cluster on the left-hand side.
Rspeed
Under normal operating conditions and with
Routside temperature
the specified coolant level, the coolant
Rwarning/indicator lamps temperature may rise to 248 (120 ).
Displays and operation 195
! If the coolant temperature is too high a The segments between the speed of the

display message is shown. vehicle in front and the stored speed light up.
If the coolant temperature rises above
248 (120 ), do not drive any further as
this could damage the engine. Operating the on-board computer
Overview
Tachometer The on-board computer is activated as soon
as you turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
ignition lock.
engine's overrevving range.
You can control the multifunction display and
! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as the settings in the on-board computer using
this could damage the engine. the buttons on the multifunction steering
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the wheel.
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display

The outside temperature display is in the
multifunction display (Y page 196).
G WARNING
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
Changes in the outside temperature are : Multifunction display

displayed after a short delay. ; To switch on the Voice Control System;
see the separate operating instructions
= Right control panel
Speedometer with segments ? Left control panel
The segments in the speedometer indicate A Back button
which speed range is available.
Cruise control (Y page 159) activated:
The segments light up from the stored speed
to the maximum speed.
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 161) activated:
One or two segments in the set speed range
light up.
DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
Z
196 Displays and operation
Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume

X
= RCalls up the menu and menu bar
; 8 RMute
9 Press briefly:
Back button
: RScrolls through lists
RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly:
RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack
stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off the Voice Control
a video scene System
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: RHides display messages or calls
switches to the phone book and up the last Trip menu function
selects a name or telephone used
number RExits the telephone book/redial
9 Press and hold: memory
: RIn the Audio menu: selects the % Press and hold:
previous/next station or selects RCalls up the standard display in
an audio track or a video scene
the Trip menu
using rapid scrolling
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling through the Multifunction display
phone book
Values and settings as well as display
a RConfirms a selection/display messages are shown in the multifunction
message display.
RIn the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
RIn the Audio menu: stops the
station search function at the
desired station
Right control panel
~ RRejectsor ends a call

RExits : Description field
phone book/redial
memory ; Menu bar
= Drive program
6 RMakes or accepts a call
? Outside temperature or speed
RSwitches to the redial memory
(Y page 206)
A Transmission position
Displays and operation 197
X To show menu bar ;: press the =

or ; button on the steering wheel.
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 178)
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(Y page 110)
ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 182)
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 185) or
Active Lane Keeping Assist
(Y page 190)
HOLD HOLD function (Y page 172)
PRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 65)
Z
198 Menus and submenus
Menus and submenus

Menu overview
The number of menus shown depends on the optional equipment in the vehicle.
Function
: Trip menu (Y page 199)
; Navi menu (navigation details) (Y page 200)
= Audio menu (Y page 201)
? Tel menu (telephone) (Y page 202)
A DriveAssist menu (assistance) (Y page 204)
B Serv. menu (Y page 206)
Rcalls up display messages (Y page 213)
Rtire pressure loss warning system (Canada only) (Y page 317)
Rtire pressure monitor (Y page 319)
RASSYST PLUS service interval display (Y page 282)
C Sett. menu (Y page 206)

D AMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 210)
The Audio and Tel menus differ slightly in vehicles with an audio system and vehicles with
COMAND. The examples given in this Operator's Manual apply to vehicles equipped with
COMAND.
Menus and submenus 199
Trip menu Rthe ignition has been switched off for more

than four hours.
Standard display R999 hours have been exceeded.
R9,999 miles have been exceeded.
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been

exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
reset From Reset.
Displaying the range and current fuel

consumption
X Press and hold the % button on the
X Press the = or ; button on the
steering wheel until the Trip menu with
odometer : and trip odometer ; is steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
shown. X Press the 9 or : to select the
current fuel consumption16 and the
Trip computer "From start" or "From approximate range.
reset"
The values in the From Start submenu are
calculated from the start of a journey, while
the values in the From Reset submenu are
calculated from the last time the submenu
was reset (Y page 200).
The approximate range that can be covered
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
depends on the fuel level and your current
X Press the 9 or : button to select driving style. If there is only a small amount
From Start or From Reset. of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows
a vehicle being refueled C instead of the
range.
Digital speedometer
steering wheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press 9 or : to select the digital
Trip computer "From start" (example)
: Distance speedometer.
; Time
= Average speed
? Average fuel consumption
The From Start trip computer is reset
automatically if:
: Digital speedometer
16 Not AMG vehicles.
Z
Resetting values Route guidance inactive

You can reset the values of the following

functions:
RTrip odometer
RTrip computer "From start"
RTrip computer "From reset"

steering wheel to select the Trip menu. : Direction of travel
X Press the 9 or : button to select the ; Current road
function that you wish to reset.
X Press a. Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
Resetting the trip computer "From start" (example)

X Press : to select Yes and press a : Distance to the destination
to confirm. ; Distance to the next change of direction
= Current road
? Symbol for "follow the road's course"
Navigation system menu
Change of direction announced without a
Displaying navigation instructions lane recommendation
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions. For more
information, see the separate operating
instructions.
X Switch on COMAND (see the separate
operating instructions).
: Road into which the change of direction
steering wheel to select the Navi menu.
leads
; Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
= Current road
? Symbol for change of direction
When a change of direction has been
announced, you will see visual distance
display ; next to the symbol for change of
direction ?. This decreases in size as you ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle

approach the announced change of direction. position is outside the area of the digital
map (off-map position).
Change of direction announced with a RNo Route: no route could be calculated to
lane recommendation
the selected destination.
Lane recommendations are only displayed if
the relevant data is available on the digital
map. Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio acts like a
normal radio.
For more information on satellite radio
operation, see the separate operating
instructions.
: Road into which the change of direction
leads You can only change the waveband and store
; Distance to change of direction and visual new stations using the audio system or
distance display COMAND.
= Lane recommendation X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
? Symbol for change of direction and select Radio (see the separate
On multi-lane roads, lane recommendation X Press the = or ; button on the
= may be shown for the next change of
steering wheel to select the Audio menu.
direction. Lanes may be added during a
change of direction.
: Waveband
Lane recommendation display (example) ; Station17
: Uninterrupted lane X To select a stored station: briefly press
; New lane during a change of direction the 9 or : button.
X To select a station from the station
Other status indicators of the list: press and briefly hold the 9
navigation system or : button.
RO : you have reached the destination or X To select a station using station
an intermediate destination. search18: press and briefly hold the 9

RNew Route... or Calculating Route: a or : button.
new route is being calculated.
17 If the station has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed.
18 Only if no station list is received.
Z
Operating audio player or audio media

Audio data from various audio devices or

media can be played, depending on the
equipment installed in the vehicle.
X Switch on the audio system or COMAND
and select the audio device or medium (see
the separate operating instructions). DVD changer display (example)
X Press the = or ; button on the : Current scene
steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the
9 or : button until the desired
scene has been reached.
CD changer display (example)

Telephone menu
: Current track
X To select the next/previous track:
Introduction
briefly press the 9 or : button. You can establish a Bluetooth connection to
X To select a track from the track list the audio system or to COMAND (see the
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the separate operating instructions).
9 or : button until the desired track
G WARNING
has been reached.
A driver's attention to the road must always
If you press and hold the 9 or : be his/her primary focus when driving. For
button, the rapid scrolling speed is increased. your safety and the safety of others, we
Not all audio devices or media support this recommend that you pull over to a safe
function. location and stop before placing or taking a
If track information is stored on the audio telephone call. If you choose to use the
device or medium, the multifunction display telephone while driving, please use the hands-
will show the number and name of the track. free device and only use the telephone when
The current track does not appear in audio weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
audio source connected). using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Video DVD operation (approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle is
X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
(see the separate operating instructions). 14 m) every second.
X Press the = or ; button on the X Switch on the mobile phone and audio
steering wheel to select the Audio menu. system or COMAND (see the separate
steering wheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display X Press the 9 or : button to select the

messages in the multifunction display: desired name.
RTelephone Ready or the name of the To start scrolling rapidly, press and hold the
network provider: the mobile phone has 9 or : button for longer than one
found a network and is ready to receive. second. After a short time, the rapid scroll
RTelephone No Service: no network is speeds up.
available, or the mobile phone is searching Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
for a network. button or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored
Accepting a call for a name: press the 6 or a button
to start dialing.
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel
menu, a display message appears in the or
multifunction display, for example: X If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
X Press the 6 or a button to start
dialing.
or
X Press the 6 button on the steering X If you do not want to make a call: press
wheel to accept an incoming call. the ~ or % button.
If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still
accept a call. Redialing
Rejecting or ending a call The on-board computer saves the last names
or numbers dialed in the redial memory.
X Press the ~ button on the steering X Press the = or ; button on the
wheel.
If you are not in the Tel menu, you can still X Press the 6 button to switch to the
reject or end a call. redial memory.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the
Dialing a number from the phone book
desired name or number.
If your mobile phone is able to receive calls, X Press the 6 or a button to start
you can search for and dial a number from the dialing.
phone book in the audio system or COMAND
or
at any time.
X If you do not want to make a call: press
the ~ or % button.
X Press the 9, : or a button to call
up the phone book.
Z
Assistance menu Deactivating/activating ESP

Introduction G WARNING
Under no circumstances should you
deactivate ESP when the ESP
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
flashes. Proceed as follows:
Rwhen driving off, apply as little throttle as
possible.
Rwhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
In the DriveAssist. menu you can: pedal.
Rshow the distance display Radapt your speed to suit the prevailing road
Ractivate/deactivate ESP and weather conditions.
Ractivate/deactivate PRE-SAFE Brake Failure to observe these guidelines could
Ractivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST cause the vehicle to skid. ESP cannot
Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist or
prevent accidents resulting from excessive
speed.
Active Blind Spot Assist
Ractivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist or
Activating/deactivating ESP on AMG
Active Lane Keeping Assist vehicles (Y page 62).
For further information about ESP, see
Showing the distance display (Y page 61).
This function is only available with X Start the engine.
DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
X Press the = or ; button on the to select the Assist. menu.
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist X Press the 9 or : button to select
menu. ESP.
X Press the 9 or : button to select
X Press the a button.
Distance Display.
X To deactivate: press a again.
X Press a.
The warning lamp in the instrument
The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display cluster comes on.
(Y page 168) appears in the multifunction
display. G WARNING
When the ESP OFF warning lamp is lit,
ESP is deactivated.
If the ESP warning lamp and the
ESP OFF warning lamp remain lit,
ESP is not available due to a malfunction.
When ESP is deactivated or not operational,
vehicle stability in standard driving
maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
X To activate: press a again. Activating/deactivating Blind Spot

The warning lamp in the instrument Assist
cluster goes out. You can use the Blind Spot Asst. function
to activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE (Y page 183) or Active Blind Spot Assist
Brake (Y page 187).
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel
PRE-SAFE Brake is only available in vehicles
with DISTRONIC PLUS. to select the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the = or ; button on the X Press 9 or : to select Blind Spot
steering wheel to select the DriveAssist Asst..

menu. X Press a.
X Press 9 or : to select PRE-SAFE If the function is activated, the monitored
Brake. areas are shown in red in the multifunction
X Press a.
display.
X To activate/deactivate: press a
The current selection is displayed.
again.
again.
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
When PRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 65) is Assist
activated, the multifunction display shows
the symbol as long as the HOLD You can use the Lane Keep. Asst. function
function is not activated (Y page 172). to activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist
Vehicles with Parking Guidance: if (Y page 185) or Active Lane Keeping Assist
PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving (Y page 190).
at a speed under 22 mph (35 km/h) the j X Press the = or ; button on the
symbol for Parking Guidance is displayed steering wheel to select the DriveAssist
instead of the symbol. menu.
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION Lane Keep. Asst..
ASSIST X Press a.
X Press the = or ; button on the If the function is activated, the road

steering wheel to select the DriveAssist markings are shown in red in the
menu. multifunction display.
Attention Asst.. again.
X Press a. If Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane keeping
The current selection is displayed. Assist is activated, the multifunction display
shows the symbol when the ignition is
switched on.
again.
When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 182) is
activated, the symbol appears in the
multifunction display when the ignition is on.
Z
Service menu The selected unit of measurement for

distance applies to:

Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu
Rthe odometer and the trip odometer
Rthe trip computer
Rthe current consumption and the range
Rthe navigation instruction in the Navi menu
RDISTRONIC PLUS
In the Serv. menu you can:
RASSYST PLUS service interval display
Rcall up display messages (Y page 213)
Rrestart the tire pressure loss warning X Press the = or ; button on the
system (Canada only) (Y page 317) steering wheel to select the Settings
Rcheck the tire pressure electronically menu.
X Press the : or 9 button to select the
(Y page 319)
Rcall up the service due date (Y page 282) Instr. cluster submenu.
X Press the a button to confirm.
Settings menu Display Unit Speed-/Odometer
function.
Introduction
You will see the selected setting: km or
miles.
X Press the a button to save the setting.
Selecting the permanent display function

The Permanent Display: function allows
you to choose whether the multifunction
display always shows the outside
The Sett. menu can be used for: temperature or the speed in km/h (USA) or
Rchanging the instrument cluster settings mph (Canada).
Rchanging the light settings X Press the = or ; button on the
Rchanging the vehicle settings steering wheel to select the Settings
Rchanging the convenience settings menu.
Rrestoring the factory settings X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instr. cluster submenu.
Instrument cluster X Press the a button to confirm.
Selecting the unit of measurement for
Permanent display function.
distance
You will see the selected setting Outside
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: Temperature or Speedometer [km/h]:.
function allows you to choose whether
certain displays appear in kilometers or miles.
Lights Activating/deactivating surround

lighting and exterior lighting delayed
Switching the daytime running lamps on/ switch-off
off If you have activated the Surround
This function is not available in Canada. Lighting function and the light switch is in
If you have activated the Day Lights the c or position, the following
function and the light switch is in the c or functions are active when it is dark:
position, the daytime running lamps are RSurround lighting: the exterior lighting
switched on automatically during the day remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
when the engine is running. with the SmartKey. The exterior lighting
In the dark, the following also light up: switches off when you open the driver's
Rthe low-beam headlamps door.
RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
Rthe parking lamps
Rthe tail lamps
exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds
after the engine has been switched off. If
Rthe license plate lamp
you close all the doors, the exterior lighting
Rthe side marker lamps goes off after 15 seconds.
X Press the = or ; button on the If you activate the Surround Lighting
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. function, the following light up depending on
X Press the : or 9 button to select the the vehicle's equipment:
Lights submenu. Rthe parking lamps
X Press the a button to confirm. Rthe fog lamps
X Press the : or 9 button to select the Rthe daytime running lamps
Day Lights function. Rthe side marker lamps

If the Daytime Running Lights: function Rthe surround lighting in the exterior mirrors
has been switched on, the cone of light and X Press the = or ; button on the
the W symbol in the multifunction steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
display are shown in red.
Lights submenu.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ X Press the a button to confirm.
off X Press the : or 9 button to select the

X Press the = or ; button on the Surround lighting function.
steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. When the Surround Lighting function is
X Press the : or 9 button to select the activated, the light cone and the area
around the vehicle are displayed in red in
Lights submenu.
X Press : or 9 to select the Adapt.
Highbeam function.
If the Adapt. Highbeam function has been
switched on, the cone of light and the
_ symbol in the multifunction display
are shown in red.
Z
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the X Press the = or ; button on the

exterior lighting temporarily: steering wheel to select the Settings

X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the menu.
SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the Vehicle submenu.

ignition lock and back to position 0. X Press the a button to confirm.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is X Press the : or 9 button to select the
deactivated. Auto. Door Locks function.
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is When the Auto. Door Locks function is
reactivated the next time you start the activated, the vehicle doors are displayed
engine. in red in the multifunction display.
Activating/deactivating the interior
lighting delayed switch-off Activating/deactivating the acoustic
If you activate the Light. delay function, locking verification signal
the interior lighting remains on for 20 If you activate the Acoustic Lock function,
seconds after you remove the SmartKey from an audible signal sounds depending on the
the ignition lock. vehicle's date of manufacture:
X Press the = or ; button on the Rwhen locking
steering wheel to select the Settings or
menu. Ronce when unlocking and three times when
locking
Lights submenu.
steering wheel to select the Settings
X Press the : or 9 button to select the menu.
Light. Delay function. X Press the : or 9 button to select the
When the Light. Delay function is Vehicle submenu.
activated, the vehicle interior is displayed
in red in the multifunction display.
Acoustic Lock function.
If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,
Vehicle the & symbol in the multifunction
Activating/deactivating the automatic display lights up red.
door locking feature X Press the a button to save the setting.
If you select the Auto. Door Locks

Activating/deactivating the radar sensor
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above
system
a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).
The following systems are switched off when
i For further information on the automatic the radar sensor system is deactivated:
locking feature, see (Y page 78).
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 161)
RBAS PLUS (Y page 60)
RPRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 65)
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 183) G WARNING

RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 187) You must make sure no one can become
i USA only: This device has been approved trapped or injured by the moving steering
by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
The radar sensor is intended for use in an activated.
automotive radar system only. Removal, To stop steering wheel movement, move
tampering, or altering of the device will void steering wheel adjustment lever or press one
any warranties, and is not permitted by the of the memory position buttons.
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in Do not leave children unattended in the
any non-approved way. vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Any unauthorized modification to this Children could open the driver's door and
device could void the user's authority to unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
operate the equipment. feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of X Press the = or ; button on the
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.
the following two conditions: X Press the : or 9 button to select the
1. This device may not cause harmful Convenience submenu.
interference, and X Press the a button to confirm.
2. this device must accept any interference X Press the : or 9 button to select the
Easy Entry/Exit function.
If the Easy Entry/Exit function is
Any unauthorized modification to this activated, the vehicle steering wheel is
device could void the user's authority to displayed in red in the multifunction
operate the equipment. display.
X Press the = or ; button on the X Press the a button to save the setting.
steering wheel to select the Settings
menu. Switching the fold-in mirrors when
X Press the : or 9 button to select the locking function on/off
Vehicle submenu. This function is only available in Canada.
X Press the a button to confirm. If you switch on the Auto. Mirror
X Press the 9 or : button to select Folding function, the exterior mirrors fold in
Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):. when you lock the vehicle. If you unlock the
vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
You will see the selected setting: Enabled
passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out
or Disabled.
again.
If you have switched the function on and you
fold the exterior mirrors in using the button
Convenience on the door (Y page 101), they will not fold
out automatically. The exterior mirrors can
Activating/deactivating the EASY- then only be folded out using the button on
ENTRY/EXIT feature the door.
You can use the Easy Entry/Exit: function
to activate or deactivate the EASY ENTRY/
EXIT feature (Y page 100).
Z

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.

Convenience submenu.
X Press the : or 9 to select the
Auto. Mirror Folding function. : Digital speedometer
If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is ; Gear indicator
activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is = Upshift indicator
displayed in red in the multifunction
? Engine oil temperature
display.
X Press the a button to save the setting. A Coolant temperature
Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the
Resetting to factory settings engine has reached the overrevving range
when in the manual gearshift program.
For safety reasons, the Day Lights function Upshift indicator UP = fades out other
in the Lights submenu is only reset when the messages until you have shifted up.
vehicle is stationary.
When the engine oil temperature is below
80 , the oil temperature is shown in blue.
steering wheel to select the Settings Avoid driving at full engine output during this
menu. time.
Factory Setting submenu. SETUP
SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP
The Reset All Settings? message (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the
appears. SPORT handling mode.
X Press the : or 9 button to select
No or Yes.
to select the AMG menu.
X Press the a button to confirm the
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until
selection.
SETUP is displayed.
If you select Yes, the multifunction display
shows a confirmation message.
AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays
: Drive program (C/S/S+/M)
; ESP mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling
mode (SPORT)
RACETIMER X Press = or ; to select Interm.

Time.
Displaying and starting RACETIMER
G WARNING The intermediate time is displayed for five
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on seconds.
roads and in conditions where high speed
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads is Starting a new lap
prohibited under all circumstances. The driver It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen
is and must always remain responsible for laps.
following posted speed limits. X Press a to confirm New Lap.
You can use the RACETIMER to store lap

times.
X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACETIMER is shown.
i If RACETIMER is selected, the menu bar : RACETIMER
cannot be called up with the = ; Fastest lap time (best lap)
and ; buttons. = Lap
Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the % button on the steering
wheel.
: Lap
; RACETIMER
You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or if the SmartKey is in
X Press a to confirm YES.
position 2 in the ignition lock.
X To start: press the a button to start the The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you
RACETIMER. stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to
position 1 in the ignition lock. When you turn
Displaying the intermediate time the SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then
press the a to confirm Start, timing is
continued.
Resetting the current lap
X Stop the RACETIMER.
X Press = or ; to select Reset Lap.
X Press a to reset the lap time to "0.
Z
Deleting all laps Lap evaluation

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER This function is only available if you have
is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are stored at least two laps and have stopped the
deleted. RACETIMER.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If
you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap
does not have to be reset. to select the AMG menu.
X Reset the current lap.
lap evaluation is shown.
X Press a to confirm Reset.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.
Reset Race Timer? appears in the The fastest lap is indicated by flashing
multifunction display. symbol :.
X Press the : button to select Yes and : Lap

press the a button to confirm. ; Lap time
All laps are deleted. = Average lap speed
? Lap length
Overall evaluation
A Top speed during lap
This function is shown if you have stored at
X Press the 9 or : button to select a
least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
different lap evaluation.
overall evaluation is shown.
: RACETIMER overall evaluation

; Total time driven
= Average speed
? Distance covered
A Top speed
Display messages 213
Display messages

General notes
G WARNING
All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and,
where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Failure to repair the condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.

Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's
Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in
this Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function
(Y page 172) and parking (Y page 153).
Hiding display messages

You can hide some display messages with a low priority.
X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.
The display message is cleared.
Display messages with a high priority are shown in red.
You cannot hide display messages of the highest priority. The multifunction display shows
these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.
Message memory
The message memory allows you to call up previous display messages.
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X Confirm with a.
X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted apart from some high-
priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been
rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.
Z
214 Display messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
! G Risk of accident
Currently ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP (Electronic Stability
Unavailable See Program), BAS (Brake Assist), the HOLD function and hill start
Operator's Manual assist are temporarily unavailable.
BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the , and ! warning lamps light up in
the instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
brake hard, for example.
X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering
movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned
above are available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:
X Drive on carefully.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
G Risk of accident
ABS, ESP, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
temporarily unavailable.
the instrument cluster.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

Inoperative See ABS, ESP, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
Operator's Manual unavailable due to a malfunction.
The $ (USA only)/ J (Canada only), ,
and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
G Risk of accident
Currently ESP, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
Unavailable See unavailable.
Operator's Manual BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE Brake may also have failed.
In addition, the and warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
functions listed above.
Z

G Risk of accident
Inoperative See ESP, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable
Operator's Manual due to a malfunction.
In addition, the and warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
T! G Risk of accident
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP, BAS, the
HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a
Inoperative See malfunction.
Operator's Manual
the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.

Check Brake Pad
Wear
$(USA You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
only)J(Canada X Release the parking brake.
only)
Release Parking
Brake

$(USA A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function or
DISTRONIC PLUS is active.
only)J(Canada A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes
only) louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle.
Brake Immediately You cannot start the engine.
X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message
disappears.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it
(Y page 294).
You can restart the engine.
$(USA G Risk of accident

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
only)J(Canada
Additionally, the red $ (USA only)/ J (Canada only)
only) warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning
Check Brake Fluid tone sounds.
Level X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X Engage the parking brake.
X Do not add brake fluid. This will not rectify the malfunction.
G WARNING
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
Z

G USA only: one or more of the main functions in the mbrace system
are malfunctioning.
Tele Aid Canada only: one or more of the main functions of the TELEAID
Inoperative system are malfunctioning.
X USA only: have the mbrace system checked at a qualified
specialist workshop.
X Canada only: have the TELEAID system checked at a qualified
PRE-SAFE G Risk of accident

Function Currently PRE-SAFE Brake is temporarily inoperative if:
Limited See Oper.
Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grill is dirty.
Manual
Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.
Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Ryou switch off ESP (AMG vehicles only).
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.
PRE-SAFE Brake is operational again and the display message

disappears if:
Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion.
Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again.
Ryou switch ESP on again (AMG vehicles only).
Rthe system is within the operating temperature range.

X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grill
(Y page 287).
X Clean the bumpers (Y page 287).
X Restart the engine.
X Wait until the battery is sufficiently charged.
PRE-SAFE G Risk of accident

Functions Limited PRE-SAFE Brake is defective. BAS PLUS or the distance warning
See Operator's signal may also have failed.
Manual

6 G Risk of injury
SRS Malfunction There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint
Service Required System). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument
cluster.
6 G Risk of injury
Front Left SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6
Malfunction warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Service Required or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Front Right
Malfunction
Service Required
6 G Risk of injury
Rear Left SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6
Malfunction warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Service Required or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Rear Right
Malfunction
Service Required
6 G Risk of injury
Rear Center SRS SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lamp
Malfunction also lights up in the instrument cluster.
Service Required X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6 G Risk of injury
Left Side Curtain There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand window
Airbag Malfunction curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the
Service Required or instrument cluster.
Right Side Curtain X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Airbag Malfunction
Service Required
G WARNING
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the system checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Z

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even
Airbag Enabled though:
See Operator's Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the
Manual system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger
seat.
Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied.
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional

weight on the seat.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Open the front-passenger door.
X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X If necessary, secure the child in a child restraint system on a
suitable rear seat.
X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and
interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually
is.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
Observe the 45(Y page 42) indicator lamp and the
multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When
the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Y page 42) has deactivated the
front-passenger air bag.
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabl'd See
Operator's Manual display messages must not appear in the
multifunction display. Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds
until the necessary system checks have been completed and to
make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains lit
or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.

G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp remains off even after performing the above corrective steps, do
not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the front-passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is deactivated during the journey even
Airbag Disabl'd though an adult or a person larger than a certain size is occupying
See Operator's the front-passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the
Manual seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower
than it actually is.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
Observe the 45(Y page 42) indicator lamp and the
multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When
the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Y page 42) has deactivated the
front-passenger air bag.
Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See
Operator's Manual display messages must not appear in the
multifunction display. Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds
until the necessary system checks have been completed and to
make sure that the display messages do not appear in the
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be
occupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains lit
or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating
correctly.
Z
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp remains lit with an adult occupant on the front-passenger seat
even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the front-
passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Lights
i Display messages about LEDs:
This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.

X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Check Left
(Y page 113).
Cornering
Light or Check or
Right Cornering X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Light
b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.

Check Left Low
(Y page 113).
Beam or Check Right
Low Beam or
b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Rear Left
(Y page 113).
Turn
Signal or Check or
Rear Right Turn X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Signal
b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.

Check Front Left
(Y page 113).
Turn
Signal or Check or
Front Right Turn X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Signal

b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is
defective.
Check Left Mirror X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself
Turn
(Y page 113).
Signal or Check
Right Mirror Turn or
Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

Check Center Brake
(Y page 113).
Lamp
or
b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.

Check Left Tail
(Y page 113).
and Brake
Lamps or Check or
Right Tail and X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Brake Lamps
b The left or right-hand high beam is defective.

Check Left High
(Y page 113).
Beam or Check Right
High Beam or
b The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.

Check Left Fog
(Y page 113).
Lamp or Check Right
Fog Lamp or
b The rear fog lamp is defective.

Rear Fog Lamp
(Y page 113).
or
Z

b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
(Y page 113).
Parking
Lamp or Check Front or
Right Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b The backup lamp is defective.

Backup Light
(Y page 113).
or
b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.

Check Front Left
(Y page 113).
Sidemarker
Lamp or Check Front or
Right Sidemarker X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Lamp
b The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.

Check Rear Left
(Y page 113).
Sidemarker
Lamp or Check Rear or
Right Sidemarker X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Lamp
b The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is defective.

Check Left Daytime
(Y page 113).
Running
Light or Check or
Right Daytime X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Running Light
b The active light function is defective.

Active Headlamps
Inoperative
b The exterior lighting is defective.

Malfunction See
Operator's Manual

b The light sensor is defective.
AUTO Lamp Function
Inoperative
b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A
warning tone also sounds.
Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to c or .
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.

Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily

Assist Currently inoperative. Possible causes are:
Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
Operator's Manual Rvisibility
is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully functional again, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message
is shown.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Engine
+ The coolant level is too low.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes when doing so
Check Coolant
(Y page 280).
Level See
X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the
Operator's Manual
engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
G WARNING
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn
if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
! The coolant level is too low. Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the cooling
system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
The display messages and the corresponding symbol that indicate that the coolant level is
too low must not be ignored.
Z

? The coolant is too hot.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
Coolant Level Low
paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Stop Vehicle Turn
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not
Engine Off
blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the
engine. Otherwise, there is a risk of engine damage.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist
workshop immediately.
G WARNING
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
! If the coolant temperature exceeds 248 (120 ) do not continue driving. The engine will

? The engine fan is defective.
X At coolant temperatures under 248 (120 ), drive to the next
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in
mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
# The battery is not being charged.

Possible causes are:
Ra defective alternator
Ra torn poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronics
X Open the hood.
X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.
If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:
4 The oil level has dropped to the minimum level.

A warning tone also sounds.
Check Engine Oil
X Check the oil level, at the latest when next refueling
At Next Refueling
(Y page 279).
X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 279).
X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if
engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop
or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! The oil level is too low. Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. There is a risk of
engine damage.
The display messages and the corresponding symbol that indicate that the oil level is too
low must not be ignored.
Z

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
Fuel Level Low
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.

X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
Gas Cap Loose X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:

X Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
Driving systems
Based on specific criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has determined that

the driver is tired or paying less attention. A warning tone also
Attention Assist: sounds.
Pause! X If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
ATTENTION ASSIST has failed.

Attention Assist
Inoperative
HOLD The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
Off A warning tone also sounds.
X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 172).
The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmly

depressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.
X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function
(Y page 172).

Radar Sensors The radar sensor system is deactivated.
Deactivated See X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 208).
Operator's Manual
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated
Assist Currently and temporarily inoperative if:
Unavailable. See Rthe windshield is dirty in the camera's field of vision.
Operator's Manual Rvisibilityis impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
or Lane Keeping
Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.
Assist Currently
Unavailable. See Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, for example by dirt
Operator's Manual or snow.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again and the display message disappears if:
Rthe system recognizes that the camera is fully operational again.

X Clean the windshield.
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
or Active Lane
Keeping Assist
Inoperative
Z

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily
Currently inoperative if:
Unavailable See Rthe sensors are dirty.
Operator's Manual Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
or Active Blind
Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
Spot Assist
Currently range.
Unavailable See Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
Operator's Manual electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
mirrors.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again
and the display message disappears if:
Rthe radar sensor system is back within the operating
temperature range.
X Clean the sensors (Y page 287).
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
Inoperative or The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior
Active Blind Spot mirrors.
Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 178).

Inoperative X Restart the engine.

Parking Guidance Parking Guidance has been deactivated because:
Canceled Rthe vehicle is skidding.
Rthe sensors are dirty.
Ra malfunction has occurred.

X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 178).
If the parking space symbol is not displayed in the multifunction

display when you are driving at a speed of less than 19 mph
(30 km/h):
X Clean the sensors (Y page 287).
If the parking space symbol is still not displayed in the

multifunction display when you are driving at a speed of less than
19 mph (30 km/h):
Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer

following the recommended path.
X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages
in the multifunction display.
Parking Guidance The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.

Finished The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 161). If it was
Off deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been

Now Available temporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 161).
Z

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and is temporarily inoperative if:

Currently Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grill is dirty.
Unavailable See Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
Operator's Manual Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to
electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio
Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.
Rthe on-board voltage is too low.

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again and the display message
disappears if:
Rthe system is within the operating temperature range.

X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grill
(Y page 287).
X Clean the bumpers (Y page 287).
DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and
Inoperative PRE-SAFE Brake may be inoperative as well.
DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
Override longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.

--- mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 161).

Cruise Control Cruise control is defective.
Inoperative A warning tone also sounds.
Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
--- mph You attempted to save a speed of less than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X If the situation allows, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and
save the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 159).
Tires
G WARNING
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G WARNING
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Z

Check Tire G Risk of accident

Pressure Soon The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant
loss in pressure.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 334).
X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, set to the correct
tire pressure.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire
pressure is correct (Y page 317).
Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display
Then Restart Run message and has not been restarted since.
Flat Indicator X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 317).
Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is defective.
Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressures The tire pressure monitor is measuring the tire pressure.
will be displayed X Drive on.
after driving a The tire pressures appear in the multifunction display after you
few minutes have been driving for a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is defective.

Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire Press. Monitor The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.
Inoperative No The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving
for a few minutes.

Check G Risk of accident
Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
X Correct the tire pressure (Y page 319).
X If necessary, change a wheel (Y page 334).
Caution: G Risk of accident

Tire Malfunction The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The
wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.
Correct The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires or the tire
Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary,
correct the tire pressure (Y page 319).
X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 321).
Tire Press. There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
Sensor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the
X Have the defective tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified
Tire Press. Monitor Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received
Currently Unavail. from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily
malfunctioning.
X Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been solved.
h G Risk of accident
Tire Press. The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly.
Warning Caution A warning tone also sounds.
Tire Malfunction X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
Z

Check Tire Pressure The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.
X Check the tire pressure. If necessary, correct the tire pressure
(Y page 319).
h The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
Correct Tire X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity. If necessary,
Pressure
correct the tire pressure (Y page 319).
Vehicle

Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in
to Start Engine position R or D.
X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
P You have attempted to stop the engine with the Start/Stop button
Shift to 'P' while the transmission was not in position P.
While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have:

Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or
Rswitched off the engine or
Ropened the hood
A tone may also sound at regular intervals. The tone becomes

louder if you attempt to lock the vehicle.
You cannot start the engine.
You can restart the engine.
N The trunk lid is open.

X Close the trunk lid.

M G Risk of accident
The hood is open.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open.

X Close all the doors.
_ G Risk of injury
Rear Left Backrest The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or
Not Latched or Rear right-hand side.
Right Backrest Not X Push the backrest back until it engages.
Latched
D G Risk of accident
Power Steering The power steering is malfunctioning.
Malfunction See You will need to use more force to steer.
Operator's Manual A warning tone also sounds.
X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/

receiver range.
X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol
appears in the multifunction display.
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped
below the minimum.
Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 281).
Z
SmartKey
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.

X Use the correct SmartKey.
Key Does Not
Belong to Vehicle
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.

X Remove the SmartKey.
Take Your Key from
Ignition
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.

Obtain a New Key
The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 74).
Replace Key Battery
The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and

is only a reminder.
Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.
Key The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.
X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you
leave the vehicle.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.

Key Not Detected
(red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle
centrally or start the engine.
X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running

because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 239

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.
X Change the location of the key with the KEYLESS-GO functions
Key Not Detected
in the vehicle.
(White display
message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during
locking.
Key Detected in X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.
Vehicle
KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A

warning tone also sounds.
Remove 'Start' X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the
Button and Insert
desired position.
Key
At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.

X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.
Close Doors to
Lock Vehicle
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belt

7 The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger
After starting the to fasten their seat belts.
engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
belt warning lamp lights
up for six seconds.
7 G Risk of injury
After starting the The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
engine, the red seat
belt warning lamp lights X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
up. In addition, a The warning tone ceases.
warning tone sounds
for up to six seconds.
Z
240 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

7 G Risk of injury
The red seat belt The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
warning lamp lights up
after the engine starts, X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
as soon as the driver's The warning lamp goes out.
or the front-passenger
door is closed. G Risk of injury
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out.
7 G Risk of injury
The red seat belt The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. In
warning lamp flashes addition, you are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have
and an intermittent briefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
audible warning
X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).
sounds.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
G Risk of injury
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. In addition, you are
driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have briefly driven
faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow
them in a secure place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone
ceases.
Safety systems

$ (USA only) G Risk of accident
J (Canada only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
The red brake system X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
warning lamp comes on attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
while the engine is under any circumstances.
running. A warning tone
also sounds.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
display.
Do not add brake fluid. This will not rectify the malfunction.
G WARNING
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system
checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking
the brake system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
Z

The yellow ABS warning ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.
lamp is lit while the
BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP (Electronic Stability
engine is running.
Program), PRE-SAFE Brake, the HOLD function and hill start
assist are therefore also deactivated, for example.
display.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other
systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic
transmission, will not be available.
The yellow ABS warning
ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP, EBD
(electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE Brake, the HOLD
engine is running.
function, hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for
example.
Self diagnosis is not yet complete or the on-board voltage may be
insufficient, for example.
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.

The yellow ABS warning
EBD is faulty. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP, PRE-SAFE,
PRE-SAFE Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist are
engine is running. A
unavailable, for example.
warning tone also
sounds. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
display.
$ (USA only) G Risk of accident

J (Canada only) ABS and ESP are faulty. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-
! SAFE Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, for example,
The red brake warning are unavailable due to a malfunction.
lamp, the yellow ESP The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
and ESP OFF warning functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you
lamps and the yellow brake hard, for example.
ABS warning lamp are ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
lit while the engine is
running.
display.
G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP ESP or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of
warning lamp flashes skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
while the vehicle is in
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
motion.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when
pulling away.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X Do not deactivate ESP.
Exceptions: (Y page 61).
Z

G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP OFF ESP is deactivated. ESP will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts
warning lamp is lit while to skid or if a wheel starts to spin.
the engine is running.
X Reactivate ESP.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP cannot be activated:

X Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
M G Risk of accident
AMG vehicles only:
SPORT handling mode is activated. ESP only stabilizes the vehicle
The yellow SPORT in extreme situations. ESP intervention may not be able to
handling mode warning provide sufficient assistance in such situations and the vehicle
lamp is lit while the may start to skid.
engine is running.
X Reactivate ESP.
If ESP cannot be activated:
X Have ESP checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP and ESP, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE Brake, the HOLD function and
ESP OFF warning hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. ESP will
lamps are lit while the not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel starts to
engine is running. spin.
display.

G Risk of accident
The yellow ESP and ESP, BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
ESP OFF warning unavailable.
lamps are lit while the
engine is running.
ESP will not stabilize the vehicle if it starts to skid or if a wheel
starts to spin.
Self diagnosis is not yet complete.
The functions mentioned above are available again when the
warning lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
display.
$ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake applied.
J (Canada only) X Release the parking brake
The red brake system The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
warning lamp comes on
while the vehicle is
moving. A warning tone
also sounds.
6 G Risk of injury
The red SRS warning The restraint systems are malfunctioning. The air bags or ETDs
lamp is lit while the may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an
engine is running. accident, not be triggered at all.
G WARNING
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.
Z
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the system checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and
unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Engine

; There may be a malfunction, for example:
The yellow Check Rin the engine management
Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system
lights up while the Rin the exhaust system
engine is running.
Rin the ignition system
Rin the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may
be running in emergency mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified
i In some states, you are required by law to immediately visit a
qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check
Engine warning lamp lights up. If in doubt, check whether such
legal regulations apply in the state/province in which you are
currently driving.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed
The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
warning lamp flashes X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
while the vehicle is in display.
motion. In addition, the X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
yellow Check Engine X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler
warning lamp ;
cap.
may light up.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist
workshop.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.

The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
warning lamp lights up
while the engine is
running.

? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is
The red coolant defective.
warning lamp lights up The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a
while the engine is risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
running and the coolant X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,
temperature gauge is paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue
at the start of the scale. driving under any circumstances.
Z

? The coolant level is too low.

The red coolant If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator
warning lamp comes on may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be
while the engine is malfunctioning.
running. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled
sufficiently.
display.
X Allow the engine and coolant to cool.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 280). Observe
the warning notes.
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 (120 ). The
The red coolant airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level
warning lamp comes on may be too low.
while the engine is The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
running. A warning tone X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
also sounds. display.
X Allow the engine and coolant to cool.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 280). Observe
the warning notes.
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the
engine coolant system checked.
G WARNING

Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
! If the coolant temperature exceeds 248 (120 ) do not continue driving. The engine will
Driving systems

G Risk of accident
The red distance The warning is issued if you approach a stationary vehicle or a
warning lamp lights up vehicle driving ahead of you at too high a speed.
while the vehicle is in
motion. A warning tone X Be prepared to brake immediately.
also sounds. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to
brake or take evasive action.
More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 161) and
PRE-SAFE Brake (Y page 65).
Z
Tires

USA only: The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at
The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires.
monitor warning lamp X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
(pressure loss/
malfunction) is lit.
Canada only:
display.
The yellow tire pressure X
Check the tire pressure. If necessary, correct the tire pressure
monitor warning lamp
(Y page 319).
(pressure loss) is lit.
h The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

USA only: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction
The yellow tire pressure display.
monitor warning lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
(pressure loss/
malfunction) flashes for
60 seconds and then
remains lit.
G WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked at least every two weeks when
cold and inflated to the pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's door B-pillar or, if available, the tire pressure label
on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately
1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time
the vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of incompatible
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Z
252
253

Loading guidelines ............................ 254
Stowage areas .................................. 254
Features ............................................. 259
Stowing and features

254 Stowage areas
Useful information or the gross axle weight rating of the

vehicle (including occupants). The values
i This Operator's Manual describes all are specified on the vehicle identification
models and all standard and optional plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door.
equipment of your vehicle available at the Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as
time of publication of the Operator's possible and as low down in the trunk as
Manual. Country-specific differences are possible.
possible. Please note that your vehicle may Rthe load must not protrude above the upper
not be equipped with all features edge of the seat backrests.
described. This also applies to safety- Ralways place the load against the rear or
related systems and functions. front seat backrests. Make sure that the
i Please read the information on qualified seat backrests are securely locked into
specialist workshops (Y page 24). place.
Ralways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
Loading guidelines Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie down. pad sharp edges
G WARNING for protection.
Always fasten items being carried as securely
as possible using fastening materials
appropriate for the weight and size of the Stowage areas
load.
Stowage compartments
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around Important safety notes
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are G WARNING
securely fastened in the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury during a collision
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible.
cargo higher than the seat backrests. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
The trunk is the preferred place to carry seat backrests.
objects. Do not place anything on the rear- Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
window shelf. to prevent stored objects from being thrown
Never drive a vehicle with the trunk open. about and injuring vehicle occupants during
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may Rbraking
enter vehicle interior resulting in Rvehicle maneuvers
unconsciousness and death. Ran accident
The handling characteristics of a laden
vehicle are dependent on the distribution of Stowage compartments in the front
the load within the vehicle. For this reason,
you should observe the following notes when Glove box
transporting a load: i The glove box can be cooled
Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed the (Y page 132).
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
Stowage areas 255

X To open: pull handle : and open glove box X To open: pull down eyeglasses
flap ;. compartment : by the handle.
X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards
Stowage compartment under the armrest
until it engages.
i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a
The glove box can only be locked and USB connection and an AUX IN connection
unlocked using the mechanical key. or a Media Interface are installed in the
stowage compartment. A Media Interface
is a universal interface for mobile audio
equipment, e.g. for an iPod or MP3 player
(see the separate COMAND operating
instructions).
X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the

lock and turn it 90 clockwise to position
2.
X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into
the lock and turn it 90 counter-clockwise
to position 1. X To open: press left-hand button ; or right-
hand button :.
Eyeglasses compartment The stowage compartment opens.
There is a compartment to stow eyeglasses
in the headliner on the driver's side.
Z
256 Stowage areas
Stowage compartment under the front storage bag. In an accident, during hard
seats braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
Storage bags cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
Storage bags are located in the rear

compartment on the driver's and front-
passenger seat backrests.
Parcel nets
X To open: pull handle : up and fold
G WARNING
cover ; forwards.
Parcel nets are intended for storing light-
weight items only, such as road maps, mail,
Stowage compartments in the rear etc.
Stowage compartment in the rear Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
! Do not sit or lean your bodyweight on the parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
armrests when they are folded out as you braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
could damage them. thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
! Close the cover of the stowage injury to vehicle occupants.
compartment before folding the rear seat Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods
armrest back into the seat backrest. in the event of an accident.
Parcel nets are located in the front-passenger

footwell and on the left-hand side of the trunk.
Rear bench seat through-loading

feature
G WARNING
When expanding the cargo volume, always
X To open: fold down seat armrest ;. fold the seat backrests fully forward.
X Fold cover : of the armrest upwards. Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in the
Stowage pockets upright position.
G WARNING In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
Storage bags are intended for storing light- maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
weight items only. inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
securely fastened in the vehicle.
fragile objects may not be transported in the
Stowage areas 257
Always use the cargo tie-down rings. Folding the seat backrest back
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat

backrests can be folded down separately to
increase the trunk capacity.
Folding the seat backrest forward

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
! Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat damaged.
forward if necessary. X Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
X Open the trunk. engages.
X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat
G WARNING
backrest release handle :.
Always lock the seat backrest in its upright
The corresponding rear seat backrest is
position when the rear seat bench is
released.
occupied, or the extended cargo volume is not
X Fully insert the rear seat backrest head
in use.
restraints.
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrest.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
transporting cargo.
i You should always engage the rear seat

X Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards. backrests if you do not need the through-
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat loading feature. This will prevent
back if necessary. unauthorized access to the trunk from the
vehicle interior.
Z
258 Stowage areas
X Adjust the head restraints if necessary

(Y page 96).
X Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings
Observe the following notes on securing

loads: : Bag hook
Rsecure the load using the cargo tie down
rings.
Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure Stowage well under the trunk floor
a load, as these are only intended as an The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are
anti-slip protection for light loads. located in the stowage compartment.
Rdo not route tie downs across sharp edges
or corners.
Rpad sharp edges for protection.
There are four cargo tie down rings in the

trunk.
X To open: pull handle : upwards.
Vehicle with through-loading feature in the rear

bench seat
: Cargo tie down rings
Bag hooks
! The bag hook can bear a maximum load
of 11 lbs (5 kg). Do not use it to secure a
load. X Hook handle : into rain trough ;.
! Unhook the handle before again before
closing the trunk lid and clip it in securely
to prevent the handle flap from protruding.
Otherwise, you could damage the handle.
Features 259
Roof carrier Attaching the roof carrier

G WARNING
Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes-
Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damage
to the vehicle.
Follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly

attached roof rack system or its load could
become detached from the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of X Open covers : carefully in the direction of
220 lb (100 kg).
the arrow.
Take into consideration that when the roof
X Fold covers : upwards.
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the X Only secure the roof carrier to the
vehicle without the roof rack loaded. anchorage points under covers :.
X Observe the manufacturer's installation
! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you instructions.
only use roof carriers that have been tested
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
This helps to prevent damage to the Features
vehicle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such Cup holders
a way that the vehicle will not sustain
damage even when it is in motion.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, G WARNING
ensure that when the roof carrier is In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
installed you can: vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,
Rraise the sliding sunroof fully only use containers that fit into the cup
Ropen holder. Use lids on open containers and do
the panorama roof with power tilt/
not fill containers to a height where the
sliding panel fully
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
Ropen the trunk lid fully
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
! To avoid damaging or scratching the accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants
covers, do not use metallic or hard objects may cause serious personal injury. Liquids
to open them. spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you
or others when contacted during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
Z
260 Features
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects X Swing the rear seat armrest cover back
thrown around in the vehicle interior may down, if necessary.
cause an accident and/or serious personal X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
injury. Swing cup holder ; back until it engages.
Cup holder in the front-compartment

center console Sun visors
Overview of sun visors
G WARNING
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Reflected glare can endanger you and others.
: Cup holders
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weight
on the rear seat armrest when it is folded
down, as you could otherwise damage it.
! Close the cup holder before folding the
: Mirror light
rear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup
holder could be damaged. ; Bracket
= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
? Vanity mirror
A Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor

Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor
is clipped into retainer ; and mirror cover
A has been folded up.
Glare from the side

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.
X Fold down the sun visor.
X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.
X Press release catch :.
X Swing the sun visor to the side.
Cup holder ; folds out forwards.
Features 261
Rear window roller sunblind (Sedan)

G WARNING

X Pull or push the sun visor in the direction of unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
the arrow. access to a vehicle could result in an accident
could:
Sunblinds on the rear side windows Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
vehicle equipment that can be operated
even if the SmartKey is removed from the
ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
adjustment, or the memory function
If children open a door, they could injure other
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
themselves or be injured by following traffic.
X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by Do not expose the child restraint system to
tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the direct sunlight. The child restraint system's
top of the window. metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.
parts.
Do not let it snap back suddenly as this
would damage the automatic roller
G WARNING
mechanism.
When adjusting a roller sunblind, the roller
! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller blind moves up or down. You might become
sunblind hooked in and the side windows trapped in the process.
opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind In the event of danger, briefly press the button
can jump out of the retainers and spring for the roller sunblind to change the roller
back suddenly when driving at high speeds, blind's direction of movement.
e.g. when driving on the freeway. This could
damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either
close the side window or retract the roller Extending/retracting the roller
sunblind before driving at high speeds. sunblind
! Make sure that the roller sunblind can
move freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind
or other objects could be damaged.
Z
262 Features
X To re-install the insert: press insert =

into the holder until it engages.
X To close: press cover : briefly at the
front.
The cover moves back.
Ashtray in the rear-compartment center

console

ignition lock.
X To extend or retract: briefly press
button :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.
Ashtray
X To open: pull cover ; out by its top edge.
Ashtray in the front-compartment X To remove the insert: press release
center console button = and lift the insert up and out.
i You can remove the ashtray insert and X To install the insert: put insert : from
use the resulting compartment for above into the holder and press down into
stowage. the holder until it engages.
! The stowage space under the ashtray is
not heat resistant. Before placing lit
cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that Cigarette lighter
the ashtray is properly engaged. Otherwise,
G WARNING
the stowage space could be damaged.
unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervised
could:
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
engages. excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
X To remove insert: hold insert = by the Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
ribbing at the sides and lift it up ; and out. vehicle equipment that can be operated
Features 263
even if the SmartKey is removed from the 12 V sockets

ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel Points to observe before use
adjustment, or the memory function The sockets can be used for accessories, e.g.
If children open a door, they could injure other lamps or mobile phone chargers with a
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A).
themselves or be injured by following traffic. If you use the sockets for long periods when
Do not expose the child restraint system to the engine is switched off, the battery may
direct sunlight. The child restraint system's discharge.

metal parts, for example, could become very X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the
hot, and the child could be burned on these ignition lock.
parts.
i An emergency cut-out ensures that the
G WARNING on-board voltage does not drop too low. If
Never touch the heating element or sides of the on-board voltage is too low, the power
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the to the sockets is automatically cut. This
knob only. ensures that there is sufficient power to
Make sure any children traveling with you do start the engine.
not injure themselves or start a fire with the
hot cigarette lighter. Socket in the rear-compartment center
console
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the X Pull cover ; out by its top edge.
ignition lock.
X Lift up the cover of socket :.
X To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X Press in cigarette lighter ;.
115 V power socket
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
automatically when the heating element is G WARNING
red-hot. The 115V AC socket operates at high voltage.
X To close: press cover : briefly at the Use the 115V AC socket in the vehicle with
front. the same caution and prudence that you
The cover moves back. exercise when using power outlets at home.
Keep any fluids away from the 115V AC
socket. Do not clean the socket with fluids or
tapered objects. Keep the 115V AC socket
Z
264 Features
cover in the closed position, when not in use. Rthe on-board power supply is within a
Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shock permissible volt range.
and be seriously or even fatally injured. Rthe 12 V socket in the rear is operational
(Y page 263).
G WARNING X Open flap =.
Any device that you connect must have a X Insert the plug of the electronic device into
suitable plug and meet U.S. standards. Never 115 V power socket :.
pull at a cable to disconnect a plug from a
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
115 V AC power socket. Never use a damaged
If indicator lamp ; does not light up,
connection cable. The 115 V AC power socket

must never be connected to another 115 V consult the section on malfunctions.
AC power source. Do not use a converter with X To turn off: disconnect the plug from 115 V
an earthed plug for the 115 V AC power power socket :.
socket. This could cause serious injury to you
Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
and/or other people.
X Close flap =.
G WARNING Possible causes of malfunction:

If the 115V AC socket is damaged or torn out Rthe on-board power supply is not within a
of the trim, do not use or touch the 115V AC permissible volt range.
socket. Using a 115V AC socket that is
Rthe temperature of the DC/AC converter is
damaged or torn out of the trim could cause
temporarily too high.
serious personal injury to you and/or others.
Rsome small electronic devices have a
constant nominal power of less than
150 W, but a very high inrush current.
These devices will not work. If you connect
such a device, 115 V power socket : will
not supply it with power.
If indicator lamp ; still does not light up,
contact a specialist workshop, e.g. an
mbrace
115 V socket : provides an alternating
voltage of 115 V, so that small electronic Important safety notes
devices can be connected. These devices, ! A license agreement must exist in order
such as games consoles, chargers and
to activate the mbrace service. Ensure that
laptops, together should not consume more
your system is activated and ready for use,
than a maximum of 150 W.
and press the MB Info call button to
Requirements for operation of these devices: register. If any of the steps mentioned is
Rthe plug of the electronic device must be not carried out, the system may not be
inserted fully into 115 V power socket :. activated.
Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be
connected must not exceed 150 W.
Features 265
If you have questions about the activation, You can find further information and a
contact one of the following telephone description of all available features under
assistance services: "Owners Online" at http://
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer www.mbusa.com20.
Assistance Center under
1-800-FOR-MERCedes System self-test
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007 After you have switched on the ignition, the
RCanada: Customer Service at system carries out a self-diagnosis.
1-888-923-8367
G WARNING

Shortly after successfully registering with the
A malfunction in the system has been
mbrace service, a user ID and password will
detected if one of the following conditions
be sent to you by post. You can use this
occurs:
password to log in to the mbrace section
under "Owners Online" at http:// Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
www.mbusa.com19. not light up during the system self-
diagnosis.
The mbrace system is available if:
Rthe indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Rithas been activated and is operational. Assistance button does not light up during
Rthe corresponding mobile phone network the system self-diagnosis.
is available for transmitting data to the RThe indicator lamp in the information
Customer Center.
button does not light up during self-
Ra service subscription is available.
diagnosis of the system.
Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged. Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button,
i Determining the location of the vehicle on F Roadside Assistance button or

a map is only possible if there is sufficient information button continues to be lit red
GPS reception and the vehicle position can after the system self-diagnosis.
be forwarded to the Customer Center. RThe Tele Aid Inoperative or Tele Aid
Not Activated message appears in the
The mbrace system multifunction display after the system self-
test.
The mbrace system provides different
services, e.g.: If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
the system may not operate as expected. In
Rautomatic and manual emergency call the event of an emergency, assistance must
RRoadside Assistance call be summoned by other means.
RMB Info call Have the system checked at the nearest
To adjust the volume during an mbrace call, authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact
proceed as follows: the following service hotlines:
X RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Press the W or X button on the
multifunction steering wheel. Center under
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
or
or 1-888-990-9007
X Use the volume controller of the audio RCanada: Customer Service at
system.
1-888-923-8367
19 USA only.
20 USA only.
Z
266 Features
Emergency call Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle

occupants. If the vehicle occupants respond,
Important safety notes the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
! A license agreement must exist in order Center attempts to get more information on
to activate the mbrace service. Ensure that the emergency.
your system is activated and ready for use, i If no vehicle occupant answers, an
and press the MB Info call button to
ambulance is immediately sent to the
register. If any of the steps mentioned is
vehicle.
not carried out, the system may not be
activated. G WARNING
If you have questions about the activation, If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
contact one of the following telephone flashing continuously and no voice
assistance services: connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center was established, then the
mbrace system could not initiate an
Assistance Center under
emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
phone network is not available).
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at The message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
1-888-923-8367
10 seconds.
An emergency call is dialed automatically if Should this occur, assistance must be
an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is summoned by other means.
triggered.
i An mbrace emergency call that has been Making an emergency call
initiated automatically cannot be
terminated by the customer.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually.
As soon as the emergency call has been
initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The Connecting Call message
appears on the multifunction display.
The audio output is muted.
Once a connection has been established, the
Call Connected message appears in the X To initiate an emergency call
multifunction display. manually: press cover : briefly to open
All important information on the emergency it.
is transmitted, for example: X Press SOS button ; briefly.
Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as The indicator lamp in SOS button ;
determined by the GPS system) flashes until the emergency call is
Rvehicle identification number concluded.
Rinformation on the type of emergency
Shortly after the emergency call has been

initiated, a voice connection is automatically
established between the Mercedes-Benz
Features 267
X Wait for a voice connection to the If a cellular phone network is available and
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace
Center. system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz
X After the emergency call is ended, close Customer Assistance Center, for example:
cover :. Rcurrent location of the vehicle
Rvehicle identification number
G WARNING
If you feel in any way in jeopardy when in the i The display of the audio system or
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, COMAND shows that an mbrace call is
active. During the call, you can change to

vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
pressed the SOS button. Carefully leave the button on COMAND, for example.
vehicle and move to a safe location. The Voice output is not available.
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
A voice connection is established between
will automatically contact local emergency
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
officials with the vehicle's approximate
Center and the vehicle occupants.
location if they receive an automatic SOS
X Describe the type of assistance needed.
signal and cannot make voice contact with the
vehicle occupants. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center either sends a qualified Mercedes-
Roadside Assistance button Benz technician or organizes for your vehicle
to be transported to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged
for services such as repair work and/or
towing. Further details are available in your
mbrace manual.
i The mbrace system failed to initiate a
Roadside Assistance call if:
Rthe indicator lamp in Roadside
Assistance button : is flashing
continuously.
Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
X Press and hold Roadside Assistance
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
button : for more than two seconds.
established.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz
This may be because the corresponding
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator
mobile phone network is not available.
lamp in Roadside Assistance button :
flashes while the call is active. The The Call Failed message appears in the
Connecting Call message appears in the multifunction display.
multifunction display. The audio output is X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
muted. multifunction steering wheel.
If a connection can be established, the Call or
Connected message appears in the X Press the corresponding button for ending
multifunction display. a phone call on the audio system or on
COMAND.
Z
268 Features
MB Info call button and on further products and services offered

by Mercedes-Benz USA.
Further details on the mbrace system can be
found under http://www.mbusa.com21.
Log in under "Owners Online".
i The mbrace system failed to initiate an
MB Info call if:
Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call
button : is flashing continuously.

Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center was
X Press and hold MB Info call button : for established.
more than two seconds. This may be because the corresponding
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz mobile phone network is not available.
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator The Call Failed message appears in the
lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while multifunction display.
the connection is being established. The
X To end a call: press the ~ button on the
Connecting Call message appears in the
multifunction steering wheel.
multifunction display. The audio output is
muted. or
X Press the corresponding button for ending
If a connection can be established, the Call
a phone call on the audio system or on
Connected message appears in the
COMAND.
If a cellular phone network is available and
there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace Call priority
system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Customer Assistance Center, for example: Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency
Rcurrent location of the vehicle call can still be initiated. In this case, an
Rvehicle identification number emergency call will take priority and override
all other active calls.
i The display of the audio system or The indicator lamp of the respective button
COMAND shows that an mbrace call is flashes until the call is ended. An emergency
active. During the call, you can change to call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI Benz Customer Assistance Center. All other
button on COMAND, for example. calls can be ended by pressing the ~
Voice output is not available. button on the multifunction steering wheel or
A voice connection is established between the corresponding button for ending a
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance telephone call on the audio system or on
Center and the vehicle occupants. You can COMAND.
obtain information on how to operate your i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio output
vehicle's systems, on the location of the is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, connected to COMAND. However, if you
want to use your mobile phone, we
21 USA only.
Features 269
recommend that you do this only when the The customer service representative
vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. determines a suitable driving route based on
your current vehicle position and the desired
Downloading destinations in COMAND destination and guides you live through the
current sections of the route.
i Information on the components and
operating principles of COMAND can be
Search & Send
found in the separate COMAND operating
instructions. "Search & Send" is a destination entry
service. You can find further information on

i You can only use the Destination
"Search & Send" in the separate COMAND
Download function if the vehicle is
operating instructions.
equipped with a navigation system.
Destination Download gives you access to a Remote vehicle unlocking
database with over 15 million points of
interest (POIs)/important destinations that If you have unintentionally locked your
can be downloaded onto the navigation vehicle (e.g. the SmartKey is still in the
system of your vehicle. If you know the vehicle) and a replacement SmartKey is not
destination, you can download the address or available, the vehicle can be opened by a
obtain the location of points of interest Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
(POIs)/important destinations in the The vehicle can be opened remotely up to four
surrounding area. days after the ignition was last switched off.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance X Contact the following service hotlines:
to the address entered. RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
The system calculates the route and Assistance Center under 1-800-FOR-
subsequently starts the route guidance with MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
the address entered. 1-888-990-9007
RCanada: Customer Service at
i If you select No, the address can be stored
in the address book. 1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
i The Destination Download function is X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed
available if the corresponding mobile upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer
phone network is available and data Assistance Center.
transfer is possible.
X Pull the trunk lid handle for at least 20
Route Assistance seconds until the indicator lamp in the SOS
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS button (Y page 266) flashes.
Package and cannot be purchased The Connecting Call message appears
separately. on the multifunction display.
i You can also use the Route Assistance Alternatively, the vehicle can also be opened
function if your vehicle is not equipped with via the Internet or an iPhone in the "Owners
a navigation system. Online" section using your ID number and
password22.
Within the framework of this service, you
receive a professional and reliable form of i Vehicle remote unlocking is only possible
navigation support without having to leave if the corresponding mobile phone network
your vehicle. is accessible.
22 USA only.
Z
270 Features
The SOS button flashes and the Service for recovering a stolen vehicle
Connecting Call message appears in the
If your vehicle has been stolen:
multifunction display to confirm that the
command for vehicle remote unlocking has X Notify the police.
been received. The police will issue a numbered incident
If you pull the trunk handle for more than report.
20 seconds before receiving authorization X This number will be forwarded to the
for remote unlocking, you must wait 15 Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
minutes before you can pull the trunk lid Center together with your PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
handle again.
Center then attempts to locate the mbrace
Remote vehicle locking system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center contacts you and the
If you forget to lock your vehicle but are no local law enforcement agency if the vehicle
longer in the vicinity of the vehicle, it can be is located. However, only the law
locked for you by the Mercedes-Benz enforcement agency is informed of the
Customer Assistance Center. location of the vehicle.
The vehicle can be locked remotely up to four
days after the ignition was last switched off. i If the anti-theft alarm system is active for
longer than 30 seconds, mbrace
X Contact the following service hotlines:
automatically informs the Mercedes-Benz
RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
Customer Assistance Center.
Assistance Center under 1-800-FOR-
MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
1-888-990-9007 Garage door opener
1-888-923-8367 Important safety notes
You will be asked for your PIN. The HomeLink garage door opener
The next time you are in your vehicle and integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you
switch on the ignition, the Tele Aid Doors to operate up to three different door and gate
locked by remote control message systems.
appears in the multifunction display. i Certain garage door drives are
Alternatively, the vehicle can also be locked incompatible with the integrated garage
via the Internet or an iPhone in the "Owners door opener. If you have difficulty
Online" section using your ID number and programming the integrated garage door
password. opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-
i The vehicle valet locking feature is Benz Center or call one of the following
available when the relevant mobile phone telephone hotlines:
network is available and data connection is RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer
possible. Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
1-800-387-0100
G WARNING
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
Features 271
operator, make sure people and objects are 2. this device must accept any interference
out of the way of the device to prevent received, including interference that may
potential harm or damage. When cause undesired operation of the device.
programming a garage door opener, the door Any unauthorized modification to this
moves up or down. When programming a gate device could void the user's authority to
operator, the gate opens or closes. operate the equipment.
Do not use the integrated remote control with IC: 279B-HMIHL4
any garage door opener that lacks safety stop
and reverse features as required by U.S. Programming the integrated garage

federal safety standards (this includes any door opener on the rear-view mirror
garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that Programming
cannot detect an object - signaling the door G WARNING
to stop and reverse - does not meet current
Only press the transmitter button on the
U.S. federal safety standards.
integrated garage door opener if there are no
When programming a garage door opener, persons or objects present within the sweep
park vehicle outside the garage. of the garage door. People could otherwise be
Do not run the engine while programming the injured by the movement of the door.
integrated remote control. Inhalation of
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness
and possible death. All exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and possible death.
i USA only:
Integrated garage door opener on the rear-view
1. This device may not cause harmful mirror
interference, and
Garage door remote control A is not part of
2. this device must accept any interference this integrated garage door opener.
cause undesired operation. i To achieve the best result, insert new
Any unauthorized modification to this batteries in garage door remote control
device could void the user's authority to A before programming.
operate the equipment. X Before programming for the first time, clear
FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 the memory of the integrated garage door
opener (Y page 274).
i Canada only:
ignition lock.
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
Z
272 Features
XPress and hold one of transmitter view mirror with the receiver of the garage
buttons ; to ? on the integrated garage door system.
door opener.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Indicator lamp : starts to flash yellow
after a short period. Your vehicle must be within range of the
garage or gate opener drive. Make sure that
i Indicator lamp : flashes yellow
neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects
immediately after the transmitter button are present within the sweep of the door or
has been stored for the first time. If the gate.
transmitter button has already been
Observe the safety notes when performing
programmed, indicator lamp : does not

the rolling code synchronization.
flash yellow until 10 seconds have elapsed.
XRelease the transmitter button. ignition lock.
XPoint transmitter button B of garage door X Press the programming button of the door
remote control A towards the transmitter or gate drive (see the door or gate drive
buttons on the rear-view mirror at a operating instructions, e.g. under
distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm). "Programming of additional remote
i The distance required between garage controls").
door remote control A and the integrated i You now normally have 30 seconds to
garage door opener depends on the system initiate the next step.
of the garage door drive. You might require X Press the previously programmed
several attempts. You should test every
transmitter button of the HomeLink
position for at least 25 seconds before
integrated garage door opener repeatedly
trying another position.
in succession until the door opens.
X Press and hold transmitter button B on The rolling code synchronization is then
garage door remote control A until complete.
indicator lamp : lights up green.
Programming is complete if indicator Notes on programming the remote
lamp : lights up or flashes green. control
X Release transmitter button ;, = or ? on
Canadian radio frequency laws require a
"break" (or interruption) of the transmission
the integrated garage door opener and the
signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.
transmitter button on garage door remote
These signals may not therefore last long
control B.
enough for the integrated garage door opener
If indicator lamp : lights up red: to recognize the signal during programming.
X
Comparable with Canadian law, some U.S.
Repeat the programming procedure for the
garage door openers also have a built-in
transmitter button. When doing so, vary the
"interruption".
distance between the garage door remote
control and the rear-view mirror. If you live in Canada or have difficulties
programming the garage door opener
i If the indicator lamp flashes green after (regardless of where you live) when using the
successful programming, the garage door programming steps (see above), proceed as
system is operating on a rolling code. After follows:
programming, you must synchronize the
garage door opener integrated in the rear-
Features 273
X Press and hold one of transmitter Rifanother remote control for the same
buttons ; to ? of the integrated garage garage door drive is available, repeat the
door opener. same programming steps with this remote
Indicator lamp : starts to flash yellow control. Before you perform the steps of the
after a short period. operation, make sure that there are new
X Release the transmitter button. batteries in the garage door remote
control.
X Press transmitter button B of the garage
Rnote that some remote controls only
door remote control and hold for two
transmit for a limited amount of time (the
seconds, then release for two seconds,

indicator lamp on the remote control goes
then press again and hold for two seconds.
out). Press the remote control button again
X Repeat this sequence on transmitter
before it stops transmitting.
button B of the garage door remote Ralign the antenna cable of the garage door
control until indicator lamp : is green.
opener unit. This can improve signal
Repeat the process if indicator lamp : reception/transmission.
turns red.
X Continue with the other programming Opening/closing the garage door
steps (see above).
Once programmed, the integrated garage
Problems when programming door opener will assume the function of the
If you are experiencing problems garage door system's remote control. Please
programming the integrated garage door also read the operating instructions for the
opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of garage door system.
the following instructions: X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
Rcheck the transmission frequency of ignition lock.

garage door remote control A (usually X Press transmitter button ;, = or ? in the
found on the reverse side of the remote overhead control panel that you have
control). programmed to operate the garage door.
The integrated garage door opener is Garage door system with a fixed code:
compatible with devices that can be indicator lamp : lights up green.
operated with units in a frequency range of Garage door system with a rolling code:
280 to 390 MHz. indicator lamp : flashes green.
Rchange the batteries in garage door remote i The transmitter will transmit a signal for
control A. This increases the probability as long as the transmitter button is being
that garage door remote control A will pressed. After a maximum of ten seconds,
send a strong and precise signal to the transmission is terminated and indicator
integrated garage door opener on the rear- lamp : flashes yellow. Press the
view mirror. transmitter button again, if necessary.
Rwhen programming, hold garage door
remote control A at different distances
and angles from the transmitter button that
you are programming. Try different angles
at a distance between 2 and 12 inches (5
to 30 cm) or the same angle at varying
distances.
Z
274 Features
Clearing the memory of the integrated

garage door opener on the rear-view
mirror
ignition lock.
X Press transmitter buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp lights up yellow.
X Press and hold transmitter buttons ;
and ? until the indicator lamp turns green.
i Make sure that you clear the memory of

the integrated garage door opener before
selling the vehicle.
Features 275
Frequencies for the garage door opener

The radio type approval number and the frequency range for the garage door opener can be
found on the Internet at: http://www.mercedes-benz.de/betriebsanleitung.
Compass
Calling up the compass
The compass shows which direction the

vehicle is currently traveling in: N, NE, E, SE,
S, SW, W or NW.
South America zone map

X Press a round pin into opening
To obtain a correct display in rear-view
=(Y page 275) for approximately three
mirror :, the compass must be calibrated
seconds.
and the magnetic field zone must be set.
The currently selected zone appears in
compass display ;(Y page 275).
Setting the compass
X To select the zone: press a round pin into
X Determine your position using the following opening =(Y page 275) repeatedly until
zone maps. the desired zone is selected.
The zone has been selected when compass
display ;(Y page 275) shows the heading.
This takes a few seconds.
North America zone map

Z
276 Features
Calibrating the compass

X Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in a circle without impeding the
remaining traffic.
In order to calibrate the compass correctly,
observe the following points:
Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not
in the vicinity of steel constructions or high-
voltage transmission lines.
Rswitch off electrical consumers, for

X Slide the seat backwards.
example, the climate control, windshield
wipers or rear window defroster. X To install: place the floormat in the
Rclose all doors and the trunk lid. footwell.
X Switch the ignition on. X Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X Press a round pin into opening = X To remove: pull the floormat off
(Y page 275) for approximately six seconds retainers ;.
until the C symbol appears in compass X Remove the floormat.
display ; (Y page 275).
X Drive a full circle at approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) to 6 mph (10 km/h).
Once the calibration has been successfully
completed, the current direction appears in
compass display ; (Y page 275).
Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNING
Whenever you are using a floormat, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormat is securely fastened.
The floormat should always be securely
fastened using the fastening equipment.
Before driving off, check that the floormat is
securely in place and adjust it if necessary. A
loose floormat could slip and hinder proper
functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of each
other as this may impair pedal movement.
277

Engine compartment ........................ 278
Maintenance ...................................... 282
Care .................................................... 283
Maintenance and care

278 Engine compartment
Useful information G WARNING

To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
i This Operator's Manual describes all moving parts when the hood is open and the
models and all standard and optional engine is running.
equipment of your vehicle available at the The radiator fan may continue to run for
time of publication of the Operator's approximately 30 seconds or may even
Manual. Country-specific differences are restart after the engine has been turned off.
possible. Please note that your vehicle may Stay clear of fan blades.
described. This also applies to safety- G WARNING
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
i Please read the information on qualified ignition system. Because of the high voltage,
specialist workshops (Y page 24). it is dangerous to touch any components
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system:
Engine compartment Rwith the engine running
Hood Rwhile starting the engine
Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
Opening the hood engine is turned manually
G WARNING
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle switched off.
is in motion. Otherwise, the hood could be
forced open by passing air flow. G WARNING
This could cause the hood to come loose and The windshield wipers and wiper linkage
injure you and/or others. could be set in motion.
When the hood is open, you or others could
G WARNING be injured by the wiper linkage.
Do not open the hood when the engine is Make sure that the windshield wipers are
overheated. You could be seriously injured. switched off. Remove the SmartKey or make
Observe the coolant temperature gauge to sure that no ignition position has been
determine whether the engine may be selected with KEYLESS-GO. All indicator
overheated. If you see flames or smoke lamps must be off in the instrument cluster.
coming from the engine compartment, move
away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine
has cooled. If necessary, call the fire
department.
G WARNING
There is a risk of injury if the hood is open,
even if the engine is not running.
Some engine components can become very
hot.
To avoid the risk of burns, only touch those
components described in the Operator's
Manual and observe the relevant safety notes.
Engine compartment 279
X Pull release lever : for the hood. Engine oil

The hood is released.
Notes on the oil level
! Make sure that the windshield wipers are
Depending on the driving style, the vehicle
not folded away from the windshield. You
consumes up to 0.9 US qts. (0.8 l) of oil over
could otherwise damage the windshield
a distance of 600 miles (1000 km). The oil
wipers or the hood.
consumption may be higher than this when
the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at
high engine speeds.
Checking the oil level using the oil

dipstick
X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch

handle ; up and lift the hood.
Once you have lifted the hood about
15 inches (40 cm), it is automatically
opened the rest of the way and held open
by the gas-filled struts.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.
To check the oil level with the engine at
Closing the hood normal operating temperature, switch the
G WARNING engine off and wait for approximately five
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
minutes.
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
you do not close the hood on anyone. tube.

Make sure the hood is securely engaged X Wipe off oil dipstick :.
before driving off. Do not continue driving if X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide
the hood can no longer engage after an tube to the stop, and take it out again.
accident, for example. The hood could If the level is between MIN mark = and
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct.
motion and injure you and/or others.
X If the oil level has sunk to MIN mark = or
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height below, add
of approximately 8 inches (20 cm). 0.55 to 1.1 US qt(0.5 to 1.0 liter) engine oil.
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not Adding engine oil
properly engaged. Open it again and close
it with a little more force. G WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot
engine parts, it may ignite and you could burn
Z
280 Engine compartment
yourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hot X Turn cap : counterclockwise and remove
engine parts. it.
X Add engine oil.
H Environmental note If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If on the oil dipstick,
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful add 0.55 to 1.1 US qt (0.5 to 1.0 l) engine
to the environment. oil.
X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
! Use only engine oils and oil filters that clockwise.
have been approved for vehicles equipped Ensure that the cap locks into place
with a service system. A list of the engine securely.
oils and oil filters tested and approved in
X Check the oil level again with the oil

accordance with the Mercedes-Benz
dipstick (Y page 279).
Specifications for Service Products can be
called up by visiting http:// Further information on engine oil
www.mbusa.com (USA only). More (Y page 349).
information about tested and approved
engine oils and oil filters is available from
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Checking and adding other service
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is products
caused by the following: Checking the coolant level
Rusing engine oils and oil filters which
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
have not been specifically approved for
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
the service system.
down.
Rreplacing the engine oil or oil filter after
X Turn the SmartKey to position
the replacement interval required by the
2 (Y page 137) in the ignition lock.
service system has elapsed
Rusing engine oil additives.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (Y page 137).
! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is X Check the coolant temperature display in
above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too the instrument cluster.
much oil has been added. This can lead to The coolant temperature must be below
damage to the engine or the catalytic 158 (70 ).
converter. Have excess oil siphoned off.
G WARNING
In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:
Ruse extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system, or
if the coolant temperature display indicates
that the coolant is overheated.
Rdo not remove the pressure cap on the
coolant reservoir if the coolant temperature
is above 158 (70 ). Allow the engine to
cool down before removing the cap. The
Example: engine oil cap
Engine compartment 281
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is Windshield washer system and
under pressure. headlamp cleaning system
Rusing a rag, slowly turn the cap The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess windshield washer system and the headlamp
pressure. If opened immediately, scalding cleaning system.
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under
i Vehicle components and their service
pressure.
products must match. You should,
Rdo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
therefore, only use products that have been
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
Information on tested and approved
engine parts.
products can be obtained at any authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
G WARNING
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
! At temperatures below freezing: always

fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mix of
X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter- water and windshield washer concentrate
clockwise and allow excess pressure to (e.g. MB WinterFit). There is otherwise a
escape. risk of damaging the windshield washer
X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and system/headlamp cleaning system.
remove it. ! Only use washer fluid concentrate which
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar
is suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
= in the filler neck when cold, there is
washer fluid concentrate could damage the
enough coolant in coolant expansion plastic lenses of the headlamps.
tank ;.
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to
If the coolant is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the
level sensor may be damaged.
neck when warm, there is enough coolant
in coolant expansion tank ;. i Add windshield washer concentrate, e.g.
X If necessary, add coolant that has been MB SummerFit, to the washer fluid all year
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. round.
X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far
as it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(Y page 350).
Z
282 Maintenance
Example: washer fluid reservoir The brake fluid level is correct if it is between
X Mix the windshield washer fluid in a MIN marking ; and MAX marking : on the
container beforehand. brake fluid reservoir.
X At temperatures above freezing: fill the
washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water
and windshield washer concentrate (e.g. Maintenance
MB SummerFit). Service interval display
X At temperatures below freezing: fill the
washer fluid reservoir with a mix of water Service messages
and windshield washer concentrate (e.g. Information on the type of service and service
MB WinterFit). Adapt the mixing ratio to the intervals (see separate Service Booklet).
outside temperature. For information on
the mixing ratio (Y page 351). You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
X Add the premixed washer fluid.
The service interval display informs you of the
X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck next service due date.
until it engages. If a service due date has been exceeded, you
also hear an acoustic signal.
Brake fluid level The multifunction display shows a service
! If you notice that the brake fluid level in message for a few seconds, e.g.
the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the Next service A due in .. days
MIN mark or less, check the brake system Service A due
immediately for leaks. Also check the Service A overdue by ... days
thickness of the brake linings. Contact a The letter indicates which service is due. A
qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an stands for a minor service and B for a major
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center service. A number or another letter may be
immediately. displayed after the letter. This figure indicates
Do not add brake fluid. This does not any necessary additional maintenance work
correct the error. to be performed.
Only check the brake fluid level when the You can obtain further information from an
vehicle is stationary and on a level surface. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The service interval display does not take into
account any periods of time during which the
battery is disconnected.
Care 283
Maintaining the time-dependent service lead to increased wear and damage to the
schedule: major assemblies or the vehicle.
X Note down the service due date displayed Driving abroad
in the multifunction display before
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network
disconnecting the battery.
is also available in other countries. You can
or obtain further information from any
X Subtract the battery disconnection periods authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
from the service date shown on the display
after reconnecting the battery.
Care
i The service interval display does not

provide any information regarding the Notes on care
engine's oil level. Observe the notes on the
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
engine oil level (Y page 279).
retaining the quality in the long term.
Hiding a service message Use care products and cleaning agents
recommended and approved by Mercedes-
X Press the % or a button on the Benz.
steering wheel.
G WARNING
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Displaying service messages Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
X Switch on the ignition. Always follow the instructions on the
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel particular container. Always open your
to select the Serv. menu. vehicle's doors or windows when cleaning the
inside.
X Press 9 or : to select the ASSYST
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
PLUS submenu and press a to confirm.
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
The service due date appears in the
multifunction display. Always lock away cleaning products and keep
them out of reach of children.
Please bear the following in mind ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any
of the following:
Resetting service interval display
Rdry, rough or hard cloths
If the qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Center, carried out the Rabrasive cleaning agents
maintenance work, the service interval Rsolvents
display will be reset. Rcleaning agents containing solvents
Further information, on maintenance for Do not scrub.
example, can be obtained at an authorized Do not touch the surfaces or protective
Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice
Mercedes-Benz. scraper. You could otherwise scratch or
! If the service interval display has been damage the surfaces and protective film.
reset unintentionally, have the setting
corrected at a Mercedes-Benz Center.
Have service work carried out as described
in the Service Booklet. This may otherwise
Z
284 Care
H Environmental note Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning are fully closed.

cloths in an environmentally responsible Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off
manner. (the OFF button has been pressed).
Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended 0.
period straight after cleaning it, particularly Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause After using an automatic car wash, wipe off
increased corrosion of the brake discs and wax from the windshield and the wiper
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you blades. This will prevent smears and reduce
should drive for a few minutes after wiping noises caused by residue on the
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and windshield.

the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.
The vehicle can then be parked. Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Exterior care Observe the legal requirements in all
Automatic car wash countries concerned.
X Do not use hot water and do not wash the
G WARNING vehicle in direct sunlight.
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing X Use a soft sponge to clean.
the vehicle. This could cause an accident. For X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
this reason, you must drive particularly
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
carefully after washing the vehicle until the
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a
brakes have dried.
gentle jet of water.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car X Do not point the water jet directly towards
wash from the very start. the air inlet.
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the
! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special sponge frequently.
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
damage the paintwork or plastic parts. thoroughly with a chamois.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash. paintwork.
! Make sure that the automatic When using the vehicle in winter, remove all
traces of road salt deposits carefully and as
transmission is in position N when washing
soon as possible.
your vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The
vehicle could be damaged if the
transmission is in another position. Power washers
! Make sure that: G WARNING

Do not use power washers with circular-jet
nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in
particular the tires. You could otherwise
damage the tires and cause an accident.
Care 285
! Always maintain a distance of at least X Remove impurities immediately, where

11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.
power washer nozzle. Information about X Soak insect remains with insect remover
the correct distance is available from the and rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
equipment manufacturer. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse
Move the power washer nozzle around off the treated areas afterwards.
when cleaning your vehicle. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,
Do not aim directly at any of the following: oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently
Rtires with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or
Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. lighter fluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
Relectrical components

X Use silicone remover to remove wax.
Rbattery
Rconnectors ! Do not affix:
Rlights Rstickers
Rseals Rfilms
Rtrim elements Rmagnetic plates or similar items
Rventilation slots
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
Damaged seals or electrical components damage the paintwork.
can lead to leaks or failures.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products
Cleaning the wheels recommended and approved by Mercedes-
! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products Benz. This is the case approximately every
to remove brake dust. This could damage three to five months, depending on the
wheel bolts and brake components. climate conditions and the care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or the
! Do not park the vehicle for an extended
paint has become dull, the paint cleaner
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
Benz should be used.
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and Do not use these care products in the sun or
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you on the hood while the hood is hot.
should drive for a few minutes after X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB
cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and Touch-Up Stick, to correct smaller areas of
the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. paint damage quickly and provisionally.
The vehicle can then be parked.
Matte finish care
Cleaning the paintwork
If your vehicle has a clear matte finish,
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected observe the following instructions in order to
by corrosion and damage caused by avoid damage to the paintwork due to
inadequate care cannot always be completely incorrect care.
repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified These notes also apply to light alloy wheels
specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized with a clear matte finish.
Z
286 Care
! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy X Clean the inside and outside of the
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning
shine. agent that is recommended and approved
by Mercedes-Benz.
! The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matte ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
effect: solvents or cleaning agents containing
RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable solvents to clean the inside of the windows.
materials. Do not touch the insides of the windows
RFrequent use of car washes. with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or
ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging
RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.
the windows.
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or ! Clean the water drainage channels of the
polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. windshield and the rear window at regular
wax. These products are only suitable for intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals
high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles and pollen may under certain
with matte finish leads to considerable circumstances prevent water from draining
surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). away. This can lead to corrosion damage
Always have paintwork repairs performed and damage to electronic components.
at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Cleaning the wiper blades
! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
treatment under any circumstances.
G WARNING
Before cleaning the windshield or wiper
i The vehicle should preferably be washed blades, switch off the windshield wipers and
by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
and plenty of water. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
i Use only insect remover and car shampoo Start/Stop button repeatedly until all
from the range of recommended and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have
approved Mercedes-Benz care products. gone out. The windshield wipers could
otherwise move and injure you.
Cleaning the windows ! Only fold the windshield wipers away from
G WARNING the windshield when vertical. Otherwise,
Before cleaning the windshield or wiper you will damage the hood.
blades, switch off the windshield wipers and ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. the wiper blade could be damaged.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button repeatedly until all
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster have do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the
gone out. The windshield wipers could graphite coating could be damaged. This
otherwise move and injure you. could cause wiper noise.
! Only fold the windshield wipers away from

the windshield when vertical. Otherwise,
you will damage the hood.
Care 287
X Fold the wiper arms away from the about the correct distance is available from
windshield. the equipment manufacturer.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a
damp cloth. Cleaning the rear view camera
X Fold the windshield wipers back again
before switching on the ignition.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if
the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
Cleaning the exterior lighting

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior
lights with a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths. X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean
camera lens :.
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning
cloths which are suitable for plastic light ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area
lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or around the rear view camera with a power
cleaning cloths could scratch or damage washer.
the plastic light lenses.
Cleaning the exhaust tail pipes
Cleaning the sensors
Impurities combined with the effects of road
grit and corrosive environmental factors may
cause flash rust to form on the surface. You
can restore the original shine of the exhaust
tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in
winter and after washing.
! Do not clean the exhaust tail pipes with
alkaline-based cleaning agents, such as
wheel cleaner.
X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chrome
care product tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
X Clean sensors : of the driving systems

with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
! When cleaning the sensors with a power
washer, maintain a distance between the
vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm). Information
Z
288 Care
Interior care X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free

cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
Cleaning the display X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that products recommended and approved by
it is switched off and has cooled down. Mercedes-Benz.
X Clean the display surface using a The surface may change color temporarily.
commercially-available microfiber cloth Wait until the surface is dry again.
and TFT/LCD display cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
microfiber cloth. selector lever
X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
! For cleaning, do not use any of the

following: leather care agents that have been
Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline Benz.
Rabrasive cleaning agents
Rcommercially-available household Cleaning genuine wood and trim
cleaning agents elements
These may damage the display surface. Do X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with
not put pressure on the display surface
a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber
when cleaning. This could lead to
cloth.
irreparable damage to the display.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
Cleaning the plastic trim products recommended and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.
G WARNING
! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
When cleaning the steering wheel boss and such as tar remover, wheel cleaners,
dashboard, do not use cockpit sprays or polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk
cleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaning of damaging the surface.
agents containing solvents cause the surface
to become porous, and as a result, plastic ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
parts may break away and be thrown around The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
the interior when an air bag is deployed, which mostly made of anodized aluminum and
may result in severe injuries. can lose their shine if chrome polish is
used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead
! Do not affix the following to plastic when cleaning the trim pieces.
surfaces: If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
Rstickers dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you
Rfilms are unsure as to whether the trim pieces
Rscented
are chrome-plated or not, consult an
oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent Cleaning the seat covers
or sunscreen to come into contact with the ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean
plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality
genuine leather, artificial leather or
look of the surfaces.
Alcantara covers. If used often, these can
damage the cover.
Care 289
! Observe the following when cleaning: Cleaning the headliner and carpets
Rclean genuine leather covers carefully X Headliner: use a soft brush or a cleaning
with a damp cloth and then wipe the agent recommended and approved by
covers down with a dry cloth. Make sure Mercedes-Benz to remove heavy soiling.
that the leather does not become
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile
soaked. It may otherwise become rough
and cracked. Only use leather care cleaning agents recommended and
agents that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can
obtain these from a qualified specialist
workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service

center.
Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat
sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
Leave the seat to dry afterwards.
Cleaning results depend on the type of
dirt and how long it has been there.
Rclean Alcantara covers with a damp
cloth. Make sure you wipe entire seat
sections to avoid leaving visible lines.
i Note that regular care is essential to
ensure that the appearance and comfort of
the covers is retained over time.
Cleaning the seat belts

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap
solution.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts
by warming them above 176 (80 ) or
placing them in direct sunlight.
G WARNING
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Z
290
291

Where will I find...? ........................... 292
Flat tire .............................................. 293
Battery ............................................... 298
Jump-starting .................................... 301
Towing and tow-starting .................. 302
Fuses .................................................. 305
Breakdown assistance
292 Where will I find...?
Useful information
i This Operator's Manual describes all

equipment of your vehicle available at the
time of publication of the Operator's
Example: first-aid kit in an open stowage space
i Please read the information on qualified X Remove first-aid kit :.
i Check the expiration date on the first-aid

kit at least once a year. Replace the
Where will I find...? contents if necessary, and replace missing
contents.
First-aid kit
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
first-aid kit is located either in an open Vehicle tool kit
stowage space or behind the cover on the left
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the
side.
stowage well under the trunk floor.
X Lift the trunk floor up (Y page 258).
Example: first-aid kit behind the side trim panel

: Vehicle tool kit tray
X To open the cover: turn rotary knob : in ; Stowage well
the direction of the arrow and fold down
= Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency
cover ;.
spare wheel
X Remove the first-aid kit.
The vehicle tool kit contains:
Rfolding wheel chock
Rfuse allocation chart
Rjack
Rone pair of gloves
Flat tire 293
Rlug wrench X Firmly depress the parking brake.

Rtowing eye X Bring the front wheels into the straight-
ahead position.
X Vehicles with manual transmission:
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel
engage first or reverse gear.
The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can X Vehicles with automatic transmission:
be found in the stowage well under the trunk move the selector lever to P.
floor.
X Switch off the engine.
X Lift the trunk floor up (Y page 258).
X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove
the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the
driver's door.
The on-board electronics have status 0,
which is the same as the SmartKey having
been removed.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock
(Y page 137).
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
X Remove tool kit tray :. Make sure that they are not endangered as
X Turn stowage well ; counterclockwise they do so.
and remove it. X Make sure that no one is near the danger
X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare area while a wheel is being changed.
wheel =. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the
wheel change should, for example, stand
For further information on changing a wheel behind the barrier.
and mounting the spare wheel, see
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to
(Y page 293).
traffic conditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle Changing a wheel and mounting the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare wheel
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel or
Preparing the vehicle
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties) (Y page 297). G WARNING
i Vehicle preparation is not necessary on The wheel and tire size of the emergency
vehicles with MOExtended tires. spare wheel/spare wheel may differ to that of
the damaged wheel. When using an
X Stop the vehicle as far away as possible
emergency spare wheel/spare wheel the
from traffic on solid, non-slippery and level
handling characteristics of the vehicle may
ground.
change.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
Adapt your style of driving accordingly.
Z
294 Flat tire
Never operate the vehicle with more than one Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
emergency spare wheel/spare wheel that rolling away
differs in size.
G WARNING
Only use an emergency spare wheel/spare
Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on
wheel of a differing size briefly and do not
slight inclines/declines. The vehicle could
switch off ESP.
otherwise fall off the jack and injure you or
When using an emergency spare wheel, you others.
must not exceed the maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h). If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock,
it can be found in the vehicle tool kit
G WARNING (Y page 292).
Have the emergency spare wheel/spare The folding wheel chock is an additional
wheel replaced with a new wheel as soon as securing measure to prevent the vehicle from
possible at a qualified specialist workshop rolling away, for example when changing a
which has the necessary specialist knowledge wheel.
and tools to carry out the work required.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this
purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety
i Vehicles without a spare wheel/

emergency spare wheel are not equipped
with a tire-change tool kit at the factory. For
more information on which tools are
required to perform a wheel change on your
X Fold both plates upwards :.
vehicle, e.g. wheel chock, lug wrench or
alignment bolt, consult an authorized X Fold out lower plate ;.
Mercedes-Benz Center. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into
X Prepare the vehicle as described the openings in base plate =.

(Y page 293).
X Remove the following items (depending on
the vehicle's equipment) from the stowage
well under the trunk/trunk floor:
Rthe emergency spare wheel
Rthe folding wheel chock
Rthe lug wrench
Rthe jack
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling

away.
Securing the vehicle on level ground
X On level ground: place chocks or other
suitable items under the front and rear of
Flat tire 295
the wheel that is diagonally opposite the the jack. Do not disengage the parking brake
wheel you wish to change. while the vehicle is raised.
Make sure that the ground on which the
vehicle is standing and where you place the
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use
a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack may
not be able to achieve its load-bearing
capacity if it is not at its full height.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients
raised.
X On downhill gradients: place chocks or Also observe the notes on the jack.
other suitable items in front of the wheels
of the front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle

G WARNING
When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack
which has been specifically approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
the vehicle at the jacking points built into both
sides of the vehicle. The jack saddle must be
placed centrally under the jacking point. The X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on
jack must always be vertical when in use, the wheel you wish to change by about one
especially on inclines or declines. full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle completely.
briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for The jacking points are located just behind the
performing maintenance work under the wheel housings of the front wheels and just
vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the in front of the wheel housings of the rear
jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel wheels (arrows).
change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
Always firmly engage the parking brake and
block the wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizable objects before raising the vehicle with
Z
296 Flat tire
G WARNING Removing a wheel

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up X Unscrew the wheel bolts.
the vehicle at the jacking points. The jack
saddle must be placed centrally under the ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
jacking point. dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub
If you do not position the jack correctly in the threads could otherwise be damaged when
jacking point, the vehicle can fall off the jack you screw them in.
and seriously or fatally injure you or others. X Remove the wheel.
! The jack is designed exclusively for

Mounting a new wheel
jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. G WARNING
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged
or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened
wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
X
This could cause an accident. Make sure to
Position jack = at jacking point ;.
use the correct wheel bolts.
G WARNING
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.
Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise, the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
G WARNING
Make sure to use the original length wheel
bolts when remounting the original wheel
X Make sure that the base of the jack is
after it has been repaired.
positioned directly under the jacking point.
X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = sits X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact
completely on jacking point ; and the surfaces.
base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
X Turn crank ? until the tire is raised a
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
maximum of 1.2 inches (3 cm) off the while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
ground.
Flat tire 297
change tool kit in the trunk/cargo

compartment.
X Transport the defective wheel in the trunk/
cargo compartment.
or
X Depending on the size of the wheel, you
may also be able to secure the defective
wheel in the spare wheel well. In this case,
you will have to remove the stowage well
casing from the spare wheel well and stow
X Place the emergency spare wheel on the it securely in the trunk/cargo
wheel hub and push it on. compartment.
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are i USA only: when you are driving with the
finger-tight. emergency spare wheel mounted, the tire
pressure monitoring system cannot
Lowering the vehicle function reliably. Only restart the tire
pressure monitoring system when the
X Turn the crank of the jack counter- defective wheel has been replaced with a
clockwise until the vehicle is once again new wheel.
standing firmly on the ground.
All wheels mounted must be equipped with
X Place the jack to one side.
functioning sensors. The defective wheel
should no longer be in the vehicle.

properties)
properties) allow you to continue driving your
vehicle even if one or more tires are entirely
deflated.
MOExtended tires may only be used in
conjunction with the activated tire pressure
X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a
loss warning system or with the activated tire
crosswise pattern in the sequence
pressure monitoring system.
indicated (: to A). The tightening torque
The maximum permissible distance which
must be 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
can be driven in run-flat mode depends on the
G WARNING load in the vehicle. You can drive 50 miles
Have the tightening torque checked (80 km) if the vehicle is partially laden and
immediately after a wheel is changed. The 18 miles (30 km) if it is fully laden.
wheels could come loose if they are not The maximum permissible distance which
tightened to a torque of 96 lb/ft (130 Nm). can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from
the moment the tire pressure loss warning
X Turn the jack back to its initial position and appears in the multifunction display.
store it together with the rest of the tire- You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Z
298 Battery
G WARNING Battery
The handling characteristics of your vehicle
deteriorate in run-flat mode, for example:
Rwhen
In order for the battery to achieve the
cornering
maximum possible service life, it must always
Rwhen braking
be sufficiently charged.
Rwhen accelerating rapidly
! Have the battery checked regularly at a
Adapt your driving style accordingly and avoid
qualified specialist workshop, such as an
sudden changes in direction and sudden
acceleration, as well as driving over obstacles
(i.e. curbs, potholes), and driving off-road. Adhere to the service intervals indicated in
This is particularly the case when the vehicle the service booklet or ask a qualified
is heavily laden. specialist workshop, such as an authorized
The maximum permissible distance that can
be driven in run-flat mode depends to a large Have the battery charge checked more
extent on the loads placed on the vehicle. It frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
can be shorter due to high speeds, a heavy short trips or if you leave it standing idle for
load, sudden changes in direction, the road a lengthy period.
surface condition, outside temperature, etc., Only replace a battery with a battery that has
or further if you drive carefully and been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
conservatively. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Do not continue to drive in run-flat mode if: if you wish to leave your vehicle parked for a
Ryou hear banging noises. long period of time.
Rthevehicle starts to shake. G WARNING
Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. Comply with safety precautions and take
RESP is intervening constantly. protective measures when handling batteries.
Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. Risk of explosion
After driving in run-flat mode, you must have
the wheel(s) checked for damage at a
qualified specialist workshop which has the Fire, naked flames and
necessary specialist knowledge and tools to smoking are prohibited
carry out the work required. The defective tire when handling the battery.
must be replaced in every case. Avoid creating sparks.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use an Battery acid is caustic.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this Avoid contact with the skin,
purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety eyes or clothing.
or on safety-related systems must be carried Wear suitable protective
out at a qualified specialist workshop. clothing, in particular
gloves, an apron and a face
i When replacing one or all tires, make sure
mask.
that you only use tires marked
MOExtended and of the specified size for Immediately rinse acid
the vehicle. splashes off with clean
water. Consult a doctor if
necessary.
Battery 299
Wear eye protection. G WARNING

Do not place any metal objects on the battery
as this could result in a short circuit.
Keep children away. Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Take care that you do not become statically
charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or
Observe this Operator's rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you
Manual. also should not pull or push the battery over
carpets or other synthetic materials.
Never touch the battery first. First, touch the
H Environmental note outside body of the vehicle in order to release
Batteries contain dangerous any possible electrostatic charges.
substances. It is against the Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The
law to dispose of them with battery could explode if touched due to
the household rubbish. They electrostatic charge or due to spark
must be collected separately formation.
and recycled to protect the
environment. ! Before working on the battery, e.g.
Dispose of batteries in an loosening the battery terminals, switch off
environmentally friendly the engine and remove the SmartKey from
manner. Return discharged the ignition. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
batteries to a qualified make sure that the ignition is switched off.
specialist workshop, e.g. an Check that all the indicator lamps in the
authorized Mercedes-Benz instrument cluster are off. You may
Center, or to a special otherwise destroy electronic components,
collection point for old such as the alternator.
batteries. ! Like other batteries, the vehicle battery
may discharge over time if you do not use
G WARNING the vehicle. In this case have the battery
Failure to follow these instructions can result checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
in severe injury or death. such as an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Never lean over batteries while connecting.
Center. You can also charge the battery
You might get injured.
with a charger recommended by Mercedes-
Benz. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not Benz Center for more information.
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
The battery and the cover of the positive
flush affected area with water and seek
terminal clamp must be installed securely
medical help if necessary.
during operation.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, i Remove the SmartKey if you park the
which is flammable and explosive. Keep vehicle and do not require any electrical
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid consumers. The vehicle will then use very
improper connection of jumper cables, little energy, thus conserving battery
smoking etc. power.
Z
300 Battery
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you do not ! Only charge the installed battery with a
carry out work on batteries yourself, e.g. battery charger which has been tested and
removing or charging. Always have this work approved by Mercedes-Benz. These battery
performed at a qualified specialist workshop, chargers allow the battery to be charged
e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. while still installed.
i If the power supply has been interrupted, ! Only use battery chargers with a
e.g. if the battery has been reconnected, maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
you must carry out the following tasks:
! Only charge the battery using the jump-
Rset the clock; see the separate operating starting connection point.
instructions.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
Rreset the function for automatically
engine compartment (Y page 301).
folding the exterior mirrors in/out by
X Open the hood (Y page 278).
folding the mirrors out once
X Connect the battery charger to the positive

(Y page 102)23
terminal and earth point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in
Charging the battery the jump-starting procedure
(Y page 301).
G WARNING
X Read the battery charger's operating
Never charge a battery still installed in the instructions before charging the battery.
vehicle unless a battery charger unit approved
by Mercedes-Benz is being used. Gases may
escape during charging and cause explosions
that may result in paint damage, corrosion or
personal injury.
A battery charger unit specially adapted for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an
accessory. It permits the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
information and availability.
Charge the battery in accordance with the
separate instructions for the battery charger.
G WARNING
There is a risk of acid burns during the
charging process due to the gases which
escape from the battery. Do not lean over the
battery during the charging process.
G WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the
skin, eyes or clothing.
23 This function is only available in vehicles for Canada.

Jump-starting 301
Jump-starting
G WARNING
Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead
to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting. You might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or
clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or
sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may
damage the catalytic converter24 and create a risk of fire.
Do not use a rapid-charging device to start the engine.
Make sure the jumper cables are not damaged.
Make sure the jumper cables are not touching any other metal objects when they are
connected to the battery.
If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle
or from a second battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
X The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,
jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
X Only jump-start the vehicle when the engine is cold and the catalytic converter system has
cooled down25.
X Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
X Jump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
X Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
X Make sure that the jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts, such as the pulley
or the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.
X If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected
for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.
i Jumper cables and further information about jump-starting can be obtained from any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, for example.
X Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.
X Manual transmission: engage neutral.
X Automatic transmission: move the selector lever to P.
24 Only vehicles with a gasoline engine.

25 Only vehicles with a gasoline engine.
Z
302 Towing and tow-starting
X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-
starting device.
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B
using the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to earth point A of your vehicle using
the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first.
X Start the engine.
X Allow the engine to run for a few minutes before disconnecting the jumper cable.
X First, remove the jumper cable from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from
positive terminal ; and positive terminal =, each time disconnecting from the contacts
on your own vehicle first.
X After removing the jumper cable, close cover : on positive terminal ;.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. The jump-starting procedure is not a standard operating state; therefore, have
the battery checked.
Towing and tow-starting Rthe engine is not running.

Rthere is a brake system malfunction.
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply
G WARNING or the vehicle's electrical system.
If you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigid The power assistance for the steering and the
towing bar if: brake force booster do not work when the
Towing and tow-starting 303
engine is not running. You will need more The battery must be connected and charged.
force to steer and brake, you may have to Otherwise, you:
depress the brake pedal with maximum force. Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
Before towing away, make sure that the the ignition lock
steering can be moved and is not locked. Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to
If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its position N
weight must not exceed the maximum Release the selector lever lock manually to
permissible gross vehicle weight of your move it out of position P (Y page 149).
vehicle.
i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the
G WARNING automatic locking feature (Y page 78). You
could otherwise be locked out when
The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function
pushing or towing the vehicle.
or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,
deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the
vehicle is to be towed.
Installing/removing the towing eye
It is better to have the vehicle transported Installing the towing eye
than to have it towed.
X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle
! You may only tow the vehicle a maximum tool kit (Y page 292).
distance of 30 miles (50 km). A towing
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be G WARNING
exceeded. The exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You could
For towing distances over 30 miles burn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Be
(50 km), the vehicle must loaded onto a particularly careful when removing the rear
transporter. cover.
! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
The mountings for the removable towing eyes
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could are located in the bumpers. They are at the
be damaged. front and at the rear, under the covers.
! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,
as this could damage the vehicle. If in
doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
! When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high,
the vehicles could be damaged.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage the vehicle.
! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop
button. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock and shift the automatic
transmission to N. Then, turn the SmartKey
back to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock.
The automatic transmission must be in
position N when the vehicle is being towed.
Z
304 Towing and tow-starting
X Press the mark on cover : inwards in the vehicle. Adapt your style of driving
direction of the arrow. accordingly.
X Take cover : off the opening. XSwitch on the hazard warning lamps
X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the (Y page 109).
stop and tighten it. i When towing with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination
Removing the towing eye switch as usual to signal a change of
X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. direction. In this case, only the turn signals
for the desired direction flash. When the
X Attach cover : to the bumper and press combination switch is reset, the hazard
until it engages. warning lamps start flashing again.
X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the

Towing the vehicle with the rear axle brake pedal and keep it depressed.
raised X Shift the automatic transmission to
Only possible on vehicles without position N.
4MATIC. X Release the brake pedal.
When towing your vehicle with the rear axle X Release the parking brake.
raised, it is important that you observe the
safety instructions (Y page 302).
! The ignition must be switched off if you Transporting the vehicle
are towing the vehicle with the rear axle The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
raised. Intervention by ESP could onto a trailer or transporter for transporting
otherwise damage the brake system. purposes.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
(Y page 109). ignition lock.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the X Shift the automatic transmission to
ignition lock and remove the SmartKey position N.
from the ignition lock.
As soon as the vehicle is loaded:
X When leaving the vehicle, take the
SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the parking brake.
X Move the selector lever to P.
Towing a vehicle with both axles on X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the
the ground ignition lock and remove the SmartKey
When having your vehicle towed, observe the from the ignition lock.
important safety notes (Y page 302). X Secure the vehicle.
G WARNING ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels

The power assistance for the steering and the or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle
brake force booster do not work when the such as axle or steering components.
engine is not running. You will then need Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
much more effort to brake and steer the
Fuses 305
Notes for 4MATIC vehicles Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of
the same rating, which you can recognize by
! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, in the fuse allocation chart. An authorized
as doing so will damage the transmission. Mercedes-Benz Center will be happy to
If the vehicle has transmission damage or advise you.
damage to the front or rear axle, have it i If a fuse has blown, contact a breakdown
transported on a transporter or trailer.
service or an authorized Mercedes-Benz
In the event of damage to the electrical Center.
system
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
If the battery is defective, the automatic
cause traced and rectified at a qualified
transmission will be locked in position P. To
shift the automatic transmission to position
N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
electrical system in the same way as when ! Only use fuses that have been approved
jump-starting (Y page 301). for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter have the correct fuse rating for the system
or trailer. concerned. Otherwise, components or
systems could be damaged.
Tow-starting (emergency starting)

Before changing a fuse
! Vehicles with automatic transmission
X Park the vehicle and apply the parking
must not be started by tow-starting. This
could otherwise damage the transmission. brake.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition
Fuses lock.
Important safety notes The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
Rfuse box on the driver's side of the
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the dashboard
components on the circuit and their functions Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the
stop operating. left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed
in the direction of travel
G WARNING Rfuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction
with the specified amperage for the system in of travel
question and do not attempt to repair or
The fuse allocation chart is located in the
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
vehicle tool kit (Y page 292) in the stowage
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
compartment under the trunk floor.
fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,
and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the cause
Dashboard fuse box
determined and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Do not use a pointed object such as a
screwdriver to open the cover in the
Z
306 Fuses
dashboard. You could damage the

dashboard or the cover.
X Remove any existing moisture from the

fuse box using a dry cloth.
X To open: pull out cover : slightly at the X Take lines ; from the guides.
bottom in the direction of arrow =. X To open: open clamps :.

X Pull cover : outwards in the direction of X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
arrow ; and remove it.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter the
X To close: clip in cover : on the front of fuse box when the cover is open.
the dashboard. X To close: check whether the rubber seal is
X Fold cover : inwards until it engages. lying correctly in the cover.
X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box
into the retainer.
Fuse box in the engine compartment X Fold down the cover and close clamps :.
X Make sure that the windshield wipers are X Secure lines ; in the guides.
turned off.
! The cover must be seated properly,
G WARNING otherwise moisture or dirt could impair the
Make sure that the windshield wipers are function of the fuses.
switched off and that the SmartKey is X Close the hood (Y page 279).
removed from the ignition lock before you
open the cover of the fuse box. Otherwise, the
windshield wipers and the wiper rods above
Fuse box in the trunk
the cover could be set in motion. This could
lead to you or others being injured by the X Open the trunk lid (Y page 80).
wiper rods.

Fuses 307
X To open: turn rotary catch : clockwise.

X Open cover ; downwards in the direction
of the arrow.
Z
308
309

Operation ........................................... 310
Winter operation ............................... 312
Tire pressure ..................................... 313
Loading the vehicle .......................... 322
Maximum load rating ....................... 325
Standards .......................................... 326
Tire labeling ....................................... 327
Definition of terms for tires and
loading ............................................... 331
Changing a wheel ............................. 334
Wheel and tire combinations ........... 335
Wheels and tires

310 Operation
Useful information recognized on retreads. The operating safety

of the vehicle cannot be assured when such
i This Operator's Manual describes all tires are used.
equipment of your vehicle available at the G WARNING
time of publication of the Operator's If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
Manual. Country-specific differences are ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
possible. Please note that your vehicle may damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
not be equipped with all features should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
described. This also applies to safety- carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
related systems and functions. an area which is a safe distance from the road.
i Please read the information on qualified Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
specialist workshops (Y page 24). for possible damage. If the vehicle appears
unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
Important safety notes dealer for repairs.
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center G WARNING

if you require information on approved and Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
Wheels and tires
recommended tires and wheels for summer the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
and winter operation. Advice on purchasing might lose control of the vehicle. Continued
and caring for tires is also available there. driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
G WARNING up and possibly a fire.
Replace rims or tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as shown i Further information about Tires and
on the original part. For further information wheels can be obtained from any
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged. Also, the Operation
operating clearance of the wheels and the
tires may no longer be correct. Notes on driving
RIf the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tire
G WARNING pressures and correct them if necessary.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure that
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if the tires do not get deformed by the curb
the tires have sustained damage, replace or other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive
them. over curbs, speed humps or similar
When replacing rims, only use genuine elevations, try to do so slowly and at an
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the obtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result particularly the sidewalls, can get
in the bolts loosening and possibly an damaged.
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be
Operation 311
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels recommend that you do not allow your tires
and tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth
approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
G WARNING
properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Regularly check the tires for damage.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose
widely.
control of your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire Do not use tires that are excessively worn as
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if the tire traction on wet road surfaces
the tires have sustained damage, replace decreases significantly when the tread depth
them. is less than 1/8 inch (3 mm).
RRegularly check the wheels and tires of Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
your vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts, law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire
punctures, tears, bulges on tires and tread. They become visible as soon as a tread
deformation or cracks or severe corrosion depth of approximately 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
on wheels) at least once a month, as well has been reached. If this is the case, the tire
as after driving off-road or on rough roads. is so worn that it must be replaced.
Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tire The recommended tread depth for summer
Wheels and tires

pressure. tires is at least 1/8 inch (3 mm). The
RRegularly check the tire tread depth and recommended tread depth for winter tires is
the condition of the tread across the whole at least 1/6 inch (4 mm).
width of the tire (Y page 311). If necessary,
turn the front wheels to full lock in order to
inspect the inner side of the tire surface.
RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect
the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not
mount anything onto the valve (such as tire
pressure monitoring systems) other than
the standard valve cap or other valve caps
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle.
RRegularly check the pressure of all the tires
including the emergency spare wheel or the Bar marking : for tread wear is integrated
spare wheel, particularly prior to long trips, into the tire tread.
and correct the pressure as necessary
(Y page 313).
Notes on selecting, mounting and
replacing tires
Tire tread
ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same
G WARNING type and make.
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto
safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the wheels.
the tread wear indicators (TWI) become RAfter mounting new tires, run them in at
visible at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we moderate speeds for the first 60 miles
Z
312 Winter operation
(100 km) as they only reach their full Driving with summer tires
performance after this distance.
RDo not use tires that are excessively worn
At temperatures below 45 (+7 ), the
elasticity of summer tires and therefore also
as the tire traction on wet road surfaces
traction and braking capability are reduced
decreases significantly when the tread
considerably equip your vehicle with
depth is less than 1/8 inch (3 mm). M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
RReplace the tires after six years at the temperatures could cause tears to form,
latest, regardless of wear. This also applies thereby damaging the tires permanently.
to the spare wheel/emergency spare Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility
wheel. for this type of damage.
The service life of tires depends on the
following factors amongst other things:
Rdriving
M+S tires
style
Rtire pressure At temperatures below 45 (+7 ), use
Rmileage winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of
tire are identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat symbol in addition to the M+S marking
Wheels and tires
properties) provide the best possible grip in wintry road

conditions. Only these tires will allow driving
safety systems such as ABS and ESP to
properties) allow you to continue driving your
function optimally in winter. These tires have
vehicle even if one or more tires are entirely
been developed specifically for driving in
deflated.
snow.
MOExtended tires may be used only in
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on
conjunction with the activated tire pressure
all wheels to maintain safe handling
loss warning system or the activated tire
characteristics.
pressure monitoring system and only on
wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-Benz. G WARNING
You will find notes on driving with M+S tires with a tread depth of less than
MOExtended tires in the "Breakdown 1/ inch (4 mm) must be replaced
6
assistance" section (Y page 297). immediately. They are no longer suitable for
use in winter.
Winter operation Always observe the maximum permissible

speed specified for the M+S tires you have
Please bear the following in mind mounted.
At the onset of winter, have your vehicle When you have mounted M+S tires:
winterproofed at a qualified specialist
X Check the tire pressures (Y page 317).
workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" pressure loss warning system
section (Y page 334). (Y page 317).
X Vehicles for USA: restart the tire pressure
monitor (Y page 319).
Tire pressure 313
G WARNING ! If snow chains are mounted on the front

If you use your spare wheel when M+S tires wheels, the snow chains could grind
are mounted on the other wheels, be aware against the bodywork or components of the
that the difference in tire characteristics chassis. This could result in damage to the
impairs cornering ability and reduces driving vehicle or the tires.
stability. Adapt your driving style accordingly. ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wish
Have the spare wheel replaced by a normal to mount snow chains on steel wheels,
wheel with an M+S tire at the nearest make sure that you remove the respective
Mercedes-Benz Center. wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps may
i You may wish to deactivate
Snow chains ESP(Y page 61) when pulling away with
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz snow chains mounted. This way you can
recommends that you only use snow chains allow the wheels to spin in a controlled
which have been specially approved for your manner, achieving an increased driving
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a force (cutting action).
corresponding standard of quality.
! There is not enough space for snow
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires

chains on some wheel sizes. Observe the
information under "Tires and wheels" in the Tire pressure specifications
"Technical Data" section to avoid damage
to the vehicle or the wheels. G WARNING
ROnly
use snow chains when driving on
roads completely covered by snow. Do not Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
exceed the maximum permissible speed of wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
30 mph (50 km/h). Remove the snow affect handling and fuel economy, and are
chains as soon as possible when you are no more likely to fail from being overheated.
longer driving on snow-covered roads. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
RLocal regulations may restrict the use of adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
snow chains. Applicable regulations must wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
be observed if you wish to mount snow and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
chains. because they are more likely to become
RSnow chains must not be mounted on
punctured or damaged by road debris,
potholes etc.
emergency spare wheels.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
If you intend to mount snow chains, please
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
bear the following points in mind:
and Loading Information placard on the
Ryou may not attach snow chains to all driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
wheel-tire combinations; see the can overheat them, possibly causing a
information under "Wheel and tire blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
combinations" in the "Wheels and tires" in handling or steering problems, or brake
section. failure.
Rmount snow chains only in pairs and only
to the rear wheels. Observe the The recommended tire pressures for the tires
manufacturer's installation instructions. mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Z
314 Tire pressure
Option 1) Tire and Loading Information

placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side of
the vehicle (Y page 322).
The Tire and Loading Information placard
contains the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
i The specifications given on the following
Tire and Loading Information placard are
examples. Tire pressure specifications are
vehicle-specific and may deviate from the Example: tire pressure table for all tires approved
data shown here. The tire pressures ex-works for this vehicle
applicable to your vehicle can be found on If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire
the Tire and Loading Information placard on pressure information following is only valid
your vehicle. for that tire size. The load conditions "partially
laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the
table for different numbers of passengers and
amounts of luggage. The actual number of
seats may differ.
Wheels and tires
: Recommended tire pressures

Option 2) Tire pressure table on the inside
of the fuel filler flap.
The tire pressure table contains the Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions
recommended pressures for cold tires for
various operating conditions, i.e. differing Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
load and speed conditions. diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.
R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size
i Specifications shown in the examples of and can be found on the tire sidewall
tire pressure tables are for illustration (Y page 328).
purposes only. Tire pressure specifications
are vehicle-specific and may deviate from
the data shown here. Tire pressure
specifications applicable to your vehicle
are located in your vehicle's tire pressure
table.
Tire pressure 315
Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNING
Should the tire pressure drop repeatedly:
Rcheck the tire for foreign bodies.
Rcheck whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
Rmake sure that only a valve cap approved
by Mercedes-Benz is used on the tire valve.
Tire pressures that are too low have a
If the tire pressures have been set to the negative effect on vehicle safety, which could
lower values for lighter loads and/or lower lead you to cause an accident.
road speeds, the pressures should be reset
to the higher values: To test tire pressure, use a suitable tire
pressure gauge. The outer appearance of a
Rif you want to drive with an increased load tire does not permit any reliable conclusion
and/or about the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped
Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds.
with the electronic tire pressure monitoring
i The tire pressures for increased loads system, the tire pressure can be checked
Wheels and tires

and/or higher road speeds, shown in the using the on-board computer.
tire pressure table, may have a negative The tire temperature and pressure increase
effect on driving comfort. when the vehicle is in motion. This is
dependent on the driving speed and the load.
Option 3) The tire pressure for the
emergency/collapsible spare wheel Therefore, you should only correct tire
(depending on vehicle equipment) can be pressures when the tires are cold.
found: The tires are cold:
Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the Rif the vehicle has been parked without
emergency/collapsible spare wheel direct sunlight on the tires for at least three
Rin the "Wheel and tire combinations" hours and
section (Y page 335) in this manual Rif the vehicle has not been driven more than
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard 1 mile (1.6 km).
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The tire temperature changes depending on
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this the outside temperature, the vehicle speed
can lead to an excessive build up of heat and and the tire load. If the tire temperature
a sudden loss of pressure. changes by 18 (10 ), the tire pressure
changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/
For further information, consult a qualified
1.5 psi). Take this into account when
checking the pressure of warm tires and only
correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the
current operating conditions. If you check the
tire pressure when the tires are warm, the
resulting value will be higher than if the tires
were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the
tire pressure to the value specified for cold
tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be
too low.
Z
316 Tire pressure
Observe the recommended tire pressures for Radversely affect ride comfort
cold tires Rincrease stopping distance
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side, Maximum tire pressure
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of
G WARNING
the fuel filler flap,
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
emergency/collapsible spare wheel pressures.
(depending on vehicle equipment).
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
Underinflated or overinflated tires affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Underinflated tires Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
G WARNING wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires because they are more likely to become
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely punctured or damaged by road debris,
Wheels and tires
affect handling and fuel economy, and are potholes etc.

more likely to fail from being overheated.
Underinflated tires can:

Rwear excessively and/or unevenly
Radversely affect fuel economy
Rfail from being overheated
Radversely affect handling
Overinflated tires
G WARNING
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. : Maximum permitted tire pressure
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can (example)
adversely affect handling and ride comfort, i The actual values for tires are specific to
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, each vehicle and may deviate from the
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) values in the illustration.
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris, When adjusting the tire pressures always
potholes etc. observe the recommended tire pressure for
your vehicle (Y page 313).
Overinflated tires can:
Radversely affect handling
Rwearexcessively and/or unevenly
Rbe more likely to become damaged
Tire pressure 317
Checking the tire pressures check the tire pressure again using the tire
pressure gauge.
Important safety notes X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
G WARNING X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely Tire pressure loss warning system
affect handling and fuel economy, and are (Canada only)
more likely to fail from being overheated. Important safety notes
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort, While the vehicle is in motion, the tire
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, pressure loss warning system monitors the
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) set tire pressure using the rotational speed of
because they are more likely to become the wheels. This enables the system to detect
punctured or damaged by road debris, significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed
potholes etc. of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of
a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning
message will appear in the multifunction
display.
Wheels and tires

driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires G WARNING
can overheat them, possibly causing a If the Check Tire Pressure Soon message
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result appears in the multifunction display, one or
in handling or steering problems, or brake more tires are significantly underinflated.
failure. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and
inflate the tires to the pressure specified on
Check the tire pressure at least once a month. the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
Only check and correct tire pressures when placard or (where available) in the tire
the tires are cold (Y page 313). pressure table.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
Checking tire pressure manually causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
To determine and set the correct tire tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
pressure, proceed as follows: efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to
Check all tires when cold, including the spare
be checked.
tire, at least once a month. The tires should
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
be inflated to the recommended pressure.
the valve. This information can be found:
X Read the tire pressure and compare it with
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard
the recommended value on the Tire and
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
Loading Information placard on the
B-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle. or
X If necessary, increase the tire pressure to Rin the table for the tire pressure on the
the recommended value (Y page 313). inside of the fuel filler flap
X If the tire pressure is too high, release air
by pressing down the metal pin in the valve
using the tip of a pen, for example. Then
Z
318 Tire pressure
G WARNING tires is set correctly for the current

The tire pressure loss warning system does operating conditions.
not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire X Observe the notes in the section on tire
inflation pressures. Always adjust tire pressures (Y page 313).
inflation pressure according to the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's G WARNING
door B-pillar or on the tire inflation pressure The tire pressure loss warning system can
label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. only give reliable warnings if you have set the
correct tire pressure.
The tire pressure loss warning system does
not replace regular checks of the tire inflation If an incorrect tire pressure is set, these
pressures since a gradual pressure loss in incorrect values will be monitored.
more than one tire cannot be detected by the A tire with insufficient pressure results in
tire pressure loss warning system. vehicle instability when driving, thus
The tire pressure loss warning system is not increasing the risk of an accident.
able to issue a warning due to a sudden
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in
dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g.
position 2 (Y page 137) in the ignition lock.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully X Press the = or ; button to select the
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt Service menu.

Wheels and tires
steering maneuvers. X Press the 9 or : button to select

Tire Pressure.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning X Press the a button.
system is limited or delayed if:
The Run Flat Indicator Active
Rsnow chains are mounted to your vehicle's Press 'OK' to Restart message
tires. appears in the multifunction display.
Rroad conditions are wintry.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.
Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style
The Tire Pressure Now OK? message
(cornering at high speeds or driving with
appears in the multifunction display.
high rates of acceleration).
X Press 9 or : to select Yes.
Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in the
vehicle or on the roof). X Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
Restarting the tire pressure loss message appears in the multifunction
warning system display.
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
loss warning system will monitor the set
if you have:
tire pressures of all four tires.
Rchanged the tire pressure
Rchanged the wheels or tires
If you wish to cancel the restart:
Rmount new wheels or tires X Press the % button.
X Before restarting, consult the Tire and or
Loading Information placard on the X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
B-pillar on the driver's side or the tire appears, press 9 or : to select
pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler Cancel.
flap to ensure the tire pressure in all four
Tire pressure 319
X Press the a button. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

The tire pressure values stored at the last been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
restart will continue to be monitored. system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
Tire pressure monitor Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
Important safety notes your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
If a tire pressure monitor system is installed, them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
the vehicle's wheels have sensors that significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
monitor the tire pressures in all four tires. The to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
tire pressure monitor warns you if the Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
pressure drops in one or more of the tires. The and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
tire pressure monitor only functions if the handling and stopping ability.
correct wheel electronics units are installed Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
on all wheels. for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
warning lamp in the instrument cluster for pressure, even if underinflation has not
indicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA) reached the level to trigger illumination of the
Wheels and tires

or pressure loss (Canada). Whether the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates USA only:
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
pressure monitoring system is TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
malfunctioning: the system is not operating properly. The
Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
tire pressure on one or more tires is the low tire pressure telltale. When the
significantly too low. The tire pressure system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
monitor is not malfunctioning. flash for approximately one minute and then
RUSA only: if the warning lamp flashes for remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the
60 seconds and then remains lit constantly,
vehicle is started as long as the malfunction
the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
exists.
G WARNING When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the system may not be able to detect or signal
should be checked at least once a month low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
when cold and inflated to the pressure malfunctions may occur for a variety of
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer reasons, including the installation of
on the Tire and Loading Information placard incompatible replacement or alternate tires
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler TPMS from functioning properly. Always
flap. If your vehicle has tires of a different size check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
Information placard or the tire pressure label, vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
you should determine the proper tire pressure alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
for those tires. continue to function properly.
i USA only:
Z
320 Tire pressure
If the tire pressure monitor is 1. This device may not cause interference,
malfunctioning, it may take more than and
10 minutes for the tire pressure warning 2. this device must accept any interference
lamp to inform you of the malfunction by received, including interference that may
flashing for 60 seconds and then remaining cause undesired operation of the device.
lit. Any unauthorized modification to this
When the malfunction has been rectified, device could void the users authority to
the tire pressure warning lamp goes out operate the equipment.
after driving for a few minutes.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in Checking tire pressure electronically
the multifunction display. After a few minutes X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
of driving, the current tire pressure of each 2 (Y page 137) in the ignition lock.
tire is shown in the multifunction display.
i The tire pressure values indicated by the steering wheel to select the Service
on-board computer may differ from those menu.
measured at a gas station with a pressure X Press the 9 or : button to select
gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-
Tire Pressure.
board computer refer to those measured at
sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure
Wheels and tires
values indicated by a pressure gauge are The current tire pressure for each wheel will
higher than those shown by the on-board be displayed in the multifunction display.
computer. In this case, do not reduce the If the vehicle has been parked for longer than
tire pressures. 20 minutes, the Tire pressures will be
i The operation of the tire pressure monitor displayed after driving a few
can be affected by interference from radio minutes message appears in the display.
transmitting equipment (e.g. radio After a teach-in period, the tire pressure
headphones, two-way radios) that may be monitor automatically recognizes new wheels
being operated in or near the vehicle. or new sensors. If a clear allocation of the tire
pressure values to the individual wheels is not
i USA only: possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor
This device complies with Part 15 of the Active message is shown instead of the tire
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the pressure display. The tire pressures are
following two conditions: already being monitored.
1. This device may not cause interference, i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheel
and
is mounted, the system may continue to
2. this device must accept any interference show the tire pressure of the wheel that has
received, including interference that may been removed for a few minutes. If this
cause undesired operation. occurs, note that the value displayed for
Any unauthorized modification to this the position where the spare tire is
device could void the users authority to mounted is not the same as the spare
operate the equipment. wheel/emergency spare wheel's current
i Canada only: tire pressure.
Tire pressure 321
Tire pressure monitor warning Additional tire pressure values for driving
messages at high speeds or with heavy loads can be
found in the tire pressure table on the
If the tire pressure monitor detects a
inside of the fuel filler flap.
significant pressure loss on one or more tires,
a warning message is shown in the X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct
multifunction display. A warning tone also on all four wheels.
sounds and the tire pressure warning lamp X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
lights up in the instrument cluster. 2 in the ignition lock.
Each tire that is affected by a significant loss X Press the = or ; button on the
of pressure is highlighted with a color. steering wheel to select the Service
If the Correct Tire Pressure message menu.
appears in the multifunction display: X Press the 9 or : button to select
X Check the tire pressure on all four wheels Tire Pressure.
and correct it if necessary. X Press the a button.
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are The multifunction display shows the
interchanged, the tire pressures may be current tire pressure of the individual tires
displayed for the wrong positions for a or the Tire pressures will be
short time. This is rectified after a few displayed after driving a few
Wheels and tires

minutes of driving, and the tire pressures minutes message.
are displayed for the correct positions. X Press the : button.
The Use Current Pressures as New
Restarting the tire pressure monitor Reference Values message appears in
G WARNING
If you wish to confirm the restart:
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to the recommended cold tire X Press the a button.
pressure. Underinflated tires affect the ability The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted
to steer or brake the vehicle. You might lose message appears in the multifunction
control over the vehicle. display.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, checks whether the current tire pressures
all existing warning messages are deleted and are within the specified range. The new tire
the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses pressures are then accepted as reference
the currently set tire pressures as the values and monitored.
reference values for monitoring. In most
cases, the tire pressure monitoring system If you wish to cancel the restart:
recognizes the new reference values X Press the % button.
automatically. The tire pressure values stored at the last
However, you can also define reference restart will continue to be monitored.
values manually as described here:
X Set the tire pressure (Y page 313) to the
value recommended for the corresponding
driving situation on the Tire and Loading
Information placard on the driver's side
B-pillar.
Z
322 Loading the vehicle
Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNING
driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake : B-pillar, driver's side
failure.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show Maximum permissible gross vehicle
the maximum possible load. weight rating
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard i The specifications shown on the Tire and
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The
Loading Information placard in the
Tire and Loading Information placard
illustration are examples. The maximum
shows the maximum permissible number
Wheels and tires
permissible gross vehicle weight rating is

of occupants and the maximum
vehicle-specific and may differ from that in
permissible vehicle load. It also contains
the illustration. You can find the valid
details of the tire sizes and
maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
corresponding pressures for tires
rating for your vehicle on the Tire and
mounted at the factory.
Loading Information placard.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the
B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
identification plate informs you of the
gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up
of the vehicle weight, all vehicle
occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You
can also find information about the
maximum gross axle weight rating on the
front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried
by one axle (front or rear axle). Never X The Tire and Loading Information placard
exceed the maximum load or the gives you details on maximum permissible
maximum gross axle weight rating for the gross vehicle weight rating :: "The gross
front or rear axle.
weight of occupants and luggage must
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,
cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the specified
value.
Loading the vehicle 323
Number of seats X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and luggage load
i The specifications shown on the Tire and capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount
Loading Information placard in the equals 1400 lbs and there will be five
illustration are examples. The number of 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from amount of available cargo and luggage load
the details shown. The number of seats in capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =
your vehicle can be found on the Tire and 650 lbs).
Loading Information placard.
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (Y page 325).
Wheels and tires

Maximum number of seats : determines the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966".
X Step 1: Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
your vehicles Tire and Loading Information
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX lbs.
Z
324 Loading the vehicle
Example: step 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with
varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use
a load limit of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the
actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicles Tire and Loading Information placard
(Y page 323).
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Step 1 Combined maximum 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
weight of occupants (680 kg) (680 kg) (680 kg)
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)

Step 2 Number of people in 5 3 1
the vehicle (driver
and occupants)
Wheels and tires
Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1

occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2
Weight of the Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
occupants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg)
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Occupant 4:
140 lbs (63 kg)
Occupant 5:
120 lbs (54 kg)
Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupants
Maximum load rating 325

Step 3 Permissible cargo 1500 lbs 1500 lbs 1500 lbs
and trailer load/ (680 kg) - (680 kg) - (680 kg) -
noseweight 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) =
(maximum gross = 750 lbs = 960 lbs 1350 lbs
vehicle weight rating (340 kg) (435 kg) (612 kg)
from the Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus the
gross weight of all
occupants)
The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.
Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 325).
Vehicle identification plate approximately 10% of the gross weight of the

trailer and its load.
Even if you have calculated the total load
Wheels and tires

Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
carefully, you should still make sure that the
primarily to carry passengers and their
gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle
luggage. Mercedes-Benz does not
weight rating are not exceeded. Details can
recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
be found on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 322).
Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of Maximum load rating
the vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailer
load/noseweight (if applicable) must not
exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.
G WARNING
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum
permissible load that can be carried by one
axle (front or rear axle).
driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed can overheat them, possibly causing a
the maximum permissible values (gross blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
vehicle weight and maximum gross axle in handling or steering problems, or brake
weight rating), have your loaded vehicle failure.
(including driver, occupants, cargo, and full
trailer load if applicable) weighed on a
suitable vehicle weighbridge.
Trailer load/noseweight
The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross
weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,
the trailer load/noseweight is included in the
load along with occupants and luggage. The
trailer load/noseweight is usually
Z
326 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
North America have these grades branded on

the sidewall.
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-
specific and may deviate from the values in
the illustration.
Where applicable, the tire grading
information can be found on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and maximum
tire width.
For example:
i The actual values for tires are specific to
Tread wear Traction Temperature
each vehicle and may deviate from the
values in the illustration. 200 AA A
Maximum tire load : is the maximum
permitted weight for which the tire is All passenger car tires must conform to the
approved. statutory safety requirements in addition to
Further information on tire loads these grades.
(Y page 327).
Wheels and tires
Tread wear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
Standards based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
Overview of Tire Quality Grading under controlled conditions on a specified
Standards U.S. Government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a
tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm, due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate conditions.
Traction
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S.
Government requirement. Their purpose is to G WARNING
provide drivers with consistent and reliable The traction grade assigned to this tire is
information regarding tire performance. Tire based on straight-ahead braking traction
manufacturers are required to grade tires tests, and does not include acceleration,
using three performance factors: tread cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
wear :, tire traction ;, and temperature characteristics.
resistance =. Although not a Government of
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
Tire labeling 327
the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as controlled conditions on a specified indoor
measured under controlled conditions on laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
specified government test surfaces of asphalt temperature can cause the material of the tire
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
traction performance. excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level
G WARNING of performance which all passenger car tires
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
be substantially reduced. Under such weather Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
conditions, drive, steer and brake with represent higher levels of performance on the
extreme caution. laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road
surfaces.
Tire labeling
You should pay special attention to road
conditions when temperatures are around Tire labeling overview
the freezing point. The following markings are on the tire in
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tire addition to the tire name (sales designation)
tread depth of 1/6 in (4 mm) for all four winter and the manufacturer's name:
Wheels and tires

tires (Y page 312) to maintain normal driving
characteristics in winter. Winter tires can
reduce the braking distance on snow covered
surfaces in comparison to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with ice or snow. Take
appropriate care when driving.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage
to the drive train.
Temperature
G WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated : Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, (Y page 331)
underinflation, or excessive loading, either ; DOT, Tire Identification Number
separately or in combination, can cause (Y page 330)
excessive heat build-up and possible tire = Maximum tire load (Y page 325)
failure. ? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 316)
The temperature grades are A (the highest), A Manufacturer
B, and C. These represent the tire's B Tire material (Y page 331)
resistance to the generation of heat and its C Tire size designation, load-bearing
ability to dissipate heat when tested under capacity and speed rating (Y page 328)
Z
328 Tire labeling
D Load index (Y page 330) pressure, to be used only temporarily in an

E Tire name emergency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may tire width in millimeters.
deviate from the data in the example.
Nominal aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the
size ratio between the tire height and the tire
Tire size designation, load-bearing width and is shown in percent. The aspect
capacity and speed rating ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by
the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires. "D" represents
diagonal tires, "B" represents diagonal radial
tires.
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the
Wheels and tires
diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter

: Tire width of the rim flange. The rim diameter is
; Nominal aspect ratio in % specified in inches (in).
= Tire code Load bearing index: load bearing index A
? Rim diameter is a numerical code which specifies the
A Load bearing index
maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.
B Speed rating G WARNING
The tire load rating must always be at least
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,
sudden tire failure may be the result which
General: depending on the manufacturer's could cause an accident and/or serious injury
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall to you or others.
may not contain any letters or may contain Always replace rims and tires with rims and
one letter that precedes the size description. tires having the same specifications
If there is no letter preceding the size (designation, manufacturer and type) as
description (as shown above): these are shown on the original part.
passenger vehicle tires according to
European manufacturing standards. G WARNING
If "P" precedes the size description: these are Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
manufacturing standards. and Loading Information placard on the
If "LT" precedes the size description: these driver's door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
are light truck tires according to U.S. can overheat them, possibly causing a
manufacturing standards. blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
If "T" precedes the size description: these are in handling or steering problems, or brake
compact emergency spare wheels at high tire failure.
Tire labeling 329
Example: Summer tires

The load bearing index 91 is equivalent to a
maximum load of 1356 lbs (615 kg) that the Index Speed rating
tire can carry. For further information on the ZR...(..Y) Above 186 mph (300 km/h)
maximum tire load in kilograms and pounds,
see (Y page 325). ZR Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
For further information on the load bearing
index, see Load index (Y page 330). ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"
approved maximum speed of the tire. in the size description depending on the
manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
G WARNING The service specifications consist of load
Even when permitted by law, never operate a bearing index A and speed rating B.
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum
RIf the size description of your tire includes
speed rating of the tires.
"ZR" and there are no service
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in
are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, order to find out the maximum speed.
causing loss of vehicle control and possibly
If a service specification is available, the
resulting in an accident and/or serious
maximum speed is limited according to the
Wheels and tires

personal injury and possible death, for you
speed rating in the service specification.
and for others.
Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this
Regardless of the speed rating always example, "97 Y" is the service specification.
observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and The letter "Y" represents the speed rating
adapt your driving style to the traffic and the maximum speed of the tire is
conditions. limited to 186 mph (300 km/h).
REvery tire that has a maximum speed above
Summer tires 186 mph (300 km/h) must have "ZR" in the
Index Speed rating size description and the service
specification must be given in brackets.
Q Up to 100 mph (160 km/h) Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speed
rating "(Y)" shows that the maximum speed
R Up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
of the tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h).
S Up to 112 mph (180 km/h) Ask the tire manufacturer to find out the
maximum speed.
T Up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
All-weather tires and winter tires
H Up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Index Speed rating
V Up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Q M+S26 Up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
W Up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
T M+S26 Up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
Y Up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y Up to 186 mph (300 km/h) H M+S26 Up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S26 Up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
26 Or M+Si for winter tires.
Z
330 Tire labeling
i Not all tires that have the M+S i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may
identification offer the driving deviate from the data in the example.
characteristics of winter tires. Winter tires In addition to the load bearing index, load
have, in addition to the M+S identification, index : may be imprinted after the letters
the i snow flake symbol on the tire
that identify speed rating B (Y page 328) on
sidewall. Tires with this identification fulfill
the sidewall of the tire.
the requirements of the Rubber
RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) example above), represents a standard
regarding the tire traction on snow and load (SL) tire
have been especially developed for driving RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced
on snow. tire
RLight load: represents a light load tire
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding the following speeds: RC, D, E: represents a load range that
RAll
depends on the maximum load that the tire
vehicles (except AMG vehicles):
can carry at a certain pressure
130 mph (210 km/h)
RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)
RAMG vehicles with increased top speed: DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Wheels and tires
174 mph (280 km/h)

U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every
The speed rating of tires mounted at the manufacturer of new tires or retreader has to
factory may be higher than the maximum imprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire
speed that the electronic speed limiter produced.
permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating as specified in the "Tires"
section (Y page 335), e.g. if you buy new
tires.
Further information about reading tire data
can be obtained from any qualified specialist
Center.
Load index The TIN is a unique identification number. The

TIN enables the tire manufacturers to inform
purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer
identification code ;, tire size =, tire type
code ? and manufacturing date A.
Definition of terms for tires and loading 331
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire Definition of terms for tires and

symbol : indicates that the tire complies loading
with the requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation. Tire ply composition and material
used
Manufacturer identification code:
manufacturer identification code ; provides Describes the number of plies or the number
details on the tire manufacturer. New tires of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tread and sidewall. These are made of steel,
tires have a code with four symbols. nylon, polyester and other materials.
Further information about retreaded tires
(Y page 310).
Bar
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be Metric unit for tire pressure. There are
used by the manufacturer as a code to 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to
describe specific characteristics of the tire. 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to
1 bar.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture
A provides information about the age of a
tire. The first and second positions represent DOT (Department of Transportation)
Wheels and tires

the week of manufacture, starting with "01"
for the first calendar week. Positions three DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of
and four represent the year of manufacture. the United States Department of
For example, a tire that is marked with Transportation.
"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in
2008.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
Tire characteristics designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lbs).

Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of
tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction
and temperature characteristics. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
This information describes the tire cord and Recommended tire pressure
the number of layers in sidewall : and under The recommended tire pressure applies to
the tread ;. the tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard
contains the recommended tire pressures for
Z
332 Definition of terms for tires and loading
cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the vehicle identification plate on the B pillar on
maximum permissible vehicle speed. the driver's side.
The tire pressure table contains the
recommended tire pressures for cold tires
under various operating conditions, i.e. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
differing load and speed conditions. The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of
the vehicle including all accessories,
Increased vehicle weight due to occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar
optional equipment noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle
This is the combined weight of all standard weight rating is specified on the vehicle
and optional equipment available for the identification plate on the B-pillar on the
vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually driver's side.
installed on the vehicle or not.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight

Rim The maximum weight is the sum of the curb
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire weight of the vehicle, the weight of the
is mounted. accessories, the total load limit and the
Wheels and tires
weight of the optional equipment installed at

the factory.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle Kilopascal (kPa)
weight. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa is the
gross axle weight rating can be found on the equivalent of 1 psi. Another unit for tire
vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals
the driver's side. (kPa) to 1 bar.
Speed rating Load index

The speed rating is part of the tire In addition to the load bearing index, the load
identification. It specifies the speed range for index may also be imprinted on the sidewall
which the tire is approved. of the tire. This specifies the load bearing
capacity more precisely.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

Curb weight
The gross vehicle weight comprises the
weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the The weight of a vehicle with standard
spare wheel, accessories installed, equipment including the maximum capacity
occupants, luggage and the drawbar of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-
noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle conditioning system and optional equipment
weight must not exceed the gross vehicle if these are installed in the vehicle, but does
weight rating GVWR as specified on the not include passengers or luggage.
Definition of terms for tires and loading 333
Maximum load rating Tread

The maximum load rating in kilograms or The part of the tire that comes into contact
pounds is the maximum weight for which a with the road.
tire is approved.
Bead
Maximum permissible tire pressure
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one securely on the wheel. There are several steel
tire. wires in the bead to prevent the tire from
coming loose from the wheel rim.
Maximum load on one tire

Sidewall
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated
by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle The part of the tire between the tread and the
by two. bead.
PSI (pounds per square inch) Weight of optional extras
Wheels and tires

A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
part and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).
Aspect ratio These optional extras, such as high-
performance brakes, level control, a roof rack
Relationship between tire height and tire
or a high-performance battery, are not
width in percent.
included in the curb weight and accessory
weight.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an TIN (Tire Identification Number)
outward force to each square inch of the tire's
This is a unique identifier which can be used
surface. The tire pressure is specified in
by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for
pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal
example for a product recall, and thus identify
(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only
the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the
be corrected when the tires are cold.
manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire
type code and the manufacturing date.
Tire pressure of cold tires
The tires are cold: Load bearing index
Rif the vehicle has been parked without The load bearing index (also load index) is a
direct sunlight on the tires for at least three code that contains the maximum load bearing
hours and capacity of a tire.
Rif the vehicle has not been driven more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
Z
334 Changing a wheel
Traction loose if not tightened with a torque of

96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Traction is the result of friction between the
tires and the road surface. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts
specified for your vehicle's rims.
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires

Treadwear indicators
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires
(1.6 mm) has been reached. in the center.
If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you
can rotate the wheels according to the
Occupant distribution intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at book in your vehicle documents. If this is not
their designated seating positions. available, the tires should then be replaced
every 3000 to 6000 miles
(5000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if the tire wear
Total load limit requires this. Do not change the direction of
Wheels and tires
wheel rotation.
Rated cargo and luggage load plus Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and
68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle's the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel
designated seating capacity. is interchanged. Check the tire pressures.
Information on changing a wheel and
mounting the spare wheel (Y page 293).
Changing a wheel
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
Flat tire monitor, electronic components are
The "Breakdown assistance" section located in the wheel.
(Y page 293) contains information and notes Tire-mounting tools should not be used
on how to deal with a flat tire. It also provides near the valve. This could damage the
instructions on changing a wheel or mounting electronic components.
the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel. Always have the tires changed at a qualified
Interchanging the wheels
G WARNING
Direction of rotation
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension. Tires with a specified direction of rotation
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk
tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), of hydroplaning. You will only gain these
tire rotation is not possible. benefits if the correct direction of rotation is
maintained.
G WARNING An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates
Have the tightening torque checked after its correct direction of rotation.
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
Wheel and tire combinations 335
You may mount a spare wheel/emergency affected. In addition, when driving with a
spare wheel against the direction of rotation. load, tire dimension variations could cause
Observe the time restriction on use as well as the tires to come into contact with the
the speed limit specified on the spare wheel/ bodywork and axle components. This could
emergency spare wheel. result in damage to the tires or the vehicle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for
damage resulting from the use of tires,
Storing wheels wheels or accessories other than those
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, tested and approved.
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the Further information about tires, wheels and
tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. approved combinations can be obtained
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Cleaning the wheels i The recommended tire pressures for
G WARNING various operating conditions can be found:
Do not use power washers with circular-jet Ron the Tire and Loading Information
nozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, in placard with the recommended tire
particular the tires. You could otherwise pressures on the B-pillar on the driver's
Wheels and tires

damage the tires and cause an accident. side
Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of
the fuel filler flap.
Wheel and tire combinations Observe the instructions about the
recommended tire pressure and the
Please bear the following in mind
various operating conditions (Y page 313).
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz Check tire pressures regularly, and only
recommends that you only use Tires and when the tires are cold. Comply with the
wheels which have been approved by maintenance recommendations of the tire
Mercedes-Benz specifically for your manufacturer in the vehicle document
vehicle. wallet.
These tires have been specially adapted for
i Notes on the vehicle equipment always
use with the control systems, such as ABS
equip the vehicle:
or ESP, and are marked as follows:
Rwith tires of the same size on a given axle
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
(left/right)
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
Rwith the same type of tires at a given time
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only
tires)
certain AMG tires)
i On the following pages, you can find
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires
may only be used on wheels that have been information on approved wheel rims and
specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with
winter tires. Winter tires are not available
Only use tires, wheels or accessories ex factory as standard equipment or
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. optional extras.
Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,
vehicle noise emissions or fuel If you wish to mount approved winter tires
consumption, may otherwise be adversely on your vehicle, you may, in certain
Z
336 Wheel and tire combinations
circumstances, require wheel rims of the

appropriate size. The sizes of the approved
winter tires may differ from those of the
original tires. This is dependent on the
model and the equipment installed at the
factory.
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further
information, can be obtained at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized
i Overview of abbreviations used in the
following tire tables:
RBA: both axles
RFA: front axle
RRA: rear axle
In the following table, the wheel/tire

combinations are allocated to the vehicle
models through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:
Wheels and tires
V1 C 250, C 250 4MATIC

V2 C 300 4MATIC
V3 C 350, C 350 4MATIC
V4 C 63 AMG
i Not all wheel and tire combinations are

available ex factory for all countries.
Tires
Summer tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

BA 225/45 R17 91 W 7.5 J x 17 H2 # # #
MOExtended27, 28 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
FA 225/45 R17 91 W 7.5 J x 17 H2 # # #
MOExtended27 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
RA 245/40 R17 91 W 8.5 J x 17 H2
MOExtended27, 29 Wheel offset: 2.28 in (58 mm)
FA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL 7.5 J x 18 H2 # # #
Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
RA 255/35 R18 94 Y XL29 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA 225/40 R18 92 Y XL 8.0 J x 18 H2 # # #
RA 255/35 R18 94 Y XL29 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheels and tires

FA 225/40 ZR18 92 Y XL 8.0 J x 18 H2 # # #
RA 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL29 8.5 J x 18 H2
FA 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL 8.0 J x 18 H2 #
RA 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL29 9.0 J x 18 H2
FA 235/35 ZR19 XL 8.0 J x 19 H2 #
RA 255/30 ZR19 XL29 9.0 J x 19 H2
27 MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss
warning system or tire pressure monitor.
28 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486, dynamic handling package code 483 or Sports package
code 950/952.
29 Useof snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
Z
338 Wheel and tire combinations
All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

BA 205/55 R16 91 H M+S30 7 J x 16 H2 #
BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+S28 7.5 J x 17 H2 # #
FA 225/45 R17 91 H M+S 7.5 J x 17 H2 # # #
RA 245/40 R17 91 H M+S29 8.5 J x 17 H2
Winter tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

BA 205/55 R1 6 91 H 7 J x 16 H2 #
M+Si30 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)
BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si 7.5 J x 17 H2 # # #
Wheels and tires

BA 225/45 R17 91 H 7.5 J x 17 H2 # # #
M+SiMOExtended27 Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)
BA 225/40 R18 92 V XL 8.0 J x 18 H2 #
M+Si Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
BA 235/40 R18 95 V XL 8.0 J x 18 H2 #
FA 235/40 R18 95 V XL 8.0 J x 18 H2 #
M+Si Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)
RA 255/35 R18 94 V XL 9.0 J x 18 H2
30 Not in combination with Sports package code 950/952.

28 Not in combination with sports suspension code 486, dynamic handling package code 483 or Sports package
code 950/952.
29 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
27 MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss
warning system or tire pressure monitor.
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel29

Tires Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4
T 125/90 R16 98 M 3.5 B x 16 H2 # #
Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/ Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm)
61 psi)
T 125/80 R17 99 M 3.5 B x 17 H2 #
61 psi)
T 125/70 R18 99 M 3.5 B x 18 H2 #
61 psi)
i The specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency/collapsible spare wheel.
Wheels and tires
29 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
Z
340
341

Notes on technical data ................... 342
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 342
Warranty ............................................ 343
Identification plates ......................... 343
Service products and capacities ..... 344
Vehicle data ...................................... 351
Technical data
342 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
Useful information G WARNING

Driving safety may be impaired if non-
i This Operator's Manual describes all approved parts, tires and wheels or safety-
models and all standard and optional relevant accessories are used.
equipment of your vehicle available at the This could lead to malfunctions in safety-
time of publication of the Operator's relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. This
Manual. Country-specific differences are could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
possible. Please note that your vehicle may and cause an accident.
For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or
parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels
i Please read the information on qualified and accessories that have been specifically
specialist workshops (Y page 24). approved for your vehicle.
! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning

Notes on technical data Devices, as well as control units and
sensors for these restraint systems may be
i The data stated here specifically refers to installed in the following areas of your
a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult vehicle:
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for Rdoors
the data for all vehicle variants and trim Rdoor pillars
levels. Rdoor sills
Technical data
Rseats
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Rdashboard

Rinstrument cluster
All Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply Rcenter console
of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for
Do not install accessories such as audio
necessary service and repair work. In
systems in these areas. Do not carry out
addition, strategically located parts delivery
repairs or welding. You could impair the
centers provide for quick and reliable parts
operating efficiency of the restraint
service.
systems.
There are more than 300,000 different
Have aftermarket accessories installed at
genuine Mercedes-Benz parts available for
a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-
Mercedes-Benz models.
Benz recommends that you use an
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this
strict quality control. Each part has been purpose.
specially developed, manufactured or
selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and H Environmental note
fine-tuned for them. Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts assemblies and parts which are of the same
should be used. quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
Always specify the vehicle identification

number (VIN) (Y page 343) and the engine
Identification plates 343
number (Y page 344) when ordering genuine Identification plates

Mercedes-Benz parts.
Vehicle identification plate with
vehicle identification number (VIN)
Warranty and paint code number
The Service and Warranty Information

booklet contains detailed information about
the warranties covering your vehicle.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
REmission System Warranty X Open the driver's door.
REmission Performance Warranty
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island and Vermont Emission
Control Systems Warranty
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Technical data
Laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories warranties. You can obtain
information about this from any authorized
i Should you lose your Service and Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
Warranty Information booklet, have an ; VIN
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange = Paint code
for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)

; VIN
= Paint code
Z
344 Service products and capacities
i The data shown on the identification plate Engine number

is example data. This data is different for
every vehicle and can deviate from the data
shown here. You can find the data
applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's
identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) can
be found in the following locations:
Ron the vehicle identification plate
: Emission control information plate,
(Y page 343)
including the certification of both federal
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
and Californian emissions standards
(Y page 344) ; Engine number (stamped into the
In addition to being stamped on the vehicle crankcase)
identification plate, the vehicle identification = VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
number (VIN) is also stamped onto the vehicle
body.
It is located on the floor in front of the right- Service products and capacities
hand front seat.
Technical data
Service products include the following:

Rfuels (e.g. gasoline, diesel)
Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
Rcoolant
Rbrake fluid
Rwindshield washer fluid
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. You should therefore
only use products that have been tested and
X Slide the right-hand front seat to its approved by Mercedes-Benz.
rearmost position.
Information on tested and approved products
X Fold floor covering : upwards.
can be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz Center
You will see vehicle identification number or on the Internet at http://
(VIN) ;. www.mbusa.com (USA only).
G WARNING
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing and disposing of service
fluids. Otherwise, you could endanger
persons or the environment.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
children.
Service products and capacities 345
For health reasons, you should prevent

service fluids from coming into direct contact
with your skin or clothing.
If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
physician immediately.
Technical data
Z
Capacities
Missing values were not available at time of going to print.
Model Capacity Fuel, coolant,

lubricants, etc.
Engine oil and C 250 5.8 US qt (5.5 l) Approved engine
filter oils
C 250 4MATIC31 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
C 300 4MATIC
C 350
C 350 4MATIC31
C 63 AMG32 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Cooling system C 250 Approximately 7.6 US qt MB 325.0 or
(7.2 l) MB 326.0
antifreeze/
C 250 4MATIC31 Approximately 8.9 US qt corrosion inhibitor
C 300 4MATIC (8.4 l)
C 350
C 350 4MATIC31
Technical data
C 63 AMG Approximately 12.4 US qt

(11.7 l)
Tank capacity C 250 15.6 US gal (59.0 l) Premium-grade
unleaded gasoline
All models except 17.4 US gal (66.0 l) (at least 91 octane,
C 250 average value
Reserve All models except Approximately 2.1 US gal between 96 RON/
AMG vehicles (8.0 l) 86 MON)
C 63 AMG Approximately 3.7 US gal

(14.0 l)
Windshield/ C 250 3.7 US qt (3.5 l) MB windshield
headlamp C 350 washer
cleaning concentrate33
C 350 4MATIC31
system (Y page 351)
C 63 AMG
Mixing ratio for
C 250 4MATIC31 6.3 US qt (6.0 l) washer fluid
C 300 4MATIC (Y page 351)
31 Canada only.
32 Includingexternal oil cooler.
33 Mixed with water or premixed washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Fuel Flexible fuel vehicles
Important safety notes Important safety notes

Flexible fuel vehicles can be recognized by
G WARNING the sticker on the inside of the filler flap.
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
Flexible fuel vehicles can be operated with
It burns violently and can cause serious
premium-grade unleaded gasoline and
personal injury.
ethanol (E85) or a mixture of both. Ethanol
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking fuel (E85) is a mixture of approximately 85%
materials near gasoline. ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.
Turn off the engine before refueling.
G WARNING
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing Ethanol fuel (E85) and its vapors are highly
contact. flammable, poisonous and highly
combustible. Ethanol fuel causes serious
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
injury if it ignites, if it comes into contact with
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to your
your skin or if you inhale the vapors. Avoid
health.
inhaling ethanol vapors and ethanol coming
into contact with your skin. Before refueling,
Premium-grade unleaded gasoline extinguish all naked flames. Never allow
! To ensure the longevity and full sparks or smoking materials near ethanol.
performance of the engine, only premium- Changing the fuel type
grade unleaded gasoline may be used.
For best performance and drivability, it is
Technical data
If there is no premium-grade unleaded
recommended that you use either one or the
gasoline available and regular-grade
other fuel. Avoid alternating regularly
unleaded gasoline may be used; please
between the two different types of fuel.
observe the following precautions:
When changing between the fuel types,
Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with ensure that the following conditions are met:
regular-grade unleaded gasoline and fill
Rthe fuel level is below half full.
the rest with premium-grade unleaded
Rthe fuel level is above the reserve level. This
gasoline as soon as possible.
Rdo not drive at the maximum speed. is identifiable by the fuel tank reserve
warning lamp not being lit.
Ravoid sudden acceleration.
Ryou add more than 5 gallons (20 liters) of
Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g.
fuel.
two passengers without luggage, do not
Ryou switch off the engine before refueling.
allow the engine to rev above
Rthe engine is started and runs for at least
3,000 rpm.
Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is being five minutes immediately after refueling.
operated in mountainous terrain, do not These precautions should prevent the
depress the accelerator pedal further possibility of engine difficulties arising from
than of the pedal travel. changing to a different fuel type.
If the engine still doesn't run correctly, refuel
with at least 3 US gal (12 l) of premium-grade
unleaded gasoline. This may improve the
running of the engine.
Z
Fuel consumption Reformulated gasoline (RFG) and/or

Ethanol (E85) contains less energy per gallon unleaded gasoline with additives can be used.
than gasoline. To ensure that the engine However, the concentration of additives in
performance with ethanol (E85) is similar to the fuel must be less than 10%, e.g.
that when using gasoline, the engine must REthanol
burn more ethanol. As a result, it is to be RTAME
expected that fuel consumption will increase RETBE
when using ethanol fuel (E85), compared to
RIPA
gasoline.
RTBA
Maintenance
For MTBE, the concentration should not
Inform your authorized Mercedes-Benz exceed 15%.
Center that you are operating or have
The concentration of methanol in gasoline
operated the vehicle with ethanol (E85).
including other additives must not exceed 3%.
Low outside temperatures Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not
Starting times may significantly increase at permitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanol
temperatures below 32 (0 ). At low and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used.
outside temperatures, Mercedes-Benz All of these mix fuels must fulfill the fuel
recommends the use of an auxiliary heater. requirements, e.g.:
For further information, consult an authorized Rknock resistance
Mercedes-Benz Center. Rboilingpoint
Rough idling may also be experienced at low Rvapor pressure
Technical data
outside temperatures until the engine is fully

warmed up.
Additives in gasoline
Ethanol (E85) is unsuitable for use if outside
temperatures fall below 14 (-10 ). One of the main problems of poor fuel quality
is the forming of deposits that are created
High outside temperatures during the gasoline combustion process.
At outside temperatures above 95 (35 ), Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
the time required for the starting procedure fuel brands that have the additives.
may increase and be accompanied by rough Deposits may form if you use fuels without
idling following the start. additives over a longer period of time. These
deposits are most likely to form on the inlet
Fuel requirements valves and in the combustion chamber.
Use only premium-grade unleaded gasoline. This could lead to engine problems, e.g.:
The octane number should be at least 91. Rlonger engine warm-up phase
Details can be found on the gas pump. The Runeven idle
octane number is the average value of the
Rengine noise
Research Octane Number (RON) and the
Motor Octane Number (MON): (RON + Rmisfiring
MON) / 2, also known as knock resistance. Rloss of power
Carbon deposits may form if the availability

of gasoline with relevant additives is
insufficient (in certain regions). In this case,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives that have been approved for The table shows which engine oils have been
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. approved for your vehicle.
Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Missing values were not available at time of
or go to the Internet site going to print.
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a list
of approved products. Comply with the Model Engine MB
instructions for use on the product label. model Approval
Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This C 250 271 229.3,
causes unnecessary costs and could damage 229.5,
the engine. 229.51
! Do not refuel with low-grade fuel and do C 250 4MATIC34 272 229.5
not use fuel additives that are not tested
C 300 4MATIC
and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Damage to or malfunctions of the fuel C 350 276
system may otherwise occur. C 350 4MATIC34
C 63 AMG 156 229.535
Engine oil
Please bear the following in mind i MB approval is indicated on the oil
containers.
The engine oils are matched to the
performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and Additives
Technical data
service intervals. You should therefore only
use engine oils and oil filters that are ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
approved for vehicles with maintenance This could damage the engine.
systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, Engine oil viscosity
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Viscosity describes the flow characteristics
Center. Or visit http://www.mbusa.com of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,
(USA only). this means that it is thick; a low viscosity
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a means that it is thin.
specification other than is necessary to Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity)
fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do classification suitable for the prevailing
not change the engine oil or oil filter in outside temperatures. The following table
order to achieve longer replacement shows the correct SAE classification to be
intervals than those prescribed. You could used. The low-temperature characteristics of
otherwise cause engine damage or damage engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g.
to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. as a result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It
Follow the instructions in the service is therefore strongly recommended that you
interval display regarding the oil change. carry out regular oil changes using an
Otherwise, you may damage the engine and approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE
the exhaust gas aftertreatment. classification.
34 Canada only.
35 Restriction: only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.
Z
Coolant
The coolant is a mixture of water and
antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs
the following tasks:
Rcorrosion protection
Rantifreeze protection
Rraising the boiling point
The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with coolant that contains an
Refrigerant of the air-conditioning antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor that ensures
system protection down to approximately -35
(-37 ).
The air-conditioning system is filled with
R134a refrigerant and a special PAG ! Only add coolant that has been premixed
lubricant. with the desired antifreeze protection.
Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
! Never use refrigerant R 12 (CFC) or Further information on coolants and on
mineral lubricants. Otherwise, you could filling can be found in the Mercedes-Benz
damage the air-conditioning system. Specifications for Service Products, MB
Approval 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at
Technical data
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You can

Brake fluid also consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
G WARNING Center.
Over a period of time, the brake fluid absorbs ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,
moisture from the air; this lowers its boiling even in countries where high temperatures
point. prevail.
If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
vapor pockets may form in the brake system sufficiently protected from corrosion and
when the brakes are applied hard (e.g. when overheating.
driving downhill). This would impair braking
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down
efficiency.
to -35 (-37 ), the boiling point of the
You should have the brake fluid renewed at coolant under operating conditions is
regular intervals. The brake fluid change approximately 266 (130 ).
intervals can be found in the Service Booklet.
Your vehicle has a range of aluminum
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- components. Aluminum components in the
Benz. Information about approved brake engine make it necessary to use antifreeze/
fluids can be obtained from any authorized corrosion inhibitor coolant that has been
Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at specifically formulated to protect the
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. aluminum parts. Using other antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitors without these
characteristics affects the service life.
The coolant must be used throughout the year
in order to maintain the necessary corrosion
Vehicle data 351
protection and to provide protection from Use MB SummerFit windshield washer

overheating. In the Service Booklet, you can concentrate at temperatures above freezing:
find information on the intervals for renewal. X Mix 1 part MB SummerFit with 100 parts
The renewal interval is determined by the water.
coolant type and the engine cooling system
design. The renewal interval in the Service Use MB WinterFit windshield washer
Booklet is only valid if the coolant is renewed concentrate at temperatures below freezing:
or filled up with Mercedes-Benz approved X At temperatures down to 14 ( 10 ):
products. Therefore, only use MB 325.0 or mix 1 part MB WinterFit with 2 parts water.
326.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze or another X At temperatures down to 4 ( 20 ):
Mercedes-Benz approved product of the mix 1 part MB WinterFit with 1 part water.
same specification.
X At temperatures down to 20.2
Information on other products with the same
( 29 ): mix 2 parts MB WinterFit with 1
specifications that are approved by
part water.
Mercedes-Benz can be obtained at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the ! Only SummerFit and WinterFit can be
Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. mixed. Otherwise, the jets could become
The coolant is checked at every maintenance blocked.
interval at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor Vehicle data
concentration in the engine cooling system
should: Please note that for the specified vehicle
Technical data
Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine
data:
cooling system against freezing down to Rthe heights specified may vary as a result
approximately -35 (-37 ). of:
Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection to - tires
-49 [-45 ]); otherwise, heat will not - load
dissipate as effectively. - condition of the suspension
If the coolant level is too low, MB 325.0 or - optional equipment
326.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should be Missing values were not available at time of
added. Have the engine cooling system going to print.
checked for possible leaks.
All models
Windshield/headlamp cleaning Vehicle length 182.3 in (4630 mm)

system Vehicle width 79.1 in (2008 mm)
G WARNING including exterior
mirrors
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ Vehicle height 56.9 in (1444 mm)
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously Wheelbase 108.7 in (2760 mm)
burned. Front track 60.7 in (1541 mm)
Rear track 60.8 in (1544 mm)
Z
352 Vehicle data
All models
Turning circle 35.57 ft (10.84 m)
Maximum roof load
Maximum trunk Maximum 220lb
load (100kg)
C 63 AMG
Vehicle length 185.5 in (4712 mm)
Vehicle width 79.1 in (2008 mm)
including exterior
mirrors
Vehicle height 56.4 in (1433 mm)
Wheelbase 108.9 in (2765 mm)
Front track 61.8 in (1569 mm)
Rear track 60.0 in (1525 mm)
Turning circle 36.42 ft (11.10 m)
Technical data
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz

vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found
on the following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada
only)
Editorial office
Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise

reproduced, in whole or in part, without the
written permission of Daimler AG.
As at 15.03.2011
2045843582
2045843582
Order no. 6515 0749 13 Part no. 204 584 35 82 Edition A 2012

2012 C Class Sedan

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2012 C Class Sedan

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

C-Class

Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27

Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety ................................................... 35

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 91

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 105

Climate control ................................. 121

Driving and parking .......................... 135

On-board computer and displays .... 193

Stowing and features ....................... 253

Maintenance and care ...................... 277

Breakdown assistance ..................... 291

Wheels and tires ............................... 309

Technical data ................................... 341

1, 2, 3 ... Important safety notes .................... 38

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Important safety notes .................. 298

Doors Driving systems

F Dashboard fuse box ....................... 305

High-beam headlamps ................... 109 M

Multifunction display Factory settings submenu ............. 210

Position of exterior mirror, front- Q

Remote control Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 52

Stowage well beneath the trunk Redialing ........................................ 203

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Uniform Tire Quality Grading

U Check Engine ................................. 246

Replacing the wiper blades ............ 118

Product information Vehicle equipment

Information for customers in Maintenance

If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to Operating safety

In Canada distance from the road.

G WARNING Proper use

In the USA 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,

In Canada Limited Warranty

1 The system is called TELE AID in Canada.

Please observe the mbrace1 purchase

1 The system is called TELE AID in Canada.

Function Page Function Page

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page Function Page

Overhead control panel

Door control panel

Useful information .............................. 36

Useful information to the restraint systems no longer functioning

G WARNING environment. Check your national disposal

In addition, improper work on the SRS creates or part of the SRS.

performed by qualified technicians. G WARNING

The front air bag is fully deployed if a second

G WARNING If the OCS detects that the front-passenger

Pelvis air bag deployment enhances the level

Front side impact air bags : and rear side

Rindependently of the front air bags Rindependently of seat belt use

acceleration/deceleration. You will then be thresholds for vehicle deceleration or

To be classified correctly, the front passenger

If the front-passenger's weight is transferred

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz remain illuminated or go out. With the

Problems with the occupant classification system

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

illuminates and Mercedes-Benz Center.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK- G WARNING

restraint and the rear cover of the head